Digital PDFs

AA-2185B-TC

January 1978

283 pages

Original

16MB

Document:	AA-2185-TC GAMMA-11 Operators Guide Jan78
Order Number:	AA-2185B-TC
Revision:	0
Pages:	283
Original Filename:	AA-2185-TC_GAMMA-11_Operators_Guide_Jan78.pdf

OCR Text

GAMMA-11
Operator's Guide

January 1978

This document describes the operating procedures for GAMMA-11.
For background information to this manual, refer to the
Introduction to GAMMA-ll (AA-5689A-TC).

SUPERSESSION/UPDATE INFORMATION:

This document.completelysupersedes the
document of the same name, Order No.
DEC-11-MGOGA-A-D published August
1976.
t

OPERATING SYSTEM AND VERSION:

RT-11 V03

SOFTWARE VERSION:

GAMMA-11 V2C

To order additional copies of this document, contact the Software Distribution
Center, Digital Equipment Corporation, Maynard, Massachusetts 01754

GAMMA-11
Operator's Guide
Order No. AA-2185B-TC

digital equipment corporation · maynard, massachusetts

First Printing, August 1976
Revision, January 1978

The information in this document is subject to change without notice
and should not be construed as a commitment by Digital Equipment
Corporation. Digital Equipment Corporation assumes no responsibility
for any errors that may appear in this document.
The software described in this document is furnished under a license
and may only be used or copied in accordance with the terms of such
license.
No responsibility is assumed for the use or reliability of software on
equipment that is not supplied by DIGITAL or its affiliated companies.

The postage-prepaid READER'S COMMENTS form on the last page of this
document requests the user's critical evaluation to assist us in preparing future documentation.
The following are trademarks of Digital Equipment Corporation:

DIGITAL
DEC
PDP
DECUS
UNIBUS
COMPUTER LABS
COMTEX
DDT
DECCOMM
ASSIST-ll

DECsystem-lO
DECtape
DIBOL
EDUSYSTEM
FLIP CHIP
FOCAL
INDAC
LAB-8
DECSYSTEM-20
RTS-8

2/78-14

MASSBUS
OMNIBUS
OS/8
PHA
RSTS
RSX
TYPESET-8
TYPESET-ll
TMS-ll
ITPS-IO

CONTENTS

Page

xiii

PREFACE
PART 1 GAMMA-II SYSTEM OVERVIEW
CHAPTER

CHAPTER

INTRODUCTION

1-1

1.1
1.2
1.3
1.3.1
1.4
1.4.1
1.4.2
1.4.3
1.4.4
1.4.5
1.4.6
1.4.7

GAMMA-II AND YOU
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS
The Gamma Camera
STUDY TYPES
Static Study
Dynamic Study
Flood Study
List Study
Gate-Synchronized Study
Gated-List Study
Predefined Study

1~ 2
1-2
1-2
1-3
1-4
1-4
1;....4
1-4
1-5
1-5
1-5
1-5

GAMMA-II SOFTWARE ENVIRONMENT

2-1

2.1
2.1.1
2.1.2
2.2
2.2.1
2.2.2
2.2.3
2.2.4
2.2.5
2.2.6

2-1
2-1
2-1
2-2
2-2
2-2
2-3
2-3
2-3

2.2.7

INTRODUCTION TO RT-11
The Single-User Background System
The Foreground/Background System
GAMMA-II AND RT-11
The Single and Background User
Data Analysis (Background Only)
Study Deletion (Background Only)
Study Transfer (Background Only)
system Summary (Background or Foreground)
Data Acquisition Used as Foreground or
Background
Patient Monitor (Background Only)

GAMMA-II STARTING PROCEDURES

3-1

LOADING GAMMA-II FOR THE SINGLE-JOB USERS
Loading Commands
LOADING GAMMA-II FOR THE
FOREGROUND/BACKGROUND USERS
Foreground Commands
3.2.1
KEYBOARD PROCEDURES AND SPECIAL CHARACTERS
3.3
RT-11 Operating System Characters
3.3.1
GAMMA-II Characters
3.3.2
3.3.3
Exiting from GAMMA-II to RT-11
3.3.4
Reentering GAMMA-II from RT-11
Reentering a Single Job or a Background Job
3.3.4.1
Reentering a F/B System
3.3.4.2
3.4
CONTROL CHARACTERS WITHIN GAMMA-II

3.1
3.1.1
3.2

iii

2-3
2-4

3-1
3-2
3-3
3-5
3-6
3-6
3-8
3-9
3-9
3-9
3-10
3-10

CONTENTS ( CONT • )

PART 2 GAMMA-II DATA ACQUISITION
Page
CHAPTER

GAMMA-II DATA ACQUISITION

GAMMA-II SYSTEM SUMMARY
4.1
4.1.1
Matrix Sizes and Types
Insufficient Disk Space
4.1.2
4.2
SET-UP AND ACQUIRE PATIENT STUDY
Study Plan Page 1: Patient Data
4.2.1
Study Plan Page 2: Camera Parameters
4.2.2
Study Plan Page 3: Collection Parameters
4.2.3
Static Collection parameters
4.2.4
4'.2.5
Static Study summary
Precollection Frame
4.2.6
Data Collection
4.2.7
Special Comments on Dual-Isotope Studies
4.2.7.1
Restarting a Static Frame on Acquisition
4.2.7.2
Dynamic Collection parameters
4.2.8
Dynamic Study Summary
4.2.9
Precollection Frame
4.2.10
Data Collection
4.2.11
Dynamic Collection Rates
4.2.12
LIST STUDY
4.3
List Collection Parameters
4.3.1
Data Collection
4.3.2
List Mode Collection Using Fls
4.3.3
4.4
FLOOD STUDY ACQUISITION
PREDEFINED STUDY ACQUISITION
4.5
set Up a Predefined Study
4.5.1
Acquiring Data with a Predefined Study
4.5.2
Modify a Predefined Study
4.5.3
Delete a Predefined Study
4.5.4
COMMENTS ABOUT ABORTING DATA ACQUISITION
4.6
COMMENTS ABOUT MATRICES
4.7
IN-CORE GATE-SYNCHRONIZED STUDY
4.8
Gate-Synchronized Collection Parameters
4.8.1
Gate-Synchronized Study Summary
4.8.2
Gate-Synchronized Study Precollection
4.8.3
Data Acquisition
4.8.4
Hints on Using Gate-Synchronized
4.8.5
Acquisition
PATIENT MONITORING
4.9

4-1
4-1
4-3
4-3
4-3
4-4
4-6
4-11
4-11
4-13
4-15
4-15
4-16
4-16
4-16
4-18
4-19
4-19
4-20
4-21
4-21
4-23
4-24
4-24
4-26
4-26
4-27
4-29
4-30
4-31
4-31
4-32
4-33
4-35
4-35
4-36
4-36
4-37

PART 3 GAMMA-II" DATA ANALYSIS
CHAPTER

GENERAL DATA ANALYSIS COMMANDS

5-1

5.1
5.1.1
5.1.2
5.2
5.3
5.3.1
5.3.2
5.3.3
5.3.4
5.3.5
5.3.6

INITIATING AND CONTINUING DATA ANALYSIS
Initiating Data Analysis
Continue Analysis
THE DISPLAY FRAME
DISPLAY MODE COMMANDS
Error Processing
Multiple Command Lines
Full Size Display
Minified Display
Display Index
Display Patient Data Summary

5-1
5-1
5-4
5-4
5-6
5-6
5-7
5-8
5-8
5-10
5-10

CONTENTS (CONT.)

Page
5.3.7
5.4
5.4.1
5.4.2
.5.4.3
5.4.4
5.4.5
5.5
5.5.1
5.5.2
5.5.3
5.5.4
. 5.6
5.6.1
5.7
5.7.1
5.7.2
5.7.3
5.7.4
5.7.5
5.7.6
5.7.7
5.7.8
5.8
5.8.1
5.8.2
5.8.3
5.9
5.9.1
5.9.2
5.9.3
5.10
5.11
5.11.1

5.11.2
5.11.3
5.12
5.13
5.13.1
5.13.2
5.14
5.14.1
5.14.2
5.14.3

5.15
5.15.1

5.15.2
5.15.3
5.15.4
5.16
5.16.1
5.16.2
5.17
5.17.1
5.17.2
5.17.3

No Display
FRAME SELECTION COMMANDS
Next Frame
Skip Forward
Skip Backward
Restore Current Frame
Beginning
DUAL ISOTOPE SELECTION COMMANDS
Select Isotope A
Select Isotope B
Isotope Exchange
Dual Isotope Display
THRESHOLD INTENSITY LEVELS AND CONTRAST
ENHANCEMENT
Display Thresholds and Steps
THRESHOLD ADJUSTMENT COMMANDS
Set Lower Threshold and Step
Set Upper Threshold and Step
Raise the Lower Threshold by Step Size
Lower the Lower Threshold by Step Size
Lower the Upper Threshold by Step Size
Raise the Upper Threshold by Step Size
Set the Upper Threshold Display Switch
Clear the Upper Threshold Display Switch
ISOCOUNT BAND COMMANDS
Set Isocount Thresholds
Raise Band
Lower Band
NO-ENHANCEMENT MODE COMMANDS
NO-Enhancement Lower Threshold
No-Enhancement Upper Threshold
NO-Enhancement Isocount Thresholds
FRAME ALGEBRA
CONSTANT ARITHMETIC COMMANDS
Constant Add
Constant Subtract
Constant Multiply
NEGATIVE (COMPLEMENTED) IMAGES COMMAND
BYTE-WORD EXPANSION COMMANDS
Expand
No Expansion
FRAME ARITHMETIC COMMANDS
Consecutive Add
Frame Arithmetic
Save Area Arithmetic
FRAME DIVISION COMMANDS
Frame Divide High
Frame Divide Low
Save Area Divlde High
Save Area Divide Low
NONLINEAR IMAGES
Hyperbolic Images
A Multiplicative Nonlinear Image
SAVE AREA COMMANDS
Save Matrix
Save Dynamic Curves
Read Save Area

5-10
5-11
5-11
5-11
5-12
5-12
5-13
5-13
5-14
5-14
5-14
5-15
5-15
5-17
5-17
5-17
5-18
5-18
5-19
5-19
5-20
5-21
5-22
5-22
5-22
5-23
5-24
5-24
5-25
5-26
5-28
5-29
5-30
5-30
5-30
5-31
5-32
5-33
5-33
5-33
5-34
5-34
5-35
5-36
5-38
5-38
5-39
5-39
5-40
5-40
5-41
5-41
5-42
5-42
5-42
5-43

CONTENTS ( CONT • )

Page

CHAPTER

5.17.4
5.17.5
5.18
5.19
5.19.1
5.19.2
5.20
5.20.1
5.20.2
5.21
5.21.1
5.21.2
5:21.3
5.22
5.22.1
5.23
5.23.1
5.23.2
5.23.3
5.24
5.24.1
5.24.2
5.24.3
5.24.4
5.24.5
5.24.6
5.24.7
5.24.8
5.24.9
5.24.10
5.24.11
5.24.12
5.24.13
5.24.14

Read Regions of Interest
Delete Save Area
SMOOTHING COMMAND
ISOCONTOUR COMMANDS
Isocontour Map
Isocontour Fill
ISOMETRIC COMMANDS
Isometrics Display
Display Normal
IMAGE ROTATION AND TRANSLATION COMMANDS
Rotate Data
Translate vertical
Translate Horizontal
COMMENT EDITOR COMMANDS
Call Comment Editor
KEYBOARD ECHO-PRINT COMMANDS
Echo Keyboard Input
No Echo
Text
DATA ANALYSIS MACRO COMMANDS
Macro Create
Macro Edit
Macro Load
Macro Run
Macro Save
Macro Delete
Macro Exit
The Comment Line
Execute Line
Listing Macro Files
The Repeat-line Command
The Conditional Command
Inputting Commands While Running a Macro
A Macro Example

5.25

LANGUAGE EXECUTION COMMANDS

5.25.1
5.25.2
5.25.3
5.26
5.26.1
5.26.2
5.26.3
5.26.4
5.27
5.27.1
5.27.2
5.28
5.29

BASIC
FORTRAN
FOCAL
LIST MODE PROCESSING
List Study Framing
Storage Options
Display Frame Command
Framing Method
GATED-LIST-MODE PROCESSING
Gated-List-Mode Study Framing
Formatting the Data
ERRORS
AUTOMATING DATA ACQUISITION AND ANALYSIS

5-44
5-44
5-45
5-46
5-46
5-47
5-51
5-51
5-52
5-52
5-53
5-54
5-55
5-57
5-57
5-59
5-59
5-59
5-60
5-60
5-61
5-61
5-63
5-63
5-64
5-65
5-65
5-65
5-66
5-66
5-67
5-67
5-68
5-68
5-69
5-70
5-70
5-71
5-71
5-71
5-75
5-76
5-77
5-77
5-78
5-82
5-83
5-83

ADDITIONAL ANALYSIS COMMANDS FOR THE COLOR
DISPLAY

6-1

BLACK AND WHITE COMMANDS
From Color to Black and White
From Black and White to Color
INTENSITY COMMANDS

6-1
6-1
6-2
6-2.

6.1
6.1.1
6.1.2
6.2

CONTENTS (CONT.)

Page

6.2.1
6.2.2
6.3

CHAPTER

6-2
6-3

6.3.1
6.3.2
6.3.3
6.4
6.4.1
6.4.2
6.4.3
6.4.4
6.4.5
6.4.6
6.4.7
6.4.8
6.4.9
6.4.10
6.4.11
6.5
6.5.1
6.5.2
6.5.3
6.6
6.6.1
6.6.2
6.7
6.7.1
6.7.2
6.7.3
6.7.4
6.7.5
6.8
6.8.1
6.8.2
6.8.3
6.8.4
6.8.5
6.8.6
6.8.7
6.8.8
6.8.9
6.9
6.9.1
6.9.2

Intensity Scale Bar
Removing the Intensity Scale Bar
THE COLOR TABLE AND THE COLOR TABLE
COMMANDS
Retrieving a Color Table
Saving a Color Table
Changing a Color Level
COLOR-TABLE EDITING COMMANDS
Color-Table Editor
zeroing the Color Table
Changing a Color Element
Inserting a Color Element
Deleting a Color Level
saving an Edited Color Table
Getting a Color Table
printing a Color Table
Displaying a Ramp
Displaying the Matrix
Exiting from the Color Table Editor
THE INTERPOLATED DISPLAY
Interpolation Command
No Interpolation
Double Interpolation
DISPLAY COMMANDS
Blow-Up
No Blow-Up
DUAL DISPLAY COMMANDS
Loading Dual Displays
Dual Display
No Dual Display
Dual Overlay
Swap
DYNAMIC PLAYBACK
Playback Buffer
Scaling Algorithms
Storing Images in the Playback Buffer
Creating a Playback Buffer
Storing Images in a Playback Buffer
Playing Back the Playback Buffer
Playback Commands
Deleting a Playback Buffer
Playback Merge
EIGHT AND SIXTEEN IMAGE DISPLAYS
Display Eight Images
Display Sixteen Images

REGIONS OF INTEREST

7-1

7.1
7.2
7.2.1
7.2.2
7.2.3
7.2.4
7.2.5
7.2.6

REGULAR REGION OF INTEREST (ROI) COMMAND
CONTROL COMMANDS
Up
Down
Left
Right
Jump
Mark

7-2
7-2
7-3
7-3
7-3
7-4
7-4
7-4

vii

6-3
6-4
6-4
6-5
6-5
6-6
6-7
6-7
6-8
6-8
6-9
6-9
6-9
6~10

6-10
6-10
6-10
6-11
6-11
6-12
6-15
6-15
6-15
6-15
6-16
6-16
6-17
6-17
6-18
6-18
6-19
6-21
6-21
6-22
6-23
6-25
6-26
6-26
6-27
6-28
6-29
6-29

CONTENTS (CONT.)

Page

7.8
7.8.1
7.8.2
7.8.3
7.9
7.9.1
7.9.2
7.9.3
7.10
7.10.1
7.10.2
7.10.3
7.10.4
7.11
7.11.1
7.11.2
7.11.3
7.12
7.13

Same Shape
Kill
Step Through the Study
Erase
IRREGULAR REGIONS OF INTEREST
Joystick Positioning
Irregular ROI Command
Erase Cells
Enlarging an Area of the Display
DEFINITION MODE COMMANDS
Circumference Mode
Fill Mode
Defining an ROI Using Threshold Levels
DISPLAY MODE COMMANDS
Boundary Display
Interior Display
OTHER COMMANDS
Threshold Adjustment
Carriage Return
Space Bar
Hyphen
DYNAMIC-STUDY CURVES
CURVE-CALCULATION COMMANDS
Plot Normal Dynamic Curves
Plot Overlaid Dynamic Curves
Plot Overlaid Average Rate Curves
FRAME-LINEAR SCALE COMMANDS
Plot Normal Frame-Linear Curves
Plot Overlaid Frame-Linear Curves
Plot Average Frame-Linear Curves
WINDOW COMMANDS (PARTIAL CURVE PLOTTING)
Plot Window
Plot Forward Window
Plot Backward Window
Plotted Averages
TABULAR DATA
Print Count Data
Punch Count Data
Print and Punch Count Data
SAVE AREA USE
EXIT

7-S
7-S
7-6
7-6
7-7
7-7
7-7
7':'8
7-9
7-10
7-10
7-11
7-11
7-lS
7.... lS
7-15
7-16
7-16
7-16
7-16
7-17
7-17
7-17
7-17
7-18
7-20

SLICING

8-1

8.1
8.1.1
8.1.2
8.2
8.2.1
8.3
8.4
8.S
8.S.l
8.S.2
8.6
8.6.1

SLICE SELECTION COMMANDS
Horizontal Slice
Vertical Slice
IMMEDIATE-EFFECT SELECTION COMMANDS
Mark
FRAME SELECTION (DYNAMIC STUDIES ONLY)
STARTING THE SLICE OVER
SLICE CURVE PLOTS
Curve Scales
Scale Factor
SLICE TABULAR DATA
Print Slice Data

8-1
8-1
8-2
8-3
8-3
8-3
8-3
8-4
8-7
8-7
8-8
8-8

7.2.7
7.2.8
7.2.9
7.2.10
7.3
7.3.1
7.3.2
7.3.3
7.3.4
7.4

7.4.1
7 •. 4.2
7.4.3
7.S
7.S.l
7.S.2
7.6
7.6.1
7.6.2
7.6.3
7.6.4

7.7

CHAPTER

viii

7~20

7-20
7-2S
7-26
7-26
7-26
7-29
7-31
7-31
7-32
7-32
7-34
7-34
7-34
7-3S

CONTENTS (CONT • )

Page

CHAPTER

8.6.2
8.6.3
8.7

Punch Slice Data
place Data on Screen
EXIT

8-9
8-9
8-9

FLOOD CORRECTION

9-1

9.1
9.2
9.3
9.4
9.5
9.5.1
'9.5.2
9.6
9.7
9.7.1
9.7.2
9.7.3
9.7.4

CREATING A FLOOD-CORRECTION MATRIX
FLOOD CORRECTION COMMAND
CONVERTING A FLOOD-STUDY FRAME
ERROR MESSAGES FOR FC COMMAND
FLOOD-CORRECTING COMMANDS
Flood-Correct the Displayed Frame
Flood-Correct a Study
ERROR MESSAGES FOR FCS AND FCD COMMANDS
NOTES ON FLOOD CORRECTION
Oiientation Matching
Correction-Matrix Calculation
Cell Overflow
Statistical Accuracy

9-1
9-2
9-3
9-4
9-5
9-5
9-6
9-7
9-8
9-8
9-8
9-8
9-9

PART 4 GAMMA-II UTILITIES
10

FILE DELETION

10-1

10.1
10.2

FILE DELETION
SQUEEZING A DISK

10-1
10-4

STUDY TRANSFERS

11-1

11.1
11.2
11.2.1
11.2.2
11.3
11.3.1
11.3.2
11.3.3
11.3.4

TRANSFER STUDY COMMAND
MAGNETIC TAPE AS A SOURCE DEVICE
Non-GAMMA-l1 Files on Magnetic Tape
Magnetic Tape as a Destination Device
ERROR PROCESSING
Input Errors
Magnetic Tape Input Errors
Output Errors
Other I/O Errors

11-1
11-5
11-7
11-7
11-8
11-8
11-8
11-8
11-8

LOADING GAMIv1A-11 FOR THE SINGLE AND
BACKGROUND USERS ON AN 11/40

A-I

LOADING GAMMA-II FOR THE
FOREGROUND/BACKGROUND USERS ON AN 11/40

B-1

APPENDIX C

LOADING AN RK06K CARTRIDGE

C-1

APPENDIX D

SUMMARY OF COMMANDS

D-1

CONTROL COMMANDS
DATA ACQUISITION COMMANDS
DATA ANALYSIS COMMANDS

0-1
0-2
0-2

".-.CHAPTER

CHAPTER

APPENDIX A
APPENDIX B

D.1
D.2
D.3

.CONTENTS (CONT.)

Page
APPENDIX E

GAMMA-II COMMANDS IN ALPHABETICAL ORDER

E-l

APPENDIX F

EXITING AND REENTERING GAMMA-II

F-l

APPENDIX G

GLOSSARY

G-l
Index-l

INDEX

FIGURES
FIGURE

3-1
3-2
4-1
4-2
4-3
4-4A
4-4B

4-5
4-6
4-7
4-8
4-9
4-10
4-11
4-12
4-13
4-14
4-15
4-16
4-17
4-18

5-1
5-2
5-3

5-4
5-5
5-6
5-7

5-8
5-9
5-10
5-11
5-12
5-13
5-14
5-15

5;..16

5-17
5-18
5-19
.5-20
5-21
5-22A

Background Command Table
Foreground Command Table
Sys tem Summar y
Study Plan Page 1: Patient Data
Study Plan Page 2: Camera Par'ameters
ZOOM Mode
Normal Mode
Study plan Page 3: Static Collection
Parameters
Static Study Summary:
Parts 1 and 2
Precollection Frame
Study Plan Page 3: Dynamic Collection
Parameters
Dynamic Study Summary: Parts 1 and 2
List Study Collection Parameters
List Study summary: Parts 1 and 2
Flood Collection
Predefined Study Summary: Parts 1 and 2
Predefined Study Index
Predefined Study Index Modification
Predefined Study Index Deletion
Gate-Synchronized Collection Parameters
Gate-Synchronized Study Plan
Index to Patient Studies
Static Patient Study Summary
Dynamic Patient Study Summary
Display Frame
Minified Display
Upper Threshold Display Switch
Lower Thresholding with Enhancement
No-Enhancement Lower Threshold
Upper Threshold and Step Size
No-Enhancement Upper Threshold
Isocount Thresholding
NO-Enhancement Isocount Thresholds
Negative (Completed) Image
Or igina'l Matr ix
Nine-Point Smooth
Lung-Normal Image
Isocontour Map
Isocontour Fill
Isocontour Map and Fill
Normal Liver/Spleen Display
Isometrics Display
Data Rotated 90 Degrees

3-3
3-6
4-2
4-4
4-6
4-10
4-10
4-12
4-14

4-15
4-17
4-19

4-21
4-23
4-25
4-28

4-28
4-30
4-31
4-33
4-35
5-2
5-3
5-3
5-5
5-9

5-21
5-26
5-26
5-27

5-27
5-29
5-29
5-32
5-46
5-46
5-49
5-49
5-49
5-49
5-50

5-50
5-50

CONTENTS (CONT.)

Page
FIGURE

5-228
5-23
5-24A
5-248
5-25A
5-258
5-25C
5-26
5-27
5-28
5-29
6-1
.6-2
6-3
6-4
6-5
6-6'
6-7
6-8
6-9
7-1
7-2
7-3
7-4
7-5
7-6
7-7
7-8
7-9
7-10
7-11
7-12
7-13
7-14
7-15
7-16
7-17
7-18
7-19
7-20
7-21
7-22
7-23
7-24
7-25
8-1
8-2
8-3
8-4
8-5
8-6
8-7
8-8
8-9

Data Rotated 180 Degrees
Minified Isometrics
90 0 Rotation .
180 0 Rotation
Full Size Matrix
TV20
TH-20
Comment Text
List Study summary
List Framing Sequence
A Gated List Mode Framing Sequence
Normal Color Image
Changing a Color Level
Color Table Editor
Interpolated Display
Blow-Up
Dual Display
Minified and Normal Dual Display
Swap
Filling the playback Merge Buffer
Positioning the Crosshairs
Enlarged Area of the Image
Defining Threshold Level
Defining the ROI
The New ROI
Defining an Isocontour
Defining the ROI
The New ROI
The -ROI if the Isocontour Is Not Circled
by the Joystick
Matrix with Cursor
Two ROIs: A and B
Simply Connected ROI
Multiply Connected ROI
ROI with "Loose Ends"
Noncontiguous Irregular Region (Fill Mode)
Boundary Display: Three Regions
Interior Display: Three Regions
ROI Count Rate Curve
Individual Curve Display (PN)
Overlaid Curve Display (PO)
Frame-Linear Curve Display (PNM)
Full Plot
Partial Plot (Window Frames 1-10)
Partial Plot (Window Frames 11-20)
ROI Tabular (Command: PR A)
Preparatory Display: Horizontal Slice
Preparatory Display: Vertical Slice
Horizontal: Three-Row Slice and Curve
Vertical: Three One-Column Slices and Curves
Scale Factor 1: Truncated Curve
Scale Factor .5: Truncation Eliminated
Scale Factor 1: Low-Contour Curve
Scale Factor 2: Contour Enhanced
Tabular Data

5-50
5-52
5-54
5-54
5~56

5-56
5-56
5-58
5-72
5-73
5-79
6-13
6-13
6-13
6-13
6-14
6-14
6-14
6-14
6-28
7-9
7-9
7-13
7-13
7-13
7-14
7-14
7-14
7-14
7-21
7-21
7-21
7-21
7-22
7-22
7-22
7-22
7-23
7-23
7-23
7-23
7-27
7-28
7-30
7-33
8-5
8-5
8-5
8-5
8-6
8-6
8-6
8-6
8-9

CONTENTS ( CONT • )

Page
FIGURE

9-1
9-2

10-1
10-2

11-1
11-2

Flood-Study Matrix
Resulting Flood-Correction Matrix (m=50%)
Patient Study Index for File Deletion
Verification Frame
Patient Index File
Magnetic Tape Study Index

9-2
9-4
10-2
10-3
11-4
11-6

TABLES
TABLE

4-1
4-2
4-3
4-4

4-5
4-6
6-1
9-1

Orientation-Rotation Switch Position
Logic Table
Picker Switch Settings
Ohio-Nuclear Settings
Toshiba Settings
Other Camera Settings
Maximum Frame Rates
Matrix Sizes
Total Number of Counts Table

xii

4-7
4-7
4-8
4-8

4-9
4-20
6-20
9-9

PREFACE

The GAMMA-II system is a computer application system designed for
acquisition and analysis of gamma-camera data. GAMMA-II has been
developed for the nuclear medicine department that examines a large
number of patients.
GAMMA-II does not require you to know any computer language. However,
you must have a working knowledge of nuclear medicine techniques and
terminology and of the gamma camera and its related instruments.
To
learn more about computers in nuclear medicine, and specifically about
GAMMA-II, read the Introduction to GAMMA-II before reading the
GAMMA-II Operator's Guide.
The GAMMA-II Operator's Guide describes the GAMMA-II system, its
operatlon, and use of the foreground/background (F/B) environment.
All GAMMA-II applications are illustrated by examples and photographs.
The GAMMA-II system, running under the RT-II F/B operating system,
permits direct access to patient data files. Thus, those users who
understand computer languages can perform extended analysis on data by
using BASIC/RT-II, FOCAL/RT-II, or FORTRAN/RT-II.
This manual refers you (for
other manuals.

further

information)

the

following

Introduction to GAMMA-II

(AA-5689A-TC)

GAMMA-II system Reference Manual

(AA-2186B-TC)

Introduction to RT-II

(DEC-II-ORITA-A-D)

RT-II System User's Guide

(DEC-II-ORGDA-A-D)

RT-II Advanced Programmer's Guide

(DEC-II-ORADA-A-D)

RT-II system Generation Manual

(DEC-II-ORGMA-B-D)

NCII-A Camera Interface for a GAMMA-II System

(EK-NCIIA-TM-OOI)

NCVII Gamma Camera Interface Technical Manual

(EK-NCVII-TM-OOI)

PDP-II Processor Handbook
PDP-II Peripherals Handbook

xiii

SYMBOL NAMING AND CONVENTIONS
This manual supports the VTOI storage scope as well as the VSVOI color
display.
please note that all references made to the VSVOI color
display also refer to the VTOI storage scope unless otherwise
specified.
Chapter 6 is totally devoted to the commands that you can
perform on only the VSVOI color display.
In the chapters that have colored inserts, references
the inserts are marked "color insert."

figures

The sympol ~ represents pressing the RETURN key on the terminal
keyboard.
The symbol G:) represents pressing the space' bar on the
terminal keyboard.
The change bars in the outside margins indicate technical changes and
additions to the previous edition of the GAMMA-II Operator's Guide.

xiv

PART 1
GAMMA-ll SYSTEM OVERVIEW

-CHAPTER

INTRODUCT·ION

CHAPTER

GAMMA-ll SOFTWARE ENVIRONMENT

CHAPTER

GAMMA-ll STARTING PROCEDURES

CHAPTER 1
INTRODUCTION

A gamma camera records radionuclide distributions in patients.
It
collects
this
information
following
patient
intake
of
a
radiopharmaceutical that localizes in
a
particular
organ
or
pathological lesion.
The GAMMA-II system receives information from
gamma-camera data and returns information about radionuclide tests.
These tests include studies of the distribution of radioactive
~u~ntities in patients. Such studies are divided ~nto dynamic and
static studies.
A static study records one or more images of an organ but does not try
to capture flow or motion. A dynamic study records many images or
frames of the same organ and tries to capture the motion of the
o~gan -- as a movie does.
An example of a dynamic or flow study is the 131-I Hippuran renogram.
Following intravenous injection, the 131-1 Hippuran is extracted from
the blood by the kidneys and excreted to the bladder.
Abnormalities
in kidney function show up as irregularities in the distribution and
rate of movement of the
radiopharmaceutical.
A
gamma-camera
oscilloscope shows this flow distribution of radioactivity within the
kidneys. The GAMMA-II system allows this flow distribution to be
taken from the camera, digitized, and stored within the computer for
analysis.
.
An example of a static study is a liver scan using 99-mTc-Sulfur
colloid.
Following intravenous injection, the liver and spleen take
up the sulfer colloid.
The distribution of
the
radionuclide
throughout the organ may show a malignant or pathological area.
In
this liver study, the static image showing the final distribution of
the radionuclide is more important than the dynamic flow of the
radionuclide to the liver. Separate static images of the liver can be
taken to show the following:
•

Position of the organ

•

Size of the organ

•

Distribution of the radioactivity

•

Pathological lesions

However, these images are not dependent on each other as in a
study.

dynamic

The GAMMA-II system allows you to manipulate the image for better
visualization of such a study. When necessary, you can also extract
study statistics from the raw or modified data.

1-1

INTRODUCTION
1.1

GAMMA-II AND YOU

GAMMA-II is designed to help you, the operator, by:

1.2

•

Providing an easy-to-use system for nuclear medicine

•

Enabling detailed and accurate diagnostic reports

•

Providing a high degree of file protection

•

Providing a system
changing needs

capable

future

expansion

meet

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

The GAMMA-II system is a series of programs that acquires and analyzes
data from a gamma camera. The system also contains utility programs
for file upkeep and system modification.
GAMMA-II runs under the
-~T~ll
FIB operating system, or the RT-ll single-job operating system.
It uses the RT-ll file structure for the patient data files.
The
GAMMA-II FIB system basically consists of two independent components:
•

A foreground program for data acquisition only

•

A series of background progr~ms
analysis, and utility functions

for

data

acquisition,

data

The background program can collect data only if there is no foreground
~rogram
or if you are running a single-job RT-ll system (where there
1S
no foreground job).
Thus, while you collect data in
the
foreground, you can also do one of the following:

1.3

•

Analyze data in the background

•

Run BASIC or FOCAL in the background

•

Run any other RT-ll programs (i.e.,
language, etc.) in the background

FORTRAN,

assembly

HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS

The minimum hardware requirements (excluding the gamma camera and
related equipment) are:
•

PDP-II CPU

•

28K of memory for FIB or 16K for RT-Il single job

•

Hard-copy console terminal (LA36 DECwriter)

•

High-speed video alphanumeric terminal (FIB only)

•

RKIl/RKOS disk controller and two drives, or
RK6ll/RK06 disk controller and drive and an
drive, or magnetic tape drive

•

BM792-YB bootstrap loader

•

KWIl-P real-time clock (for data acquisition)

1-2

additional

its

RK06

INTRODUCTION
•

KWll-L line frequency clock (for RT-ll FIB)

•

VSVOI color display

•

NCllA or NCVll gamma-camera interface

•

ARII AID converter for simultaneous joystick positioning
foreground acquisition, or for gate-synchronized studies

and

NOTE
The GAMMA-II system still supports the
VTOI
storage scope as part of the
minimum hardware requirement only if the
VSVOI
is not part of your system.
Gate-synchronized acquisition, however,
is not supported on the VTOI.

The following hardware is optional:
•

Additional disk drives for data acquisition and data analysis

•

Any mass-storage device that is supported by
TUlO/TMll 9-track magnetic tape)

RT-ll

(e.g.,

For single-user systems only 16K of memory is required.
The video alphan~eric terminal, such as the VT52 or VT05, is used by
the foreground data-acquisition program. The DECwriter keyboard and
VSVOI color display are used by the background.
GAMMA-II does not
normally use the LA36 DECwriter printer.
It directs output to the
DECwriter only when you specifically ask for hardcopy output of
reports, summaries, and so forth.

1.3.1

The Gamma Camera

The gamma camera interfaces with the GAMMA-II system by means of the
gamma-camera
interface (NCllA or NCVll).
The gamma camera is
sensitive to gamma rays and is used to visualize the distribution of
radioactivity within the body of a patient who has been given a dose
of a radiopharmaceutical. The gamma camera's output 1S displayed on
an oscilloscope, which you can photograph also. There are usually two
oscilloscopes:
1.

A storage scope for (variable persistence) monitoring

A refresh scope for photographing

Depending on the organ being studied, you can take a one-time-exposure
photo of the oscilloscope~ or several photos, showing the distribution
of radioactivity at different times. The -photographs can represent
either a static or dynamic study.

1-3

INTRODUCTION
1.4

STUDY TYPES

The GAMMA-II study types are:

• Static
• Dynamic

• List
• Gate-synchronized
• Gated-list
• Flood
• Predefined
These studies are described in the following sections.

1.4~1

Static Study

A static study consists of o~ to ~ight separate frames combined into
one study file.
You can vary the camera and collection parameters
between frames. For example, you can use a multiple-frame static
study to show several different views of a particular organ.

1.4.2

Dynamic Study

A dynamic study consists of a series of frames that GAMMA-II collects
at the rate you specify (comparable to a sequence of motion picture
frames). Data are collected in sequential frames showing the amount
of radioactivity in an organ as a function of time.
A dynamic-study can consist of 1 to 512 frames.
The frame rate (frame~ per second) can change within a single study.
Each change in frame rate constitutes a group. You can specify up to

U grouQP in one dynamic study.

7'·

GAMMA-II can calculate curves showing the rate of radioactivity within
a region of interest.

1.4.3

Flood Study

The flood study is a single-frame static study that checks and
corrects for a nonuniform camera response. In a flood study, you
present the camera with a uniform sheet of a particular radioactive
source.
Variations from uniformity in tne resulting image reflect
irregularities of response in the camera's field. You can then use
the data to create a flood-correction matrix, which in turn is used to
compensate for these irregularities in other studies. No patient data
is required.
Of the collection parameters, you must supply only the
duration of the run (in either elapsed time or in total number of
counts) and the camera orientation with respect to the flood source.

1-4

INTRODUCTION
1.4.4

List Study

A list study contains unstructured data. Rather than storing an image
the way it looks on the camera's oscilloscope, GAMMA-II breaks the
image into a matrix with X and Y coordinates. It stores each pair of
X and Y coordinates in a list, with periodic time-reference marks and
optional gate marks. You instruct GAMMA-II to restructure the raw
data into a static or dynamic study at data-analysis time. GAMMA-II
uses the time marks to determine the frame duration for data
formatting.
The gate marks are also used for data formatting in a
gated-li~t study.

1.4.5

Gate-Synchronized Study

In a gate-synchronized study, GAMMA-II synchronizes the camera data
acquisition to a gate signal (such as an ECG gate). Multiple frames
are stored in core. When the system receives a gate signal, it begins
acquiring data in Frame 1. After a short, preset time, acquisition is
,switched to Frame 2, then Frame 3, and continues until all the frames
'have been filled or until a new gate signal is received, whichever
!comes first.
When another gate signal is received, acquisition
returns to Frame I.' Thus, Frame 1 represents the sum of all the first
time periods during the gate interval.
(Frame 2 represents the sum of
all the second time periods in the gate interval, etc.)

1.4.6

Gated-List Study

A gated-list study gathers data in the same way that a regular list
study does.
However, the timing marks in a gated-list study occur
every 1 millisecond instead of every 10 milliseconds as in a regular
list study. A gated-list study also records the gate marks along with
the, raw data.

1.4.7

Predefined Study

The predefined study is not really a study type, but rather an aid to
acquiring data.
The predefined study allows you to save time in
setting up routines or often-used study plans.
You can define
collection parameters and other common data in advance; you need add
only the specific run-time information when you use the study plan to
acquire data (i.e., patient name, 10, birthdate).
The use of
predefined studies ensures that often-used studies are collected
consistently.
Predefined studies can be used with any study type
except a flood study.

1-5

CHAPTER 2
GAMMA-II SOFTWARE ENVIRONMENT

2.1

INTRODUCTION TO RT-ll

The RT-ll operating system, designed for the PDP-II computer series,
provides
both
single-program
operations
and
a
powerful
foreground/background (F/B) capability. RT-ll also offers a versatile
_keyboard monitor, Which provides complete user control of the system
from the console terminal keyboard. You direct both background and
foreground operations by means of monitor commands.
In addition to the monitor facilities, RT-ll offers a full complement
of system resources that allow you to develop programs using higher
level languages, such as FORTRAN, FOCAL, and BASIC, or assembly
language (MACRO).
The uses of a foreground/background RT-ll system and differences
between this type of system and a single job RT-ll system are outlined
in the following sections.

2.1.1

The Single-User Background System

The single-user background system can only run one job at a time.
Consequently, the single-user system can do only one of the following
at a time:

2.1.2

•

Data acquisition

•

Data analysis

•

Program development

The Foreground/Background System

The foreground/background system greatly increases the efficiency of
processor usage and system resources.
For example, the central
processor of a computer system may spend a large percentage of time
waiting for an external event to occ~r, such as completion of an
input/output (I/O) transfer. Programs that perform large amounts of
I/O cause the computer to become idle for as much as 90 percent or
more of processor intervention time.
In an FIB system the foreground job is given top priority and,
whenever possible, the processor runs the foreground job. However,
when the foreground job reaches a state where no more processing can
be performed, or when an external event takes place, the RT-ll monitor
relinquishes control to a lower priority job -- the background job.
2-1

GAMMA-II SOFTWARE ENVIRONMENT
The background job then runs until the foreground job is once again in
an executable state. At this time, control is again required by the
foreground
program.
The
central processor stops running the
background job and resumes executing the foreground job.
This
fac il i tyr esul ts in greater, processor efficiency.
In GAMMA-II, data acquisition can be done in the foreground while data
analysis or program development is being done in the background.

2.2

GAMMA~ll
!

AND RT-ll

The GAMMA-II programs run under the control of RT-ll FIB or RT-ll
single job.
All GAMMA-II programs run as background programs. The
data-acquisition program runs as either background or foreground. The
system is divided into two independent parts as follows:

The background, which is referred to as BGAMMA

The foreground, which is referred to as FGAMMA

These independent parts are further discussed in
2.2.6.

2.2.1

Sections

2.2.1

and

The Single and Background User

'~he background

programs (BGAMMA) consist of a background driver
program
and the individual data-acquisition, data-analysis, and
utility procedures, such as study deletion, study transfer, and
patient monitor.

2.2.2

Data Analysis (Background Only)

The data-analysis and review programs allow you to view the data of a
patient or flood study and perform analysis of the data. Specifically
you can:
1.

Select a patient study from the patient index

View the administrative data of the selected study

View the frames of the study

Perform image enhancement of the display
•
•
•

Smooth the data (9-point)
Switch from color to black and white
Use isocontours

Call macro commands

Perform frame arithmetic
multiple frames)

Define regular (i.e., rectangular) and irregular regions of
interest and use these regions to calculate and display
dynamic curves

(i.e.,

2-2

add,

subtract,

divide

GAMMA-II SOFTWARE ENVIRONMENT
8.

Save frames or" dynamic curves in a save area that can later
be
referenced
by
the
data-analysis
program
or by
user-supplied BASIC, FORTRAN, FOCAL, or assembly-language
programs

Plot slice profiles

10.

Flood-correct data

11.

Structure list-mode data and, having done so, perform any
the above procedures, 1 through 10

12.

Play back dynamic studies in a movie-like manner·

13.

Automatically load and execute user programs

2.2.3

Study Deletion (Background Only)

~he

study-deletion routine allows you to display and select those
studies that are to be deleted. Specifically, the study-deletion
program can do the following:
1.

Display the study index

Select, by number, the study to be deleted

Delete the study selected

Squeeze the disk

2.2.~

Study Transfer (Background Only)

The study-transfer routine allows you to transfer patient studies
between any mass-storage media (i.e., disks, magtape, DECtape, etc.).

2.2.5

System Summary (Background or Foreground)

The system-summary routine displays the available disk space for
patient data files. The routine allows you to quickly determine the
largest data file you can acquire on a given disk.

2.2.6

Data Acquisition Used as Foreground or Background

The data-acquisition program runs from either the foreground or the
background.
Using the data-acquisition program, you can set up and
acquire the following types of studies:
1.

Single or multiple-frame static studies

Dynamic studies

List studies (gated or ungated)

2-3

GAMMA-II SOFTWARE ENVIRONMENT
4.

In-core gate-syrichronized studies (in background only)

Flood studies

All user interaction with the foreground acquisition program is via
the VT52 or VTOS terminal.
The console terminal and VSVOI color
display are used by the background program.
NOTE
The background data-acquisition
can be used only

2.2.7

program

With the single-user RT-Il monitor

With the FIB RT-ll monitor, if there
is no foreground job running

Patient Monitor (Background Only)

When data is not actually being acquired in the foreground, you can
use the patient-monitoring program in the background to verify that
~he patient positioning is correct.
In the case of gated studies, the
program can determine that the system is receiving a proper gate
signal and can compute the gate interval. No data are stored by the
computer.

2-4

CHAPTER 3
GAMMA-II STARTING PROCEDURES

3.1

LOADING GAMMA-II FOR THE SINGLE-JOB USERS

The operating procedures for loading and starting RT-ll and GAMMA-II
for
the ,PDP-ll/34 are outlined below.
(Loading instructions for a
PDP-ll/40 are given in Appendixes A and B.)
The
disk-loading
instructions given here
(3 through 6) are for RKOS disks only. To
load RK06 disks, see Appendix C.
CAUTION
Whenever changing system disks, you MUST
start the system again.
If you do not
start the system again, disk destruction
results.

Turn the computer console power switch clockwise to the DC/ON
position.

Turn the LINE/OFF/LOCAL switch on the terminal to be used to
LINE.
(Set to REMOTE if an LA30.)
Also press the ON/OFF
switch on the VTOS or VTS2 to ON.

Pull the RKOS disk drive (unit 0) door down and place the
removable disk cartridge in the disk drive with the metal
ring on the bottom of the cartridge facing down.

Close the RKOS disk drive door.

Set the LOAD/RUN switch on the disk drive controller to RUN.

Make sure that ihe disk controller WRITE PROTECT light is
off.
If the light is not -off, press the WRITE PROTECT switch
once. This places the system in the WRITE ENABLE position.

When the disk READY light comes on, press and release
CNTRL button and the HALT button at the same time.

Then press and release the CNTRL batton and the
at the same time.

Four numbers are printed on the terminal, followed by a $
the next line.

10..

For RKOS disks, type DK followed by a carriage return.
RK06 disks, type OM followed by a carriage return.

For

3-1

BOOT

the

button

GAMMA-II. STARTING PROCEDURES
11.

The system responds with the version number
system then types

RT-ll.

The

.SET TTY QUIET
PLEASE ENTER
TODAY'S DATE:
~nd waits for yo~ to enter the current date in the form

dd-mmm-yy
followed by the RETURN key, where dd-mmm-yy is the day~
month, and year to be entered. dd is a decimal number in the
range 1-31; mmm is the first three characters of the name of
the month; and yy is a decimal number in the range 73-99.
Example:
To enter May 25, 1977 as the current
'type:
25-MAY-77

date

for

the

system,

If the date is entered in an incorrect format, the message is
repeated.
12.

The system then responds with the prompt
CURRENT TIME:
and waits· for you to respond in the form
hh:mm:ss
or
hh:mm
or
hh
followed by the RETURN key,
hour, minute, and second.

where

hh:mm:ss

represents

the

The time is in hours, minutes, and seconds past midnight.
Example:
14:48:32

This sets the internal clock to 14 hours, 48 minutes, and
seconds.

13.

The system responds with the background command table on
color display (or VTOI).
(See Section 3.1.1.)

the

14.

The background is now loaded and running.

3.1.1

Loading Commands

Once the GAMMA-II software has been loaded into the system, you have
the option to choose one of the GAMMA-II programs. Figure 3-1 shows a
VSVOI displaying the GAMMA-II programs.

3-2

GAMMA-II STARTING PROCEDURES

Figure 3-1
Background Command Table
Make your selection by entering the two characters representing
funct~on you wish to perform, followed by a carriage return.

3.2

the

LOADING GAMMA-II FOR THE FOREGROUND/BACKGROUND USERS

The operating procedures for loading and starting RT-ll and GAMMA-II
for the PDP-ll/34 are outlined below. The disk-loading procedure
(steps 3 through 6) is for an RKOS disk.
To load RK06 disks, see
Appendix C.
CAUTION
Whenever changing system disks, you MUST
start the system again. If you do not
start the system again, disk destruction
results.

Turn the computer console power switch clockwise to the DC/ON
position.

Turn the LINE/OFF/LOCAL switch on the terminal to LINE.
(Set
to REMOTE if an LA30.) Also, press the ON/OFF switch on the
VTOS or VTS2 to ON.

3-3

GAMMA-II STARTING PROCEDURES
3.

Pull the RK05 disk drive (unit 0) door down and place the
removable disk cartridge in the disk drive with the metal
ring on the, bottom of the cartridge facing down.

Close the RK05 disk drive door.

Set the LOAD/RUN switch on the disk drive controller to RUN.

Make sure that the disk controller WRITE PROTECT light is
off.
If the light is not off, press the WRITE PROTECT switch
once. This places the system in the WRITE ENABLE position.

When the disk READY light comes un, press and release
CNTRL button and the HALT button at the same time.

Then press and release the CNTRL button and the
at the same time.

Four numbers are printed on the terminal, followed by a $.

10.

For RK05 disks, type OK followed by a carriage return.
RK06 disks, type~M followed by a carriage return.

11.

The system responds with the version number of RT-ll
dot on the console terminal. The system then types

BOOT

the

button

For
and

.SET TTY QUIET
PLEASE ENTER
TODAY.'S DATE:
and waits for you to enter the current date in the form
dd-mmm-yy
followed by the RETURN key, where· dd-mmm-yy is the day,
month, and year to be entered. dd is a decimal number in the
range 1-31; mmm is the first three characters of the name of
the month, and yy is a decimal number of the range 73-99.
Example:
If you wish to enter May 25, 1977 as the current date for the
system, type:
25-MAY-77

If the date is entered in an incorrect format J
repeated.
12.

the message is

The system then responds with the prompt
CURRENT TIME:
and waits for you to respond in the form

hh:mm:ss
or
hh:mm
or
hh
followed by the RETURN key,
hour, minute, and second.

3-4

where

hh:mm:ss

represents

the

GAMMA-II STARTING PROCEDURES
The time is in hours, minutes, and seconds past midnight.
Example:
16:48:32

This sets the internal clock to 16 hours, 48 minutes, and
seconds.
13.

There is a slight pause, and the foreground command table is
now present on the VTS2.
(See Section 3.2.1) The following
message is printed on the console:
FGAMMA LOADED AND RUNNING

14.

The system now responds with the background command table
the color display (or VTOl).
(See Section 3.1.1.)

15.

Both the background and foreground GAMMA-II programs are
'loaded and running.

now

3.2.1

Foreground Commands

The foreground commands are identical to those for the background,
except that AD (data analysis and review), CA (continue analysis), DS
(delete patient studies), TS
(transfer studies), and PM (patient
m~nitor) are not used.
With these exceptions, the foreground commands
are displayed on the foreground terminal and are referenced through
the foreground terminal. Figure 3-2 is an example of the foreground
command table.
NOTE
If the VT52 has riot been turned on, push
the ON/OFF switch on the right side of
the terminal forward. When the blinking
cursor appears, press the RETURN key.
If the VT05 has not been turned on, turn
on the power switch. After the terminal
has warmed up, set the LaC/REM switch to
REM and press RETURN. The foreground
commands will then be displayed.

3-5

GAMMA-II STARTING PROCEDURES

Figure 3-2
Foreground Command Table
To select a function, type the two characters
command, followed by a carriage return.

3.3

the

corresponding

KEYBOARD PROCEDURES AND SPECIAL CHARACTERS

Certain keyboard characters have special meaning to the system.
The
RT-ll operating system's keyboard characters may be different from
those of other systems.

3.3.1

RT-ll Operating System Characters

Some of the keyboard characters provide communication with the RT-ll
monitor. These characters are discussed in the following paragraphs.
1.

Pressing the RETURN key indicates that you have completed
typing a line of input and are now telling the computer to
take control.
Pressing RETURN also causes the console
terminal to return to the left margin and space to the next
line. The symbol
~
is used in this manual to indicate
pressing the RETURN key.

Pressing DELETE (RUBOUT) caQses the preceding character
(the
very last one typed in) to be ignored by the computer. When
you type the DELETE key, the system terminal echoes a
backslash (\)
plus the preceding character. The DELETE key
can be used repeatedly to delete an additional character to

3-6

GAMMA-II STARTING PROCEDURES
the left each time it is pressed. An enclosing backslash is
printed when a key other than DELETE is typed.
The DELETE
key has no effect after all characters up to the last RETURN
have been deleted.
For example, the patient name, GANEK, was mistyped as GAKNE.
It can be corrected by typing three DELETEs and then NEK, as
follows:
GAKNE\ENK\NEK
3.

CTRL/C is typed by holding down the CTRL key while typing the
C key.
This echoes as ... c on 'the terminal. If a program is
waiting for terminal input or is using the device handler TT:
for input, a single CTRL/C interrupts execution and returns
control to the monitor command level.
Otherwise, type two
CTRL/Cs in order to interrupt execution. Note that under the
F/B Monitor, the job that is currently receiving input is the
.job that is stopped (determined by whether the last keyboard
command was a CTRL/F or CTRL/B). To ensure that the command
is directed to the proper job, type CTRL/F or CTRL/B first
and then CTRL/C.

CTRL/B (for foreground/background systems only) echoes:
B)

on the LA36 terminal and causes all input to be directed to
the background job and at least one line of output to be
taken from the background job. All typed input is directed
to the background job until control is redirected to the
foreground job (via CTRL/F). CTRL/B has no special meaning
when used under a single-job monitor.

CTRL/F (used for foreground/background systems only) echoes:
F)

on the terminal. It directs all input to the foreground job
and takes all output from the foreground job.
If no
foreground job exists, F? is printed and control is directed
to the background job. Otherwise, control remains with the
foreground job until redirected to the background job (via
CTRL/B) or until the foreground job terminates. CTRL/F has
no special meaning when used under a single-job monitor.
6.

CTRL/O echoes ~O on the terminal and causes suppression of
teleprinter
output
while continuing program execution.
Teleprinter output is re-enabled when one of the following
occurs:
a.

A second CTRL/O is typed.

A return to the monitor is indicated via CTRL/C.

The running program issues a reset CTRL/O directive.
(Some programs will reset CTRL/O if the output is
extremely important.
If you are interested in more
details, see the Introduction to RT-II.)

CTRL/U deletes the current input line and echoes as ~U
followed by a RETURN at the terminal.
(The current line is
defined to be all characters back to, but not including, the
most recent line feed, CTRL/C or CTRL/Z.)

3-7

GAMMA-II STARTING PROCEDURES
8.

CTRL/S does not echo. It temporarily suspends output to the
terminal until a CTRL/Q is typed. This feature allows users
with high-speed terminals to fill the display screen, stop
output wi th CTRL/S, read the screen, a'nd then continue wi th
CTRL/Q.

CTRL/Q does not echo.
It causes the terminal to resume
printing
characters
from the point at which printing
previously stopped (via CTRL/S).
NOTE
If a CTRL/S is inadvertently typed, it
may appear that the system has crashed
or is hung since nothing is echoed on
the terminal.
Type CTRL/Q once more
before rebooting the system to make sure
that a CTRL/S has not been typed.
The next two special characters operate for only those users
who have a GT40 included in their hardware configuration.

10.

CTRL/A is valid when the monitor GT ON command has been typed
and the display is in use. It does not echo on the terminal.
Used after CTRL/S has been typed, CTRL/A permits console
output to resume until the screen is completely filled (all
text previously displayed is eliminated).
CTRL/A has no
special meaning if GT ON is not in effect. For example, if
the screen is filled with patient data, new console output is
di$played, the screen is erased, and the new output is
displayed.

11.

CTRL/E is valid only when the monitor GT ON command has been
typed and the display is in use. CTRL/E does not echo on the
terminal, but causes all I/O to appear simultaneously on both
the display screen and the console terminal. CTRL/E has no
special meaning if GT ON is not in effect.

3.3.2

GAMMA-II Characters

Some GAMMA-II characters have special
These are as follows:
1.

uses

under

data

acquisition.

The ESCAPE (ALTMODE) key edits and verifies pages.
This
editing option is explicitly offered at the completion of
each displayed page of the study plan, but it may be used at
any time.
The screen is erased, and the first question on
that page, with its answer, is displayed. If a satisfactory
answer is accepted, press RETURN;
the next question and
answer appears. To change an answer, type DELETE and proceed
as described above. After the new answer has been typed, all

3-8

GAMMA-ll STARTING PROCEDURES
remaining completed questions and answers, up to the point at
which you typed ESCAPE, are redisplayed. You may then finish
the page, or, if errors remain, type ESCAPE again. For each
use of ESCAPE, only one answer can be corrected.
2.

3.3.3

CTRL/E is used for erasing and editing.
If a number of
corrections have cluttered the display, typing CTRL/E removes
the debris.
The screen is erased, the corrections are
incorporated, and the edited page is redisplayed. If CTRL/E
is typed in the middle of a response, the incomplete entry is
deleted from the edited display; used in this manner, CTRL/E
has the effect of a DELETE.

Exiting from GAMMA-ll to.RT-ll

To exit trom GAMMA-II background or a single-user application to the
RT-II monitor, you must type a CTR~/C on the terminal. This procedure
_. returns control to the RT-ll monitor, which prints a dot (.),
indicating that the system is waiting for an RT-II command.
To exit from GAMMA-II foreground, you must type CTRL/F on the
terminal. RT-II responds with

console

/You must then type two CTRL/Cs on the terminal.
To exit from the
background program and return to th~ RT-II monitor, type another
CTRL(C, which outputs a dot (.). At this point, you must type
UNLOAD FG~
to free the memory space used by the foreground program.
When the system is initially started up, GAMMA-II foreground and
background are automatically invoked. To run just the background, you
should unload the foreground.
(Otherwise the foreground will continue
to take space in memory.) To run RT-II, you must exit from both the
foreground and the background.

3.3.4

Reentering GAMMA-II from RT-ll

After GAMMA-II has been exited, it can be reentered.

3.3.4.1 Reentering a Single Job or a Background Job - To
single-job system, in response to the RT-Il dot type:'

reenter

RBGAMMA G!D
The system responds with the background command
display (or VTOI).

3-9

table

the

color

GAMMA-II STARTING PROCEDURES

3.3.4.2 Reentering a F/B System - To reenter
system, in response to the RT-ll dot type:

GAMMA-II

F/B

FRUN FGAMMA~
There is a slight pause, and the foreground command table is now
present on the foreground terminal. The following message is printed
on the console:
I

FGAMMA LOADED AND RUNNING
I
FGAMMA no longer references the DECwriter.
The system then responds with

B>.
on the DECwriter.

Type

R BGAMMA~
on the terminal to call in the background for GAMMA-II.
The system
responds with the background command table on the color display (or
VTOI).

3.4

CONTROL CHARACTERS WITHIN GAMMA-II

Two control characters aid you in
terminating any procedure in GAMMA-II.

interrupting,
These are:

abortingi

CTRL/Z, which immediately displays either the background or
foreground command table, depending upon the system being
run.

CTRL/X, which immediately returns to the previous command
level.
For example,
if you are displaying regions of
interest and type CTRL/X on the terminal, control returns to
review and analysis (AD).
If another CTRL/X is typed at this
time, the command table is displayed.

If CTRL/Z or CTRL/X is typed while the system is performing a
particular operation, GAMMA-II does not honor it until completion of
the operation.

3-10

PART 2

GAMMA-II DATA ACQUISITION

-CHAPTER 4

GAMMA-II "DATA" ACQUISITION

CHAPTER 4
GAMMA-II DATA ACQUISITION

TO use the GAMMA-II system to acquire data from a gamma camera, you
must perform a series of steps. The three main steps in the data
acquisition process are:
the study plan

prepar~ng

Editing and verifying the study summary

Initiating the collection run

You control the entire procedure from the keyboard in response to
questions, instructions, or choices that appear on the display screen.

4.1

GAMMA-II SYSTEM SUMMARY

Before you begin setting up a study for acquiring data, you may want
to look at a system summary. The system summary indicates the amount
of disk space available for acquiring and storing patient data.
To display a GAMMA-II system summary, type the SS command from the
background or foreground command table. The form of the command is:
SS n~
where n is an optional disk unit number and 0 is the default.
When you type SS,
display.

the

informatidn

4-1

Figure

4-1

appears

the

GAMMA-II DATA ACQUISITION

Figure 4-1
System Summary
The system summary presents several different matrix configurations
for the collection of data. your choice of matrix depends on several
variables, among them the count rate and image resolution, the amount
of available disk storage space, and the kinds of analysis you
perform. Five standard configurations are available, differing in
matrix dimension and in the maximum number of counts per cell, as
shown in the following table:
CONFIGURATION

DIMENSION

MATRIX
TYPE

MAXIMUM
CELL COUNT

1
2
3
4
5

32x32
32x32
64x64
64x64
128x128

Byte
Word
Byte
Word
Byte

255
65535
255
65535
255

In Figure 4-1 the line that reads "LARGEST FREE FILE = xxxx BLOCKS"
informs you of the largest disk file available for data acquisition.
The column "BLOCKS/FRAME" informs you of the number of blocks required
per frame
(image)
for a particular matr...ix size. The column "MAX
FRAMES" establishes how many frames of that matrix size you can
acquire on the available disk space.
For example, the RK05 disk is capable of holding approximately one
million words of patient data.
The system summary describes this
space in terms of frames for
the five standard configurations as
follows (also see Section 4.9):

4-2

GAMMA-II DATA ACQUISITION

1
2
3
4
5

MATRIX
SIZE

MATRIX
TYPE

BLOCKS/FRAME

MAX FRAMES OF DATA

32x32
32x32
64x64
64x64
l28x128

Byte
Word
Byte
Word
Byte

2
4
8
16
32

2000
1000
500
250
125

If you type RETURN in response to the SS reply, the program returns to
the command table.
However,
if you type another unit number, the"
system summary changes in accordance with the avaitable di~k space on
that disk.

4.1.1

Matrix Sizes and Types

The preceding tables show matrix sizes and matrix types.
The size
indicates the number of cells in an image. Each cell represents one
small area of the imag~ and" holds the number of counts received for
that portion of the image.
The type of the matrix establishes the maximum number of counts each
cell can hold. If the type is byte, each cell can hold a maximum of
255 counts.
If the type is word, each cell can hold a maximum of
65,535 counts.

4.1.2

Insufficient Disk Space

If there is not enough disk space for the study that you want to
acquire, you can squeeze the data already on the disk or delete
previous patient studies and then squeeze the disk.
Chapter 10
describes these operations in detail.

4.2

SET-UP AND ACQUIRE PATIENT STUDY

The data acquisition command, AS (acquire study), sets up and acquires
patient studies.
This process, known as a study plan, consists of
three display-pages of data as follows:
1.

Page 1 requests administrative information about a patient.
GAMMA-II uses this information to create the patient study
index entry by which you can later.access the study.

Page 2 requests gamma camera parameters and study-type
specifications.
Camera parameters refer to switch settings
and other operational data about the gamma camera.

Page 3 requests information about collection parameters.
Collection parameters specify the duration of the collection
run and the structure of the data.

4-3

GAMMA-II DATA ACQUISITION
TO prepare a study plan, type the following command,
optional disk unit number.

where

AS n~
The first question of page 1 now appears on the display.

4.2.1

Study Plan Page 1: Patient Data

A complete example of Page I is shown in Figure 4-2.
All answers
except that for NUMBER OF ISOTOPES ~re free-field. A free-field
answer can contain any printing keyboard character or characters, up
to the maximum number indicated by the question. For example, the
study plan question that follows expects a free-field answer of not
more than 21 characters.
PATIENT NAME (21):
If an answer is too long, GAMMA-II automatically deletes it and
displays a number signet)
and a colon (:},and waits for a new
response.
Answers to PATIENT NAME and PATIENT NUMBER are required;
all other
responses are optional. Type RETURN to skip these optional responses.
After you make each entry, you must type a RETURN to proceed to the
next question.

Figure 4-2
Study plan Page 1: Patient Data

4-4

GAMMA-ll DATA ACQUISITION
The following are the page 1 entries:
Comment

Entry
PATIENT NAME (21)
PATIENT NO.
(12)
DATE OF BIRTH (8) .
ORGAN (12)
NUMBER OF ISOTOPES (lOR 2)

ISOTOPE 1 (12)
DOSE 1 (12)
. ISOTOPE 2 (12)
DOSE 2 (12)

is
a
multiple
choice
answer
requiring an entry by typing I, 2,
or RETURN.
If you type in a RETURN,
only one isotope is assumed.
(only if the number of
2)
(only if the number of
2)

isotopes

DOCTOR' (12)
identifies the position
of
the
camera
relative to the body or
organ.
This
answer
is
also
optional.

._VIEW (8)

The last two entries pertain to an automatic analysis of a macro.
first of these entries is:
....

The

AUTO ANALYSIS (Y OR N)
If you type Y, the data acquisition program automatically calls the
data: analysis program after it has acquired all the data. The data
analysis program automatically selects and displays the first frame of
the study that has just been acquired. If you specify an analysis
macro name in the next question, the analysis program automatically
loads and executes this macro. See Sections 5.24 through 5~24.9.
If
you specify auto analysis from FGAMMA (the foreground data acquisition
program), the background program must meet the following conditions:
1.

The GAMMA-II program BGAMMA must be running in the background

The background command table must be displayed on the
at that time

screen

If either of the conditions is not met, auto analysis does not take
place.
If you specify auto analysis from the background data
acquisition program, the background data acquisition program always
calls the data analysis program. The last entry is:
ANALYSIS MACRO (6)
You must specify the data analysis macro file name if you want to use
a macro for auto analysis. A discussion of macros and macro commands
appears in Sections 5.24 through 5.24.14.
The replies to all of these page 1 entries
PATIENT NAME and NUMBER.

are

optional

NOTE
Only PATIENT NAME,
PATIENT
NUMBER,
ORGAN, DATE of acquisition, and type of
STUDY (L,D, or S)
become part of the
study name in the patient index.
4-5

except

for

GAMMA-II DATA ACQUISITION
When the page is complete, the acquisition program prompts you to type
ESCape, fin order to verify and edit all of the answers, or to type
RETURN to go on to the next page.

4.2.2

Study plan Page 2: Camera Parameters

The first question on Page 2 of the study plan automatically appears
on the display when you enter a RETURN as a reply from Page 1. The
first question depends on whether your system has an NCIIA or NCVII
gamma-camera interface.
If your system has an NCVII interface, the
following question appears before the rest of the camera parameters.
CAMERA NO. ( 0 , I ,2 ,3) :
Here you must enter the number of the camera that
the data •.

will

acquiring

If your system has an NCIIA interface, the questions for the camera
are represented in Figure 4~3. These -questions are the
same as for the NCVll, but the NCVll has the additional first question
described previously.

--pa~ameters

Figure 4-3
Study Plan Page 2: Camera parameters

4-6

GAMMA-II DATA ACQUISITION
Notice that the first and second qu~stions asked (repeated below)
related.
ENTER ORIENTATION SWITCH SETTING:

are

1,2,3 OR 4

ENTER ROTATION SWITCH SETTING
1) HORIZONTAL 2) UPRIGHT
;'

In both cases, the answers are required.
The questions refer to
switches on the gamma cameras manufactured by Searle Radiographics,
Inc. I (formerly Nuclear-Chicago),
which
together
control
the
orientation of the camera's viewing axes.
f

On the Searle cameras, the 4-position Orientation switch a"d the
2-position
Rotation
switch
combine to produce eight possible
coordinate relationships according to Table 4-1.
In this table, X and
y represent the camera's field coordinates, and X' and Y' represent
the coordinates of the matrix displayed on the screen.
Tables 4-2
through 4-4 show other camera settings.
Table 4-1
Orientation-Rotation Switch Position Logic Table
ROTATION SWITCH POSITION
ORIENTATION
SWITCH POSITION
1
2

1 (HORIZONTAL)

2 (UPRIGHT)

XI = -Y
Y' = X

XI = X
yl = -Y

= -y
= -X

= Y
= -X

= X
= Y
Xl = -X
Y' = Y

X'
yl

=
=

X'
Y'

= -X
= -Y

Table 4-2
Picker Switch Settings

PICKER
EQUIVALENT

ORIENTATION
SWITCH

ROTATION
SWI'TCH

180

4-7

'270

GAMMA-II DATA ACQUISITION
Table 4-3
Ohio-Nuclear Settings
Y-invert
X-invert
(l=On, O=o'ff)

orientation
Switch

Rotation
Switch

X-y Exchange

Table 4-4
Toshiba Settings
orientation
Switch
I

Rotation
Switch

Toshiba
Equivalent

c)'

,(!)

4-8

GAMMA-I! DATA ACQUISITION
If you have a camera type other than Searle, the corresponding
functions of the other camera types can be matched to the settings of
the two switches used by Searle. For example, given a qamera that can
rotate the image only clockwise (e.g., picker), the corresponding
switch settings would be as follows:
Table 4-5
Other Camera Settings
Searle Switch Settings

Camera X

Lx
.~

Rotation
Switch

Orientation
Switch

UPRIGHT

y
3

HORIZONTAL

UPRIGHT

x~
y

y----1

HORIZONTAL

After you have entered each answer followed by a RETURN, you have the
option to enter the type of collimator used on the gamma camera as
follows:
COLLIMATOR (5)
The answer, which is not required, is free-field. If
for the next question to appear, type only RETURN.
ACQUISITION MODE

1) SPECIAL
2) NORMAL (DEFAULT)

4-9

you

are

ready

GAMMA-II DATA ACQUISITION
The acquisition mode refers to the two program-selectable modes of the
GAMMA-II AID converters. These two modes of the AID converters give
you a choice of two different image sizes.
Acquisition mode I and
acquisition mode 2 are described, in the following:
Acquisition mode 1 provides a clo~e-up image
that is,
gives an enlarged view of a portion of the camera field.
~hisenlarged view is called ZOOM mode (see Figure 4-4A).

2. / Acquisition mode 2 provides a normal image
that
! covers the entire field of view (see Figure4-4B).

If you skip the question by typing only RETURN,
default (normal image size).

GAMMA~ll

is,

assumes

the

(Actually, you may set the acquisition modes to whatever you want by
adjusting the GAIN 1 ~nd GAIN 2 controls on the AID converters. Refer
to the NCll-A Camera Interface for a GAMMA-II System or the NeVIl
Gamma Camera Interface Technical Manual.)

......_ _ matrix

_--+-+_ matrix

_----I--camera
field
of view

camera
field
of view

Figure 4-4A
ZOOM Mode

Figure 4-4B
Normal Mode

The next question the program asks is:

TYPE OF COLLECTION:
1) STATIC
2) DYNAMIC
3) LIST
4) GATE SYNCH.
This answer is required, because it determines
asked on the third page of the study plan.

4-10

the

questions

GAMMA-II DATA ACQUISITION
When you enter the camera parameters and study type, edit them
necessary, and verify them. The program then asks for comments.

This is the first of three opportunities during an acquisition run to
enter into the file any commentary about the study. Comments might
include notes on patient history or conditions that might affect the
interpretation of the data.
If you answer Y (for YES) to the
question, the program erases the screen and prepares for the text to
be entered.
You can type up to ten lines, each 49 characters. Use
any printing character. Correct errors by using the methods described
in Section 3.3.2.
Terminate the text by typing a "null" line, that
is, two RETURNs in a row.
NOTE
If you answer NO to the request for
comments at this time, you can add
comments during the review phase, but
not immediately following collection.

4.2.3

Study Plan Page 3: Collection Parameters

The study plan on page 3 displays different formats for collection
parameters, depending on the answer to the page 2 question TYPE OF
~COLLECTION.
These formats are described in Sections 4.2.4 and 4.2.5.

4.2.4

Static Collection Parameters

A complete example of the static collection
Figure 4-5.

4-11

parameters

shown

GAMMA-II DATA ACQUISITION
~

Study plan Page 3:
The

fi~st

Figure 4-5
Static Collection Parameters

question the program asks is:

THE TOTAL NUMBER OF FRAMES IS
A maximum of eight frames is allowed in one study.
If you enter a 1,
the static study becomes a single frame study.
If you enter a number
in the range 2 to a, the static study becomes a multiple frame study
(i.e., more than one View is acquired). If you just press RETURN, the
default is 1 (single static study).
In some cases, there may not be enough space on the disk for the
number of frames you choose. If not, after you have entered all the
collection parameters, the pr~gram alerts you to proceed or to edit
the page and enter a new number. If you proceed, the program collects
only as many frames as the disk can hold.
The next question asked is:
END FRAME BY PRESET:
1) TIME
2) COUNT
This question establishes the period of time or the number of counts
for collection. If you choose "TIME," the following question appears:
FRAME TIME IS TO BE X MIN.

AND Y SEC.

X=
y=

4-12

"GAMMA-II DATA ACQUISITION
you must enter a value for X and Y, each followed by a RETURN.
The
maximum for X and Y is 999. If you choose option 2, "COUNT", the
following question appears:
PRESET COUNT IS
You can establish a preset count value to stop data collection.
The
maximum preset count that you can enter in the system is 999,999,999.
(Note: do not enter the commas in response to this question~
their
presence here is for clarity.)
After you have entered a RETURN, the program displays a table of
possible mdtrix configurations.
Parameter or space limitations may
restrict the number of choices.
For example, matrix
(5)
is not
available for dual-isotope studies (see Section 4.1).
The final,question asked on page 3 is:
CLOSE FRAME ON OVERFLOW?
REPLY (Y OR N) :
If you reply with a YES, the program stops collection of data as soon
as any cell attempts to exceed its count capacity. Close on overflow
occurs only if overflow occurs 'before the preset time or count limit
is reached.
For example, if you enter an X value of 5 and a Y value
of 0 and choose matrix 5 as the size, the maximum cell count of 255
might be reached before five minutes of collection pass. In this
'~ase, the system stops collecting data.
However, if you reply with a NO, the program allows cell overflow to
occur during the run.
When the count capacity for an element is
exceeded, the element remains at maximum count and
collection
continues.
This ~uestion does not need a reply.
automatically defaults to NO.

If you enter RETURN, the

system

The usefulness of closing a frame on overflow is shown in a_ liver
study, where the actual concentration and distribution of isotopes
over the single frame are of interest. Closing the frame when a cell
overflows
preserves
the
relative
count
concentration.
The
cell-overflow limit would not be used, on the other hand, in a brain
study, where the isotope concentrates most in areas that are not
significant, such as the temporal muscles and salivary glands.
Saturation in these areas can be ignored.

4.2.5

Static Study Summary

After you enter all of the collection parameters, the system displays
a summary of the entire static study plan (except for comments), as
illustrated in Figure 4-6. You can make changes to any of the entries
by typing the appropriate reply from the~ist of choices offered at
the bottom of the display. A reply of 2, 3, 4, or 5 is equivalent to
typing an ESCape for the page indicated. Entries for the page appear
one by one for examination. After you edit the summary, the system
displays it once again for verification. To obtain a print-out of the
summary, type 1. Printout is possible only in the background version.

4-13

GAMMA-II DATA ACQUISITION

Figure 4-6
Static Study Summary: Parts I and 2
The example in Figure 4-6 shows a multiple-frame study. The message,
FRAME 1 OF 4, establishes that this summary applies to the first frame
of the study. This program conducts data collection as a separate run
for each frame. You can change the static study plan between frames
(see Section 4.2.7).
NOTE
When performing a multiple-frame static
study, GAMMA-II assumes that succeeding
frames are the same matrix size as frame
1. If you increase the matrix size of a
frame after collecting frame 1, a DISK
FULL message may appear on the terminal.
The message does not indicate that the
disk is actually full, but that GAMMA-II
has not allocated enough disk space for
the increased matrix size.

4-14

GAMMA-II DATA ACQUISITION
4.2.6

PrecoIIection Frame

When you verify the static study summary and type a RETURN, . the
precollection frame appears on the screen (Figure 4-7). This is a
programmed pause to allow final adjustments, wait for the patient, or
reconsider the entire procedure.
If for any reason you do not proceed
with the collection, you must type CTRL/X or CTRL/Z, and the program
deletes the entire study file.
Otherwise, you should proceed as
directed.

Figure 4-7
Precollection Frame

4.2.7

Data Collection

Once the collection of data has begun, a moving dot repeatedly draws a
line at the bottom of the screen to indicate the passage of time. At
the end of the run, GAMMA-II closes the frame,
transfers it to the
disk, and sounds a beep or bell. Subsequent events depend on the
specifications of the study plan as follows:

If the study is a single frame static study with no comments,
the study file closes and control returns to the command
table (background or foreground).

If you have included comments, GAMMA-II gives you
an
opportunity to edit or add to the text. Next, the file
closes and control returns to the command table.
The only
exception to this procedure occurs during auto analysis. The
program displays the first image acquired instead of the
command table.

4-15

GAMMA-II DATA ACQUISITION
3.

If the study is a multiple-frame static study, the
r~quest appears on the screen:

following

VIEW (8)
VIEW is the study plan entry that is most likely to require
change between frames~
Skipping the answer with a RETURN
leaves a blank entry. If the VIEW is unchanged, you must
re-enter it. When you type the answer, the program displays
the entire study summary, with the new VIEW and the list of
editing options. Thus, any or all of the study plan entries
can be changed between frames. Note, however, that even if
you change any of the items used in the index entry (patient
name, patient number, organ), the original index entry name
remains in effect.
For each frame, you have the option of repeating the procedures in
Sections 4.2.5 through 4.2.7. After the last frame, GAMMA-II closes
the entire file and returns control to the command table.

4.2.7.1 Special Comments on Dual-Isotope Studies If the study
scans two isotopes, each collection run consists of two frames, one
for each isotope. Once again, the largest matrix you can use for
static dual-isotope studies is 64 x 64 x word. The dual-isotope study
may be useful for collection of gated studies.

4.2.7.2! Restarting a Static Frame on Acquisition Occasionally
dur ing . a static study, the patient may move, or the image may be
degraded for some other reason. You can restart a static frame by
typing CTRL/R.
When you type CTRL/R, the program stops acquisition;
clears the data in core~
and resets the time; the· counts, and the
precollection information.
If you restart a static frame, the
following message appears on the display.
RESTART
The restart option is available for
acquisition.

both

foreground

and. background

The restart option works only while the program is actually acqulrlng
data. If the frame has already ended, it cannot be restarted.

4.2.8

Dynamic Collection Parameters

In a dynamic study, each group of frames requires a separate page of
collection parameters. You must specify all groups before collection
begins. Each group of frames can have different frame rates, numbers
of frames, and matrix configurations.
A complete example of the
dynamic collection parameters is shown in Figure 4-8.
For example,
you might change the frame rate in a renal flow study. A frame rate
of one frame per second for 60 seconds is appropriate for the uptake
and one frame per 30 seconds for 10 minutes for the washout.

4-16

GAMMA-ll DATA ACQUISITION

Study plan Page 3:

Figure 4-8
Dynamic Collection Parameters

Page 3 for dynamic collection parameters appears
DYNAMIC under TYPE OF COLLECTION on page 2.

you

requested

The first question the program asks is:
THE FRAME RATE IS X FRAMES PER Y SECONDS
X=
Y=
GAMMA-II holds each frame open for Y/X seconds
(frame
maximum frame rate depends on the matrix configuration.

rate).

The

The next question the program asks is:
THE TOTAL NUMBER OF FRAMES IS
The number of frames in a group also depends on the
matrix
configuration.
The following question lists the configurations
identified by the number in the study summary.
MATRIX SIZE and CELL COUNT

4-17

GAMMA-II DATA ACQUISITION
The collection parameters for a
following limitations:

dynamic

gr~ups

study

are

subject

the

Use no more than 13

Use no more than 512 frames in the.entire study.

Do not use the 128 x 128 matrix.

The number of frames per group and the maximum frame rate
depend on the matrix configuration, as shown in the following
table. For every group of a study except the last, the
number of frames must be a multiple of the frame multiplier
for that matrix. The last group is not subject to chis
restriction.

MATRIX

SIZE

MAXIMUM
CELL COUNT

1
2
3
4

32x32
32x32
64x64
64x64

255
65535
255
65535

in one study.

MAXIMUM
FRAME RATE
(frames/sec)
RK06
RK05
50
25
12
6

After you have verified the collection
appears on the display.

MULTIPLIER

8
4
2
1

80
40
20
10
parameters,

another

question

MORE FRAME GROUPS?
If you reply with a Y, the program requests a new set 6f collection
parameters.
If you respond with an N or RETURN, the program displays
the study summary (see next section).

4.2.9

Dynamic Study Summary

After you enter all of the collection parameters, GAMMA-II displays a
summary of the entire dynamic study plan (except for comments), as
shown in Figure 4-9. Note that each group of the dynamic study has
the collection parameters listed in the summary. You can make changes
.to any of the entries by typing the appropriate reply from the list of
choices offered at the bottom of the display_ A reply of 2, 3, 4, or
5 is equivalent to typing an ESCape for the page indicated. After you
edit it, the entire summary is displayed once again for verification.
To obtain a pr intout of the summary,. type 1 (background only) •

4-18

GAMMA-II DATA ACQUISITION

Figure 4-9
Dynamic Study Summary: Parts 1 and 2

4.2.10

Precollection Frame

When you verify the dynamic study summary, type a RETURN to bring the
. p~ecollection frame to the screen (see Figure 4-7).
This is a
~programmed pause to allow final adjustments, to wait for the
patient,
or to reconsider the entire procedure. If for any reason you do not
proceed with the collection, you must type CTRL/X or CTRL/Z.
The
progr~m
deletes the entire study file.
Otherwise, proceed as
directed.

4.2.11

Data Collection

Once data collection begins, the collection proceeds through every
group of the study.
As the program starts each group, it sounds a
beep and displays GROUP n (where n is the group number). When all of
the groups finish,
the program closes the file.
Comments,
if
included, can be edited at this time. Control returns to the command
table (except during auto analysis, when the program displays the
first image acquired).

Special Comments on Dual-Isotope Studies In a dual-isotope study,
the collection parameter specifying the number of frames per group
actually represents twice that number. Each frame is really two, one
for each isotope.
GAMMA-II collects the frames simultaneously and
stores them alternately in the study file.
That is, the program

4-19

GAMMA-II DATA ACQUISITION
stores frame 1 of isotope 1, frame 1 of isotope 2, frame 2 of isotope
1, etc.
in that order. The use of dual isotopes changes some of the
limitations on the collection parameters as follows:
1.

Use no more than 256 frames per isotope in the study.

The maximum frame rates and the frame multipliers
ithose given in the table in Section 4.2.8.

3'.

Do not use the 64 x 64 word-matrix (type 4) for
dynamic studies.

4.2.12

are

half

dual-isotope

Dynamic Collection Rates

Table 4-6· shows
the
frame
rates
of
data
collection
for
foreground/background (column 2) and single job (column 3) systems.
Table 4-6
Maximum Frame Rates

Data Acquisition
Without suspending
Background (frames/sec)
RKOS
RK06

. "Matrix Size

32
32
64
64

x
x
x
x

32
32
64
64

x byte
x word
x byte
x word

12
6
3
1.5

Data Acquisition
In Foreground Only
(or Single Job)
(frames/sec)
RK06
RK05

24
12
6
3

If you use the foreground to collect data at a rate

50
25
12
6

80
40
20
10

faster

than

the

rates indicated in the ~econd column of Table 4-6, the system suspends

the background.
The system establishes the speed of the dynamic study through the
questions you answer on page 3 of the study plan. If the system
calculates those answers as a fast dynamic study (faster than the
rates in Table 4-6 for data acquisition in foreground), it suspends
the background when the precollection frame appears on the display.
The system does not warn the background job, but it does warn the
foreground job at study summary time;
NOTE
If a background .program appears to halt,
make sure that the foregroQnd is not
running before rebooting the system.
When data collection completes or when the frame rate drops below the
rates listed in Table 4-6, the background resumes operation where it
was suspended.
If the system establishes that the speed of the dynamic study is
slower than the values in Table 4-6, background execution proceeds
normally.
4-20

GAMMA-II DATA ACQUISITION
4.3

LIST STUDY

In the list study collection mode, GAMMA-II does not structure the
data
in
matrices.
Instead,
it stores each pair of x- and
y-coordinates as an item of raw dita, with a timing mark every 10
milliseconds.
Consequently, the only limit on collection is the
amount of disk storage space available.
In a gated list study, the program inserts the time marks every
millisecond instead of every ten milliseco~ds. The gate signal is
inserted as a gate-mark bit.
(See Section 5.27 for more detail.)

4.3.1

List Collection Parameters

The page of list mode collection paramete~s appears only if you
request LIST under TYPE OF COLLECTION on page 2. A complete page of
collectio~ parameters for a list study is illustrated in Figure 4-10.

Figure 4-10
List Study Collection Parameters
The first line of the list study collection parameters is:
AVAILABLE DISK SPACE
This line represents the total number of counts and the number of disk
blocks available to store these counts.
You can choose the most
suitable terminating limit. Each disk block has a capacity of 256
counts.

4-21

GAMMA-ll DATA ACQUISITION
The following line allows you to choose the collection parameter
terminates collection.

that

END STUDY BY PRESET:
1) TIME
2)
COUNT OR DISK BLOCKS
3)
EITHER OF THE ABOVE
If you choose option 3, you must specify both time and counts or disk
blocks. The collection stops at whichever limit it reaches first.
If you choose TIME, the system displays the following question:
STUDY TIME IS TO BE X MIN.

AND Y SEC.

X=
Y=
Collection stops after the specified time has elapsed.
If you choose COUNT OR DISK BLOCKS, the system-di-sp1ays:
DO YOU WISH TO SPECIFY
1)
COUNTS
2)
DISK BLOCKS
You must choose one or the other. Also, the total number
(counts or
blocks)
cannot exceed the limits at the top of the displayed page
(Figure 4-10).
The next line requires a YES or NO answer.
IS THIS A GATED STUDY? (Y ORN)
If you respond YES, the program looks for a gate input from the
(See Section 5.27 for reframing.)
The default answer is NO.

ARll.

The next line also requires a YES or NO answer.
DELAY START OF DATA ACQUISITION?
If you choose YES, the program delays the start of the collection run
until it· reaches a count rate you specify. The program measures the
time and/or count limit parameters from the delayed starting point.
The delay option is another aid in conserving storage space. You can
wait-until the count rate rises to a meaningful level above the
background before storing the data. On the other hand, if you respond
NO, no delay takes place.

The following line appears only if a delayed start has been specified.
ENTER STARTING COUNT RATE AS X COUNTS/SEC
Collection begins as soon as the count rate reaches the given number
of counts per second. After you enter a carriage return to proceed,
the program displays the list study summary on the screen (Figure
4-11) •

4-22

GAMMA-II DATA ACQUISITION

Li~t·study

4.3.2

Figure 4-11
Summary: Parts 1 and 2

Data Collection

TO begin list data collection, you should follow the precollection
"procedure described in Section 4.2.6. At the end of the collection
run, the program displays one of the following termination messages,
indicating how the run was ended.
STUDY TERMINATED

BY PRESET TIME
BY OPERATOR (CTRL/X)
BY PRESET COUNT OR BLOCKS
"
:DISK ERROR
"
:DISK FULL
"
TYPE RETURN TO RETURN TO COMMAND TABLE

"
"
I "
"

The maximum collectable data count rate is about 30,000 counts per
second for
the RKOS disk and 70,000 counts per second for the RK06
disk.
If the rate exceeds this limit, collection continues, but data
are lost.
If you specify a delayed start, GAMMA-II draws a line
across the bottom of the screen until the actual collection begins.
When actual collection begins, the line jumps up half an inch.
NOTE
You cannot use dual isotopes in
study.

4-23

list

GAMMA-II DATA ACQUISITION
4.3.3

List Mode Collection Using FIB

When you use foreground programs to collect list data, GAMMA-II always
suspends background program execution.
You can perform gated-list-mode studies in eith~r the foreground or
the background.
If you do them in the background, GAMMA-II invokes
the patient monitor program (see Sections 4.8.3 and 4.9) before
acquisition begins.
If you perform the atudy in the foreground,
GAMMA-II does not invoke the patient monitor program:
you must run
the patient monitor program (PM) in the background before acquiring
the data in the foreground.

4:4

FLOOD STUDY ACQUISITION

A ,flood study is a single-frame static study:
GAMMA-II predefines
almost the entire study plan for a flood study. The only collection
parameter information that is not predefined is the time and number of
counts. The flood study command (AF) invokes flood study acquisition.

In ~ flood study, you must present the camera with a uniform radiation
source.
variations from uniformity in the resulting matrix reflect
irregularities in the camera's response.
The study plan of a flood study is shorter than previously described
study plans. You need no patient data because GAMMA-II automatically
defines most of the collection parameters.
To prepare a flood study, type the following"
disk unit number.

where n is

AF nG!D
The information in Figure 4-12 then appears on the display.

4-24

optional

GAMMA-II DATA ACQUISITION

Figure 4-12
Flood Collection
The s~stem asks you for only one item of administrative data,
of th~ usual patient data.

instead

CAMERA IDENTIFIER (6)
Your response is a free-field answer that corresponds to
name.

the

patient

NOTE
The flood study incorporates all three
pages of the study plan described under
the static study into one page.
The next sequence of questions GAMMA-II asks for a flood study are:
ENTER ORIENTATION SWITCH SETTING 1, 2, 3, OR 4
ENTER ROTATION SWITCH SETTING
COLLIMATOR
ACQUISITION MODE
END FRAME BY PRESET (time or counts)

4-25

GAMMA-II DATA ACQUISITION
Of the collection parameters, you must supply only the duration of the
run,
either
in
elapsed
time or in total counts.
GAMMA-II
~utomatically defines all other collection parameters as follows:
Number of frames: 1
Matrix size: 64 x 64
Matrix type: word
Close frame on overflow? Yes
I

At this/time, you can verify these parameters or
RETURN) .: and add comments.

proceed

(by

typing

Precollection and collection procedures are described in Sections
4.2.6 and 4.2.7.
At the conclusion of the run, the system tags the
study internally to identify it as a flood study for review and
analysis.
The file is closed, and control returns to the command
table.

·4.5

PREDEFINED STUDY ACQUISITION

The predefined
functions:

study

acquisition

Set up a predefined study

Acquire a patient study

Modify a predefined study

Delete a predefined study

commands

perform

the

following

You can save much time in setting up routine or often-used study plans
by creating a predefined study plan. Define collection parameters and
other common data in advance, and you need add only the specific
run-time information when you use the study plan to acquire data.
For example, in a routine renal-flow study, the organ (kidney),
nuclide (Tc99m), dose
(IOMeI), view and camera parameters, and
collection parameters, can all be defined in advance.
At collection
time, you need add only the patient (and doctor, if necessary)
identification and comments.

Set up a Predefined Study

4.5.1

The procedure for setting up a predefined st~dy is similar to that for
setting up a general study plan. The question and answer format and
error-correcting procedures are also the same. There are only a few
differences, as follows:
1.

Instead of the patient name, birthdate, and patient number,
GAMMA-II asks for a STUDY NAME. This name identifies the
entry i~ the predefined study index. The maximum number of
characters allowed in the study name is 30.

You cannot enter comments.
4-26

GAMMA-II DATA ACQUISITION
3.

you must define'the following items in the skeleton:
Number'of Isotopes
Type of study
All Collection Parameters

orientation switches and rotation switches are optional.
TO set up a predefined study, type:
SP~

A complete predefined study summary is shown in Figure 4-13. When you
have edited and verified the study, the system stores it in the
predefined study file on the disk. GAMMA-II creates an entry in the
predefined study index which you can then display (see Figure 4-14).
NOTE
To make GAMMA-II ask a question during
acquisition,
type
RETURN
at
that
question when predefining the study.
For example, by typing RETURN for the
doctor's name during the
predefined
study, you cause the DOCTOR question to
appear at acquisition.
To bypass a
question
during acquisition, type a
space
followed
by
RETURN
when
predefining the study.
static, dynamic, or list studies can be predefined. A flood study is
itself a sort of predefined study that cannot be set up in the manner
described here.

4.5.2

Acquiring Data with a Predefined Study

TO acquire data with a predefined study, you must first select the
correct predefined study. All of the predefined studies are listed in
an index. To display the index of predefined studies, type:
AP n~
where n is an optional disk unit number. GAMMA-II then
current index of predefined studies (see Figure 4-14).

displays

You can have a maximum of twenty predefined studies in the index.
TO print the index on the terminal, type:
pG!)

If you type only a RETURN, the system returns to the command table.

4-27

the

GAMMA-II DATA ACQUISITION

Figure 4-13
Predefined Study Summary: Parts 1 and 2

Figure 4-14
Predefined Study Index

4-28

GAMMA-ll DATA ACQUISITION
To initiate one of the predefined studies, type the inde~ entry number
for that study followed by a RETURN. The system then asks you for the
PATIENT NAME, DATE OF BIRTH, and PATIENT NUMBER.
(Performing this
function is like setting up pages 1, 2, and 3 of the previous
studies.)
The system then displays the rest of the patient data and
camera parameters, stopping at each entry that is blank in the
predefined study. At this point you can eriter the information needed,
or you. can enter a RETURN to continue, leaving the question blank.
You can· add comments at this time. As soon as yo~ finish entering
comments or type a RETURN, the system displays the predefined study
summari (Figure 4-l3). The collection run proceeds as a normal study
(see Section 4.2.7).
At the end of the run, GAMMA~ll stores the
completed study in the patient study file and updates the patient
study index.
NOTE
When you are setting up the predefined
study,
if you want to leave a field
blank and do not want the program to
stop to wait for user input, you should
enter a space and a RETURN.
The predefined study is an invaluable tool when you can use it because
it minimizes the chance of error, standardizes collection procedures,
and ensures fast set-up time.
NOTE
When performing a predefined study, you
should not edit collection parameters to
increase the number of frames or matrix
size. The system allocates space on the
disk
only
for
initial
collection
parameters.
If you increase the number
or size, a DISK FULL message appears on
the terminal.

p
4.5.3

Modify a Predefined Study

GAMMA-II permits you to modify a
study index.

selected
To modify the study, type:

study

the

predefined

MP~

Figure 4-15 illustrates the information that appears on the display.

4-29

G~MMA-ll

DATA ACQUISITION

Figure 4-15
Predefined Study Index Modification
To print the predefined study index on the terminal, when the index is
displayed, type P followed by a RETURN.
If you enter the index
number, the system displays the predefined study summary giving you
the usual editing options. When complete, the edited study replaces
the original one in the file.

4.5.4

Delete a Predefined Study

To delete a study in the patient study index, type:

DPG§)
Figure 4-16 represents the display after you ~ype this command.

4-30

GAMMA-Il DATA ACQUISITION

Figure 4-16
Predefined Study Index Deletion
The predefined study index is displayed. At this point you can type
either the number of the study to be deleted followed by a RETURN or P
followed by a RETURN to print the index on the terminal.
After you
enter the appropriate index number, the system removes the study from
the file and displays the updated index.
You can delete only one
index study at a time from the predefined study file.

4.6

COMMENTS ABOUT ABORTING DATA ACQUISITION

At any time during the preparation of a study plan, up to
including the precollection frame display, you can terminate
entire operation by typing CTRL/X or CTRL/Z.
The system does
enter the study plan in the patient file, and control returns to
command table.

4.7

and
thenot
the

COMMENTS ABOUT MATRICES

GAMMA-II's choice of five different types of matrices gives you the
flexibility to make efficient use of storage space. Careful selection
of matrix size ensures that more patient data can be stored on the
disk.
The smaller the matrix you use, the more frames the system can
hold (see Section 4.1) •
A second benefit results from the use of smaller matrices
the
maximum frame rate increases.
The maximum background-acquisition
frame rate for each type of matrix is listed in the following table.
4-31

GAMMA-ll DATA ACQUISITION
MATRIX SIZE

32 x 32
32 x 32
64 x 64
64 x 64
I

x byte
x word
x byte
x word

MAX CELL COUNT

255
65535
255
65535

FRAME RATE
(frames/sec)
RK05
RK06
50
25
12
6

80
40
20
10

Dynamic collection does not limit you to a single matrix
fast studies a smaller matrix allows a faster frame rate.

size.

For

For example, a renal study begins with a rapid frame rate and ends
with a slow frame rate so that you can observe washout without wasting
disk space. The collection parameters might be as follows:

4.8

Collect 60 frames of data in a 64 x 64 x
frame per second.

byte

matrix

'2;

Crillect 10 frames of data in a 64 x 64 x
. frame per minute.

word

matrix

IN-CORE GATE-SYNCHRONIZED STUDY

In a gate-synchronized study, GAMMA-II monitors signals from an
external gating device, such as an ECG gate, while acquiring the gamma
camera data. The program synchronizes the camera data acquisition to
the gate signal. Core-resident buffers store multiple frames. When
the program receives a gate signal, it begins to store the acquired
data into data buffer 1.
After a short, preset time, the program
stores the data in data buffer 2. Then after the same amount of time,
acquisition is switched to buffer 3, and so forth. Thus, the program
acquires data in each of the buffers for a short time until either it
reaches the last buffer or it detects another gate signal.
Data acquisition stopp temporarily if the program reaches the end of
the buffers. When it detects another gate signal, acquisition begins
again in image buffer 1. If the program detects a gate signal before
reaching the end of the buffers, it switches acquisition to buffer 1.
This program adds the data for each gate cycle
collected data.
The in-core buffers contain
composite cycle of the acquisition run.

to the previously
data representing a

The gate-synchron~zed study program
is
designed
for
cardiac
acquisition but 1S not limited to it. For cardiac acquisition, the
gate signal comes from an ECG gating. device and represents the R wave.
You can acquire data in either 32 x 32 or 64 x 64 format. The in-core
buffers are always byte mode while the disk-resident data is word
mode. If cell-count overflow occurs, data acquisition stops, the
program adds the in-core buffers (byte)
to the disk data (word),
zeroes core, and resumes data acquisition • • The maximum number of
frames that can be acquired depends on the matrix size, computer
memory size, and disk type.
You should use the single-job RT-ll
monitor for a gate-synchronized study. The following table listit~e
maximum number of frames that can be in core during gate-synchronized
acquisition.

4-32

GAMMA-II DATA ACQUISITION

RK05 disk

RK06 disk

Memory size
32x32 matrix
64x64 matrix

28K
48
12

48K
80
20

16K
24
6

Maximum Number of Frames in Core
If your system has additional memory
GAMMA-II can hold more frames in core.

(than

listed

the

table),

During data acquisition, the program supplies a live display of the
data in a movie-like fashion. Thus, you can see the representative
cycle while it is being acquired.

4.8.1

Gate-Synchronized Collection Parameters

When you do a gate-synchronized collection, you must set the speci~ic
gate-synchronized collection parameters at page 3 of the study plan.
A complete example of the gate-synchronized collection parameters is
shown in Figure 4-17.
Page 3 for gate-synchronized collection
parameters appears if you request choice 3, GATE SYNCH.
under TYPE OF
COLLECTION on page 2.
Jhe program asks:
MATRIX TYPE 1) 32x32
2) 64x64

nnn FRAMES
nnn FRAMES

Again, the matrix type is byte in core, but it is word on the disk.

Figure 4-17
Gate-Synchronized Collection Parameters

4-33

•

GAMMA-II DATA ACQUISITION

The next question asked is:
NUMBER OF FRAMES IS
You can specify the exact number of frames in the gated study by
typing in the number. The maximum allowed is displayed with the first
question. You can also default to the maximum by typing a RETURN.
The next question is:
FRAME DURATION IS
Specify the duration of a single frame in milliseconds, or default
this answer by typing a RETURN. If defaulted, the program calculates
the duration from the average gate duration for the last 30 seconds
prior to acquisition. If you do not default this answer, you can run
the patient monitor program prior to acquisition to establish the R-R
interval.
In the next
milliseconds.

question,

you

can

specify

the

gate

tolerance

GATE TOLERANCE IS
Gate tolerance establishes a window of acceptable heartbeats around
the average heartbeat. For example, if the average heartbeat is 700
ms and the gate tolerance is 50 ms, the program accepts any heartbeat
of duration 650 ms to 750 ms. Any heartbeat outside of this range is
cprisidered arrhythmic by the system. If you type a RETURN, the system
performs no tolerance checking.
Next, the program asks:
TERMINATE STUDY BY 1) PRESET TIME
2) PRESET COUNTS
3) PRESET CYCLES
You must decide how to terminate the study.
response, the following question appears:
FRAME TIME IS TO BE X MIN.
X=

If you choose

the

RETURN.

The

AND Y SEC.

You must enter values for X and Y, each followed
maximum value for X and Y is 999.

If you choose 2 as the response, the following question appears:
PRESET COUNT IS
Enter a count value at which data collection stops.
The maximum
preset count value is 999,999,999.
(Note: do not enter the commas in
response to this question; their presence here is for clarity.)
If you choose 3 as the response, the following question appears:
NUMBER OF CYCLES IS
Enter the number of cycles in the study.
is 9999.

The maximum number of cycles

Next the program displays the study summary.

4-34

GAMMA-ll DATA ACQUISITION
4.8.2

Gate-Synchronized Study Summary

After you have entered all the collection parameters, the program
displays a summary of the entire gate-synchronized study plan (except
for comments) as shown in Figute 4-18.

Figure 4-18
Gate-Synchronized Study Plan

4.8.3

Gate-Synchronized Study Precollection

The gated study has a special precollection monitor
the patient
monitor program (see Section 4.9).
The patient monitor program
displays the gamma-camera data and gate signal without storing the
data.
This allows you to position the patient and verify that the
gate signal is being received. At this point, you can use the patient
monitor program for patient positioning but not to help answer the
acquisition questions. You would already have answered the questions.
To aid in answering the questions, you must use the PM command prior
to beginning acquisition.
Type a P to exit the patient monitor program and proceed to the
precollection message shown in Figure 4-7. This is a programmed pause
to allow final adjustments, wait for the patient, or reconsider the
entire procedure.
If for any reason you do not proceed with the
collection, you must type CTRL/X or CTRL/Z. The program deletes the
entire study file. Otherwise, to begin actual data acquisition, you
should press the hand switch button or any key on the terminal.

4-35

GAMMA-II DATA ACQUISITION
4.8.4

Data Acquisition

During data acquisition, the system displays the core-resident data in
a movie-like fashion.
At the same time, it displays the following
information:
TOTAL TIME
TOTAL COUNTS
COUNT RATE

T<!>TAL CYCLES
REJ. CYCLES (rejected cycles)
GATE INTERVAL
.

GAMMA-II updates this information once per second. It specifies the
time iri seconds, the count rate in counts/second, and the gate
interval in milliseconds. If ???? appears for the gate interval, the
last gate interval exceeded 10 seconds.
This situation usually
indicates that GAMMA-II is no longer receiving a gate signal.
The display has only a simple scaling algorithm for displaying the
core-resident data. During gated acquisition, you can scale the data
to a cell count maximum of 31, 63, 127, or 255. The initial scaling
is 31 (2 counts/intensity level). The commands to cha~ge the scaling
are 1, 2, 3, or 4 for maximum cell counts of 31, 63, 127, or 255
respectively.
CTRL/X and CTRL/Z terminate the study just as they do for other types
of studies.
If you type a CTRL/Z or CTRL/X any time before actual
acquisition, control returns to the background command table.
Ifa cell overflows during
following message appears:

acquisition,

acquisition

stops

and

the

DISK UPDATE
The program adds the core-resident data to the disk data, zeroes core,
and
finally
resumes acquisition.
The message is erased when
acquisition resumes.
NOTE
In-core gated acquisition
only in the background.

4.8.5

available

Hints on Using Gate-Synchronized Acquisition

You should use the single job RT-ll monitor during gate-synchronized
acquisition to acquire the maximum number of frames. TO call in the
single job monitor, type CTRL/C. At -the dot type the following for
RK05 disks:
BOOT RKMNSJ ~
Or type the following for RK06 disks:
BOOT DMMNSJ ~
When acquisition is complete, type one of the following to
the foreground/background monitor:
BOOT RKMNFB~(for RK05 disks)
BOOT DMMNFB~(for RK05 disks)

4-36

return

GAMMA-II DATA ACQUISITION

p
4.9

PATIENT MONITORING

At times, you may need to verify that the patient positioning is
correct, especially if you are going to use ZOOM mode for data
acquisition.
Also, with gate-synchronized
acquisition,
it
is
desirable to establish that the system is receiving the gate signals
and what is the gating interval.
The patient monitor program allows you to do these processes quickly.
It is a" quick acquisition program that acquires data in a fixed,
64 x 64 x word format and displays the data in real time.
It monitors
the gate signal if there is one. The patient monitor program is also
a" quick test of the GAMMA-it camera interface and real time clock.
The patient monitor program requires no setup.
following from the background command table:

You need only type the

PM~

.The program immediately begins to acquire data in 64 x 64 x word
format and displays it on the color display. The program updates the
display once every second. The program scales the data on the display
in the normal manner but does not allow the display commands such as
thresholding or interpolation.
Above the image, the program displays the following information:
TIME
nn SEC
COUNTS
nn
COUNT RATE nn

GATE INTERVAL
nn MSEC
FRAME DURATION (32) nn
FRAME DURATION (64) nn

The time is elapsed time in seconds.
The counts are total counts
accumulated in the image. The count rate is the total counts divided
by the elapsed time.
The gate interval and frame duration pertain to gate-synchronized
acqui$ition studies which are explained in Section 4.8. Tne gate
interval is the time between the two previous gate signals in
milliseconds.
If the program detects no gate signals in the last 10
seconds, it displays a "????" instead.
The frame duration is the duration of a singLe frame for an in-core
gate-synchronized acquisition study.
The system displays the frame
duration for both 32 x 32 and 64 x 64 matrices.
The
program
determines the frame duration by dividing the gate interval by the
maximum number of frames that can fit in core. For a 64 x 64 matrix
this is rounded up to the nearest 5 milliseconds. For example, if the
gate interval is 800 ms and twelve 64 x 64 frames can fit in core, the
frame duration is 70 ms (800/12=66.666, round up to 70 ms). For a
32 x 32 matrix, the frame duration is rounded" up to the nearest 1 ms.

4-37

GAMMA-II DATA ACQUISITION
The commands for controlling the program are all immediate
commands, except for timed restart. The commands are:

mode

Zero core and restart.

Chanye to zoom mode if in normal mode, or vice versa.

Timed restart, program will ask for the time in
seconds.
After each specified time interval, core is
zeroed and data acquisition is restarted.

Exit timed mode.

Change to black and white mode if in color.

Change to color if in black and white.

CTRL/X

Exit to background command table.

CTRL/Z

Exit to background command table.

4-38

PART 3
GAMMA-II DATA ANALYSIS

CHAPTER

GENERAL DATA ANALYSIS COMMANDS

CHAPTER

ADDITIONAL ANALYSIS COMMANDS FOR THE COLOR DISPLAY

CHAPTER

REGIONS OF INTEREST

CHAPTER

SLICING

CHAPTER

FLOOD CORRECTION

CHAPTER 5
GENERAL DATA ANALYSIS COMMANDS

The data analysis procedures work with the collected patient data.
These procedures provide variations on displaying the aata and
mathematical operations and analytical tools for working with and
analyzing the data.
This chapter will describe the general data
analysis commands that can be performed on both the VTOl storage scope
and the VSVOl color display.

5.1

INITIATING AND CONTINUING DATA ANALYSIS

To initiate analysis of a patient study, use the Analyze Data command
(AD) from the background command table.
All of the other data
~nalysis commands described in this chapter and Chapters 6, 7,
and 8
fare subsets of the data analysis program and can be invoked only after
you have typed the AD command.
Occasionally, you may want to interrupt the analysis procedure, use
BASIC (FORTRAN or FOCAL) for some calculations on the data, and then
return to the analysis. In these instances the AD command is used to
initiate the study, and the CA command (Continue Analysis) is used
from the background command table to continue analysis after the
interruption.

5.1.1

Initiating Data Analysis

The analysis and review procedures run only as a single job under
RT-ll S/J or in the background for RT-Il FIB. These procedures do not
run in the foreground.
To select a study for analysis and review, type the Analyze Data
command.

(AD)

AD n~
The disk unit number n is optional. If n is not present, the index of
data on disk 0 will be displayed. If you type any number other than 0
for n, the data on that disk unit will be displayed.
The first page of the patient study index is shown on the
shown in Figure 5-1.
5-1

display

GENERAL DATA ANALYSIS COMMANDS

Figure 5-1
Index To Patient Studies
Each page of the index is numbered sequentially, with the entries on
the first page numbered from 1-12;
second page, 13-24;
third page,
25-36, etc. The most recent study is displayed first on Page 1. Each
entry consists of the following items:
PATIENT NAME
PATIENT NUMBER
ORGAN
STUDY TYPE (S, D, L, OR BLANK)
DATE or RT-ll FILENAME
Missing items are left blank. For STUDY TYPE, the letters S, D, L,
and
Blank
indicate Static, Dynamic, List, and Flood studies,
respectively.
(Gated studies are either dynamic or list studies.)
Four procedure choices are displayed:
STUDY

Enter the number of the study to be reviewed.

The next page of the index is displayed. This choice is
not offered on the last page of the index. To return to
the first page, you must type CTRL/Z to obtain the
background command table and again type the AD command to
select analysis and review.

The displayed page is printed on the terminal.

Instead of the acquisition date appearing on the display,
it is replaced with the RT-ll filename.
The RT-ll
filename is automatically created during data acquisition.
Internally, the data acquisition program takes the first
six characters of the patient name and creates
an
extension in the format of an X and a 2-digit number. For

5-2

GENERAL DATA ANALYSIS COMMl\NDS

example, if there were two patients with the last name of
RICHARDSON, the first RICHARDSON to have a study performed
would be_ RICHAR.XOO and the second RICHARDSON to have a
study performed would be RICHAR.XOl.

TO initiate analysis for a

particular study, type the appropriate
study number (follo~ed by a RETURN) from the patient study index. The
index is erased and the study summary of the chosen patient file
appears on the display.
The study summary is arranged a bit
differently from the one displayed during an acquisition run, but it
provides the same information. Collection parameters for each frame
of a static study (Figure 5-2), or for each group of a dynamic study·
(Figure 5-3), appear on the display.
In the latter, the matrix
configuration is identified by its type number in parentheses.
Five
procedure choices are listed:
displays the first frame of
analysis and review procedure.
~y

a RETURN, prints the

study

and

summ~ry_on

starts

the

followed

followed by a RETURN, displays comments,
if any exist.
The text cannot be edited at this time, only examined or
printed.

followed by a RETURN, returns
studies.

followed by a carriage return, displays the patient
administrative block for the next frame. N does not apply
to dynamic or list mode studies.

the

the terminal.

index

patient

Figure 5-3
Dynamic Patient Study Summary

Figure 5-2
Static Patient Study Summary

5-3

GENERAL DATA ANALYSIS COMMANDS

5.1.2

Continue Analysis

You can call the Continue Analysis command (CA) only at the background·
command table level.
The Continue Analysis routine is an alternate
entry point to the data analysis program.
To select a study for
continuing analysis, type:
CA~

When you issue the CA command, the data analysis program reads save
area 0, opens the data file referenced by it for analysis, and then
displays save area o. This command causes the data analysis program
to bypass the patient study index and the administrative data display.
Thus, you have a direct route to enter the data analysis program and
continue analysis of the last study analyzed. Users who perform data
analysis with higher-level languages (FOCAL, FORTRAN, or BASIC)
will
find this feature quite useful when switching between their own
programs and GAMMA-II.
Once you call the data analysis program via the CA ~ommand,
the last
study that you analyzed is reselected and displayed on the screen
(i.e., the data file referenced by save area 0 is opened, and the
contents of the save area are displayed). At this point, you proceed
as usual.
If the patient file cannot be found on the disk, the
message is displayed on the screen.

following

error

PATIENT STUDY: dev:filename
index line of study
CANNOT BE FOUND
TYPE RETURN TO EXIT
The "dev:filename" is the RT-Il device mnemonic and filename of the
patient file.
The background command table is displayed when you
press RETURN.

5.2

THE DISPLAY FRAME

A display frame is shown in Figure 5-4. The display frame shows
organ as well as pertinent administrative and analytical data.

5-4

the

GENERAL DATA ANALYSIS COMMANDS

Figure 5-4
Display Frame
Note these elements of the display shown in Figure 5-4:
1.

Identification -- At the top left of the display an index
entry identifies the study.
Identification consists of
PATIENT NAME, PATIENT NUMBER, ORGAN, STUDY TYPE, and DATE OF
ACQUISITION. Identification appears in every display frame.

Matrix -- The matrix occupies most of the screen in the
normal full-size display mode as shown.
Each cell is
represented by a small square whose size depends on the
dimensions of the matrix, and whose intensity depends on the
number of counts in the cell. The result is a visual image
of the count distribution.

Counts and Frame Number ~. The total number of counts in the
frame
(TOT CT=) appears directly beneath the matrix (for the
VTOI) or appears directly above the matrix (for the VSVOI
color display), followed by tne largest
(MAX), smallest
(MIN), and average (AV) number of counts per cell.
At the
extreme right is the frame number.
In a dual-isotope study,
the selected isotope is indicated-by the letter A or B after
the frame number:
FRAMEOOIA
\

designates the first frame of isotope A.
In a $tatic study, the VIEW, entered at data acquisition
setup time, is displayed instead of the frame number.

5-5

GENERAL DATA ANALYSIS COMMANDS
4.

Threshold and Step Size -- Near the upper left corner of the
matrix are the lower (LT) and upper (UT) display threshold
data. The threshold and step size are displayed in the lower
left corner of the s~reen on the VTOI.
Each is s~ecified by
a pair of numbers.
The first of these numbers is the
threshold level.
The second is the step size by which the
threshold may be changed. Both are expressed as percentages
of the maximum cell count (MAX).
(See Sections 5.6 througn
5.7.6)

. 5~

Frame Rate or Duration -- In a dynamic study, the frame
rate
of the current group is shown in the lower right corner.
In
a static study, the duration of the frame is displayed here.

Immediately below the matrix, the word COMMAND:
appears. This is a
prompt to you that the data analysis program is waiting for you to
enter a command. The rest of this chapter describes, in detail,
the
available ,commands that can be entered.

5.3

DISPLAY MODE COMMANDS

Certain operating conditions and display modes are established by
pairs of commands:
one sets the condition, while the other removes
it. This procedure is useful for display sizes.
That is, matrices
are displayed either full-sized or minified (groups of four).
There
are certain commands which determine the size of these matrix
,displays. They set the prevailing mode until changed. These commands
are described in the following sections.
The action of any of the commands is clear from the context. You have
the choice of entering these commands with or without spaces.
For
example, the following commands are functionally identical:
SM 3
SM3
All spaces between the commands and their parameters are ignored.
the space itself is a
However, please note in some procedures,
command.
Should you type a character string that is not a recognized command,
the system will try to find a macro by that name and execute that
macro.
(See Section 5.24 for macros.)
If no macro by that name
exists the system will issue an illegal command error message and will
prompt you to type in a new command.

5.3.1

Error Processing

The data analysis command processor detects errors in a command line.
Three basic procedures are used during erro~processing. These are:
1.

If the core-resident data differs from the data
displayed, the system displays the core-resident data.

The system displays the command line only up to the point
(character)
at which the error is detected followed by a
question mark (?).

The message, COMMAND:

is redisplayed.

5-6

last

GENERAL DATA ANALYSIS COMMANDS
An error occurs in two cases: either you have typed a command that
GAMMA-II does not recognize (i.e., a typographical error) or GAMMA-II
cannot do the command (as in trying to place more frames into a
playback file than exist in the patient file).
If the command is unrecognizable, GAMMA-II will try to find a macro by
that name and execute it. If there is n6 macro by that name, an error
occurs.
If a valid command cannot be executed but is preceded by an
exclamation point (!), an error does not occur and control passes to
the pext command line.
NOTE
When the system detects an error, it
terminates execution of the remainder of
the command line and/or macro buffer.

5.3.2

Multiple Command Lines

The multiple command line feature allows you to enter more than one
_ command to the COMMAND:
response on the screen. Multiple command
lines increase the speed at which the system performs complex
algorithms.
This speed results from eliminating redisplay functions
which usually take anywhere from 1 to 10 seconds to accomplish on the
VTOI and up to 2 seconds on the color display.
No redisplay of data takes place between commands unless
1.

A display command (01, OM, ON, or 10) is issued.

The command processor is ready to accept a new command from
you and the core-resident data differs from the last data
displayed.

Separate the individual commands in
semicolon (i). For example,

multiple

RSliDMliRS2;DM2iRS3;DM3iRS4iDM4(RET)

This example displays four save areas at one time.

5-7

command

line

GENERAL DATA ANALYSIS COMMANDS

5.3.3

Full Size Display

The Fuil Size display command (DI) displays the core-resident frame at
full size (Figure 5-4). Type the following command to display a full
sized image on the screen.
DIG!£)
Keep in mind that there are 16 levels of color or 16 levels of gray
for
the m~trices.
In the VTOI, there are 32 levels of intensity for
the 32 x 32 and 64 x 64 matrices.
For the 128 x 128 matrix there are
8 levels. The display levels are distributed linearly over the range
-of cell counts
(MIN to MAX)
in the displayed matrix.
If the
thresholds have been changed to enhance contrast, the levels are
distributed over the range of counts between the thresholds.
(See
Sections 5.6 through 5.7.6 for a discussion of thresholds and
intensity levels.)

D
5.3.4

Minified Display

There are two forms of the minified display commands, D~ and DM n.
Each has its own unique set of functions.
The DM command reduces the
size of the displayed image and displays four
sequential frames.
These frames are displayed simultaneously along with the count data
for each frame.
To produce a minified image, the system reduces the 128 x 128 matrix
to 64 x 64.
The four adjacent cells of the matrix are averaged to
produce one cell of the smaller
image.
The 64 x 64 and 32 x 32
matrices are unchanged.
The system does not change the number of
intensity levels in the minified image,
regardless
of
matrix
dimension.
Type the following comm,and to display all four sequential
minified frames.
DM~

An example of the display is shown in Figure 5-5.

5-8

GENERAL DATA ANALYSIS COMMANDS

Figure 5-5
Minified Display
Notice that the core-resident frame is at the upper left, the
succeeding frames in the upper right, lower left, and lower right.
The DM n command displays up to four non-sequential frames of data
simultaneously.
Type the following command where n represents that
position of the display in which the current contents of core are
displayed.
OM n~
The value of n can be only 1, 2, 3, or 4.
If n=l, the screen is
erased.
With this command, you can manipulate the core-resident data
and display four images simultaneously. Furthermore, DM 1 does not
set a prevailing mode.
If you type a command other than DM n in
response to "COMMAND:" (such as SKy skip), the display is presented in
full size.
An example using the DM n command is:
S9;DMl;SK;S9;DM2;SK;S9;DM3;SK;S9;OM4(~ET)

This command line displays four smoothed images of a
study. Another example is:
RSl;DMl;RS2;DM2;RS3;DM3;RS4;DM4~

which displays four save area images.

5-9

multiple

static

GENERAL DATA ANALYSIS COMMANDS

5.3.5 ,Display Index
The bi~play Index command (DX) presents the patient index.
following command to display a list of the patient index.

Type

the·

DX~

See Figure 5~1. The DX command allows you to select
study eas~ly without returning to the command table.

~.3.6

another

patient

Display Patient Data Summary

The Display Patient Data Summary command (DP)
is useful because it
avoids typing CTRL/X which returns to the command table, and then AD
to enter the analysis and review routine. See Section 5.1.1 for a
discussion about the study summary. Type the following command to
display a study summary of the patient file that is currently being
reviewed.
DPG!!)

D
5.3.7

No Display

The No Display command (ND)
is applicable only if you are using
multiple command lines. Type the following command at the end of the
command line to avoid displaying any data.
NDGD
The command is essential if you want to type more than 49 characters
in a command line.
The system only responds to 49 characters on a
line and then displays the data of that command line. The ND command
eliminates a display and continues with the "COMMAND:" message on the
next line. For example, the following command line is longer than 49
characters:
COMMAND:LT 20;AD4;S9;DNl;SK5;S9;DM2;SK5;NDGD
COMMAND:S9;DM3;SK5;S9;DM4~

5-10

GENERAL DATA ANALYSIS COMMANDS
Notice that NO (no display) appears at the end of the first
line. You may finish the command line on the next line.

5.4

command

FRAME SELECTION COMMANDS

Certairi commands are used primarily for frame selection.
They allow
you to manipulate displays such as requesting the next frame, skipping
forward or backward through the frames, restoring current frames, and
returning to the beginning of the study. The only command in this
group!that applies to a single-frame static study is the BE or
beginning command, discussed in section 5.4.5.

I(
5.4.1

) I

Next Frame

The Next Frame command (space bar) displays the next frame in sequence
of a particular study.
Press the space bar to advance to the next
frame.

In minified display mode, the display shifts ahead one frame.
For example, if frames 3 through 6 are displayed on the screen, and
you request the Next Frame command, the display shifts to frames 4
through 7. The matrix at the upper left is core-resident.
NOTE
The space bar has an additional effect
when the Consecutive Add (AD) message is
displayed. See Section 5.14.1.

K
5.4.2

Skip Forward

The Skip Forward command (SK) skips ahead through the study.
ahead n number of frames, type:

skip

SK n~
The n is optional in this command.
For example, if frame 5 is
displayed (or frames 5 through 8 in a minified display), the command,
SK 4~
5-11

GENERAL DATA ANALYSIS COMMANDS
brings frame 9 (or frames 9 through 12 in a minified display)
screen. If the n is omitted the command,

the

SK~

displays the next frame, that is, frame 6 (or frames 6 through 9 in a
minified display).
An attempt to skip beyond the end of the study
causes an error.

5.4.3

Skip Backward

The Skip Backward command (BK) skips backward through the
skip backward n number of frames, type:

study.

BK nC§)
The n is optional in this command.
displayed (or frames 10 through
command,

For example, if frame 10 is
13 in a minified display), the

BK 4C§)
brings frame 6 (or frames 6 through 9 in a minified
screen. If the n is omitted the command,

display)

the

BK~

displays the previous frame;
that is, frame 9 (or frames 9 through 12
in a minified display). An attempt to back up beyond the first frame
of the study causes an error.

5.4.4

Restore Current Frame

The Restore Current Frame command (RETURN) restores to the screen the
currently-selected frame, as indicated by the displayed frame number
(or view). Type a RETURN with no command preceding it to display the
currently-selected frame.
~

This command is useful, because it allows you to start with an
original
frame
after
the
core-resident
frame has undergone
modification (such as frame algebra operations).

5-12

GENERAL DATA.ANALYSIS COMMANDS
When using the RETURN command in multiple command lines, two new forms
of the command take place. These are:
line;~

COMMAND:

command

C9MMAND:

command line;icommand line~

and

The f~rst command line executes all of the functions in the command
line 'and restores the current frame because the semicolon is present
before the RETURN. If there is no semicolon ,before the RETURN the
command line is executed as normal.
The second command line has two semicolons in the middle. The system
notices the first semicolon and expects that a command follows it. In
this case another semicolon is typed, which means no command exists;
hence, the system restores the current frame of the data and continues
executing the remainder of the command line.
The following example stores a smoothed matrix (multiplied by 0.5) in
save area 5; the original frame is restoredi smoothed, mUltiplied by
0.25, and stored in save area 6; and finally the original frame is
redisplayed.
COMMAND:

5.4.5

S9;CMO.5;SM5;;S9;CMO.25;SM6; ~

Beginning

The Beginning command (BE) returns the display to the first
the study. Type:

frame

BE~

on the terminal.
For example, if you want to skip forward or
backward, or advance frames, the BE command returns the display to the
first frame of that particular study. Upon doing this, all initial
operating conditions are also restored (thresholding, step sizing,
etc.).

5.5

DUAL ISOTOPE SELECTION COMMANDS

A dual-isotope study is identified by the letter A or B that appears
after the displayed frame number. For 'most analysis procedures, only
one isotope at a time is examined. The study is treated as if it were
a single-isotope study. You select the isotope by the commands in the
following sections (5.5.1 through 5.5.4).

5-13

GENERAL DATA ANALYSIS COMMANDS

5.5.1 . Select Isotope A
The Select Isotope A command (IA) transfers the frames of isotope A to
core for display and analysis.
Type the following command on the
terminal to set the isotope to mode A.
IA~

Because only isotope A is displayed and analyzed (including during
regions of interest), the study, for all practical purposes, is a
single isotope study. Mode A remains in effect until you give another
isot_ope selection comma.l1d.

5.5.2

Select Isotope B

The Select Isotope B command (IB) transfers the frames of isotope B to
core for display and analysis.
Type the following command on the
terminal to set the isotope to mode B.
IBGE!)
Because only isotope B is displayed and analyzed (including regions of
interest), the study, for all practical purposes, is a single isotope
study. Mode B remains in effect until you give another isotope
selection command.

5.5.3

Isotope Exchange

The Isotope Exchange command (IX) exchanges (or switches) one pair of
isotopes.
Type the following command o~the terminal to exchange
isotopes.
IXG!!)
That is, if isotope A is displayed and you type the IX command, the
current frame number remains unchanged, and the system moves the frame
for isotope B into core in place of the frame for isotope A.

5-14

GENERAL DATA ANALYSIS COMMANDS
For example, if the message FRAME012A is displayed on the screen,
frame 12 of isotope A is currently being displayed. However, when you
issue the IX command, frame 12 of isotope B moves into core and the
system displays the message FRAME012B on the screen. The isotope B
data replaces isotope A data. '
NOTE
Frame numbers are very important to' the
GAMMA-II user.
Frame numbers tell you
what part of a study is being used.
Remember
that the current frame is
always the
frame
number
that
is
displayed.

5.5.4

Dual Isotope Display

The Dual Isotope Display command (DD)
displays two matrices of a
/current frame in minified mode. Type the following command on the
terminal.
DD~

A dual isotope consista of two sets of data, one for isotope A and one
for isotope B.
The dual display command displays both isotopes
simultaneously (in minified form). For example, this operation is
useful in a dual isotope static study to compare the distribution of
each isotope in an organ.
Isotope A, displayed in the left minified frame, automatically becomes
the selected one, regardless of the prevailing selection mode when the
DD command is typed. The display returns to normal size as soon as
you type another command. Isotope A remains core-resident.

The data analysis routine can analyze only one set of isotopes (either
A or B)
at a time. Thus commands lA, IB and IX are used to select
which isotope's data is to be displayed and analyzed.

5.6

THRESHOLD INTENSITY LEVELS AND CONTRAST ENHANCEMENT

In a normal full-size matrix display, the intensity levels are
distributed linearly over the range of cell counts in the matrix.
There are 16 intensity levels (0 to IS) fo~the color display and 33
intensity levels (0 to 32) for the VTOI. With the VTOl, there are
only 8 levels of intensity for 128 x 128 matrices.
The count
increment per level is represented by the following formula:
(MAX-MIN}/(Levels of intensity in matrix) = (Count Increment)/Level

5-15

GENERAL DATA ANALYSIS COMMANDS
In a normal full-size display, 15 of the 16 color levels (32 of 33 for
the VTOl) , or gray scale intensity levels, are visible and distributed
linearly over the range of cell counts in the matrix.
Level 0
represents only those cells ,with zero counts. Thus, if the lowest
cell count (MIN) is zero, the highest (MAX) is 300, and there are 15
nonzero levels, each intensity level represents a range of 20 counts.
The count increment per level is represented by the following formula:
MAX-MIN/IS levels of intensity = counts/level
(300-0)/15

= 20 counts/level

Those cells with count 0 are at intensity level O.
counts between: 1-20 are at intensity level: 1
21-40
2
41-60
3
61-80
4

281-300

Those

cells

with

At least one cell is at maximum intensity in every frame,
and each
cell with 0 counts always has zero intensity. In this way, the system
provides the maximum possible contrast for every frame, regardless of
the absolute count.
However, when the cell-count range is smaller
than the number of levels, not all intensities are displayed, but the
distribution still is linear.
You can distribute the range of the intensity levels over a smaller
range of counts by specifying the lower and upper thresholds. A lower
threshold is a percentage of the maximum counts below which no
intensities are displayed. An upper threshold is a percentage of the
maximum counts above which no intensities are displayed. For example,
if the maximum count is 300,
1.

A lower threshold of 10 means that cells whose
less than 30 (10% of 300) are not displayed.

counts

are

An upper threshold of 80 means that cells whose
greater than 240 (80% of 300) are not displayed.

counts

are

When detectable backgr~und radiation exists, contrast in the areas of
interest is reduced because the display levels have to include cells
with only a few counts. Similarly, unwanted hot spots (as in a brain
scan)
also reduce contrast by using up levels at the high end of the
range. Both difficulties can be eliminated by setting the display
thresholds so that cells with the counts lying above or below them are
not displayed. The intensity levels are distributed only over the
range of counts lying between the thresholds.
In this way, contrast
is enhanced in the areas of interest. You can set the thresholds and
move them up or down at will, so that an optimum display can easily De
obtained.

NOTE
The threshold-setting commands affect
only the display, not the core-resident
data.
However, you can
store
the
threshold specifications, along with the
matrix, in a save area.

5-16

GENERAL DATA ANALYSIS COMMANDS
5.6.1

Display Thresholds and Steps

Each display threshold is expressed as a percentage of the maximum
cell count in the frame.
You can alter the thresholds by setting
them, or you can increment or ~ecrement them in steps using the step
size.
Thresholds can be set and changed individually or together.
Initially, the lower and upper thresholds are set to zero percent and
100 percent, respectively, each with a step size of 5 percent.

5.7

THRESHOLD ADJUSTMENT COMMANDS

The threshold adjustment commands are used to lower and raise
threshold values to a percentage of the maximum cell count. The
commands also set the step size to a specified percentage.
These
commands are described in the following Sections 5.7.1 through 5.7.8.

5.7.1

Set Lower Threshold and Step

~The

Set the Lower Threshold and Step command
(LT)
sets the lower
display threshold to a certain percentage of the maximum cell count
and also sets the step size to a particular percentage.
Command format:
LT lower,step~
where:
lower

is the l6wer threshold expressed as a percentage
of the maximum cell count.

step

is the optional percent step size.

For example, the following command sets the lower threshold to 15% and
the step size to 2%.
LT l5,2~
The following command sets the lower threshold to
size remains unchanged.

10%

and

the

step

LT lO~
Thresholding is nothing more than specifying percentages of the
maximum cell count for the frame. Those_cells that lie outside the
threshold percentages are not displayed.

5-17

GENERAL DATA ANALYSIS COMMANDS

5. 7.2

Set Upper Threshold .and Step

The Set the Upper Threshold and Step command (UT) sets the upper
threshold to a certain percentage of the maximum 6ell count and also
sets the step size to a particular percentage.
Command format:
UT

upper,step~

where:
upper

is the upper threshold expressed as a percentage
of the maximum cell count.

step

is the optional percent step size.

For example, the following command sets the upper threshold to 10% and
the step size to 8%.
UT 10, 8CRET )
The following command sets the upper threshold to
size remains unchanged.

and

20%

the

step

UT 20~

5.7.3

Raise the Lower Threshold by Step Size

The Raise the Lower Threshold by Step Size command (W) raises the
presently displayed lower threshold by the current step size. Type
the following command on the terminal to raise the lower threshold.

wGD
For example, the following command displays the lower threshold at 10%
of the maximum cell count and sets the step size to 5%.
LT 10,5(§)
Each time you type the following command on the terminal, the
cell count increases by 5%.

maximum

w(§)

In this case, the lower threshold is
maximum cell count.
5-18

now

displayed

15%

the

GENERAL DATA ANALYSIS COMMANDS

NOTE
The system rejects any attempt to step
beyond the boundaries (0% and 100%) in
either direction.

5.7.4

Lower the Lower Threshold by Step Size

T~e

Lower the Lower Threshold by Step Size command (X) lowers the
presently displayed lower threshold by the current step size. Type
the following command on the terminal to lower the lower threshold.

For example, the following command displays the lower threshold at 30%
the maximum cell count and sets the step size to 7%.

·~f

LT 30,7(§)
Each time you type the following command on the terminal, the
cell count decreases by 7%.

maximum

In this case, the lower threshold is
maximum cell count.

now

displayed

23%

the

NOTE
The system rejects any attempt to step
beyond the boundaries (0% to 100%) in
either direction.

5.7.5

Lower the Upper Threshold by Step Size

The Lower the Upper Threshold by Step Size command (Y)
lowers the
presently displayed upper threshold by the current step size. Type
the following command on the terminal to lower the upper threshold.

5-19

GENERAL DATA ANALYSIS COMMANDS
For example, the following command displays the upper threshold at 50%
of the maximum cell count and sets the step size to 8%.
UT 50,8~

Each time you type the following command on the terminal, the
cell count decreases by 8%.

maximum

Y@D

In this case, the upper threshold is
maximum cell count.

now

displayed

42%

the.

NOTE

The system rejects any attempt to step
beyond the boundaries (0% and 100%) in
either direction.

5.7.6 fRaise the Upper Threshold by step Size
The Raise the Upper Threshold by Step Size command
(Z)
raises the
presently displayed upper threshold by the current step size. Type
the f9llowing command on the terminal to raise the upper threshold.
z(§)

For example, the following command displays the upper threshold at 22%
of the maximum cell count and set the step size to 9%.
UT 22, 9C§)

Each time you type the following command on the terminal, the
cell count increases by 9%.

maximum

In this case, the upper threshold is
maximum cell count.

now

displayed

NOTE

The system rejects any attempt to step
beyond the boundaries (0% and 100%) in
either direction.

5-20

31%

the

GENERAL DATA ANALYSIS COMMANDS

u
5.7.7 ! Set the Upper Threshold Display Switch
I

The Set Upper Threshold Display Switch command (UM) displays the
counts above the upper threshold with the maximum intensity inste?d of
using a zero intensity. Type the following command to display the
maximum intensity.
UM~

For example, if the f6110wing commands are typed, the counts above the
upper threshold (50%) are at maximum intensity, and the counts below
the lower threshold (25%) remain at level zero.
LT 25
UT 50
UM
In

Figur~ 5-6,

the image on the left was derived

, command string:
LT25;UT50~

The image on the right is derived from:
LT25;UT50;UM~

Figure 5-6
Upper Threshold Display Switch
5-21

from

the

following

GENERAL DATA ANALYSIS COMMANDS

Clear the Upper Threshold Display Switch

5.7.8

The Clear the Upper Threshold Display Switch command (UO) is a clear
switch for the UM command. Typing the following command causes the
counts above the upper threshold to be displayed with zero intensity
(i.e., not displayed).
UO~

5.8

ISOCOUNT BAND COMMANDS

It~ is often useful to examine a narrow range, or band of counts in the
matrix. This narrow range is known as an isocount. The thresholds of
such an isocount band can be shifted up or down while maintaining the
bandwidth. The commands are described in the following sections 5.8.1
through 5.8.3.

set Isocount Thresholds

5.8.1

The Set Isocount Thresholds command (IS)
sets
thresholds to individual maximum cell counts.

the

lower

and

upper

Command format:
IS lower, upper ~
where:
lower

is the lower threshold expressed as a percentage
of the maximum cell count.

upper

is the upper threshold expressed as a percent
of the maximum cell count.

For example, the following command sets the lower threshold at 15% of
the maximum cell count and sets the upp~r threshold at 20% of the
maximum cell count.
IS 15,20 GD
Keep in mind that the lower threshold cannot be greater than or
to the upper threshold or the command is rejected.

5-22

equal

GENERAL DATA ANALYSIS COMMANDS

NOTE
The system rejects any attempt to move
the band beyond the boundaries (0% and
100%) in either direction.

5.8.2

Raise Band

---Tlie Raise Band command (N) raises the upper and lower thresholds by a
step size equal- to the difference between them. Type the following
command to raise the isocount band.

For example, the following command sets the lower threshold at 10% of
the maximum cell count and sets the upper threshold at 25% of the
maximum cell count.

!IS 10,25Q"iD
When you type the following command on the terminal, the upper and
lower thresholds are raised by a step size equal to the difference
between them.

In this example, the upper and lower thresholds
shown in the following formula.

are

raised

25% - 10% = 15% (step size)
Thus,
new lower threshold
new upper threshold

10% + 15%

25%

= 25% + 15% = 40%
NOTE

The system rejects any attempt to move
the band beyond the boundaries (0% and
100%) in either direction. -

5-23

15%,

GENERAL DATA ANALYSIS COMMANDS

5.8.3

Lower Band

The Lower Band command (0) lowers the upper and lower thresholds by a
step size equal to the difference between them. Type on the terminal
to lower the isocount band.
O~

For example, the following command sets the lower threshold at 30% of
the maximum cell count and sets the upper threshold at 40% of the
maximum cell count.
IS

30,40~

When you type the following command on the terminal,
the upper and
lower thresholds are lowered by a step size equal to the difference
between them.

OG!)
In this example, the upper and lower thresholds
shown in the following formula.
40% - 30%

= 10%

are

raised

10%,

(step size)

Thus,
new lower threshold

30% - 10% = 20%

new upper threshold

40% - 10% = 30%
NOTE

The system rejects any attempt to move
the band beyond the boundaries (0% and
100%) in either direction.

5.9

NO-ENHANCEMENT MODE COMMANDS

Thresholds may alsq be changed without contrast~enhancement.
Without
contrast enhancement, only those cells whose counts lie between the
thresholds are displayed:
however, the intensity levels are still
distributed over the entire count range. Thus, you can eliminate
background noise and hot spots, leaving intensities and contrast
relationships unchanged in the areas of interest. The no-enhancement
commands add the letter N to th~ UT, LT, and IS commands.

5-24

GENERAL DATA ANALYSIS COMMANDS

5.9.1

No-Enhancement Lower Threshold

The No-Enhancement Lower Threshold command
th~eshold without contrastenchancement.

(LTN)

changes

the

lower

Command format:
LTN lower,ste~
where:
lower

is the percent of the maximum cell count.

step

is the optional percent of the step size.

Figure 5-7 shows an image with a lower threshold of 20
enhancement. The command to obtain this image is:

with

contrast

LT 20(~)
Xn Figure 5-7, the cells lying below 20% are not displayed, and all 15
intensity levels are displayed between 20% and 100%.
Figure 5-8 shows an image with a lower threshold of 20
contrast enhancement. The command to obtain this image is:

without

LTN 20~
In this case, the intensity levels are distributed over the
count range, starting with instensity level 3 (20% x 15 = 3).

5-25

entire

GENERAL DATA ANALYSIS COMMANDS

Figure 5-7
Lower Thresholding
with Enhancement

Figure 5-8
No-Enhancement
Lower Threshold

Notice the background has been eliminated while leaving the contrast
relationship unchanged in areas of interest. Also, a reminder note,
NE, is displayed underneath the threshold levels as long as the mode
is in effect.
To restore contrast enhancement, type the LT command
once again.

5.9.2

No-Enhancement Upper Threshold

The No-Enhancement Upper Threshold command
threshold without contrast enhancement.

(UTN)

changes

Command format:
UTN upper ,step~
where:
upper

is the upper threshold expressed as a percent
of the maximum cell count.

step

is the percent step size.

5-26

the

upper

GENERAL DATA ANALYSIS COMMANDS
Figure 5-9 shows an image with an upper threshold of 70 with
enhancement. The command to obtain this image is:

contrast

UT 70~

In Figure 5-9, the cells lying above 70% are not displayed, and all 15
intensity levels are displayed between 0% and 70%.
Figure 5-10 shows an image with an upper threshold of 70
contrast enhancement. The command to obtain this image is:

without

UTN 70G!!)
In this case, the intensity levels are distributed over the entire
count range, starting with intensity level 0 and ending with intensity
level 10 (70% x 15 = 10).

Figure 5-9
Upper Threshold
and Step Size

Figure 5-10
No-Enhancement
Upper Threshold

Notice the background has been eliminated while leaving the contrast
relationship unchanged in areas of interest. Also a reminder note,
NE, is displayed at the bottom of the screen as long as the mode is in
effect.
To restore contrast enhancement, type the UT command once
again.

5-27

GENERAL DATA ANALYSIS COMMANDS

5.9.3

No-Enhancement Isocount Thresholds

The No-Enhancement Isocount Thresholds command (ISN) changes the lower
and upper t~resholds without contrast enhancement.
command format:
ISN

lower,upper~

where:
-lower

is the percent of the maximum cell count
for the lower threshold

upper

is the percent of the maximum cell count
for the upper threshold

Figure 5-11 shows an image with a lower threshold of 10% and an upper
threshold of 20% with contrast enhancement. The command to obtain
this image is:
I;S 10,20G!)

In Figure 5-11, the cells lying above 20% and below 10% are not
displayed.
All of the intensity levels 1 through 15 are displayed
between 10% and 20%.
Figure 5-12 shows an image with an upper threshold of 20% and a lower
threshold of 10% without contrast enhancement. The command to obtain
this image is:
ISN

10,20~

In this case the intensity levels are still distributed over the
entire range of counts.
The displayed levels start with intensity
levelland end with intensity level 3. That is,
20% of 15 levels is level 3 for the highest
level
10% of 15 levels is level 1 for the lowest
level

5-28

displayed

intensity

displayed

intensity

GENERAL DATA ANALYSIS COMMANDS

. Figure 5-11
Isocount Thresholding

Figure 5-12
No-Enhancement
Isocount Thresholds

5.10

FRAME ALGEBRA

Frame algebra operations represent any command that changes the
core-resident data.
When a frame algebra command is executed, the
following message appears on the display, where (exp)
i~-~he
typed
command expression.
FRAME ARITH:

(exp)

This message is displayed directly above the thresholds (LT and UT).
The message remains on the display until one of the following occurs.
1.

You execute a new frame algebra command, in
new command expression replaces the old.

you select a new frame by means of a BK, SK, BE or RETURN
command, in which case the FRAME ARITH message is erased. A
space bar command erases any FRAME ARITH message except the
AD command. See Section 5.14.2.

5-29

which

case

the

GENERAL DATA ANALYSIS COMMANDS
5.11

CONSTANT ARITHMETIC COMMANDS

In each constant arithmetic operation, the Constant Add, Constant
subtract, and Constant Mul tiply allow you to per form the. indicated
mathematical function with each cell of the core-resident matrix.
Because the display levels are spread linearly over the cell count or
threshold range, constant arithmetic does not change the display
unless:
1.

underflow or overflow occurs

A constant is added to a previously empty cell

C n
5.11.1

Constant Add

The Constant Add command (CA) adds a constant, n, to each cell of
core-resident matrix.

the

Command format:
CA nC§)
i

where ~ is an integer that is added to each cell of the matrix. For a
byte-matrix, the limits are -255 and +255. For the word-matrix, the
limits are -65535 and +65535.
If the arithmetic results in an
overflow (more than the maximum cell count;
255 or 65535), the
maximum count is stored in the cell. If the result is an underflow,
that is, if the sum is less than zero, the cell remains zero.
For example, if there are cells (byte-matrix) that have a count of
175, and yOQ type the following command, the cell count results in an
overflow.
CA lOO@)
The program assumes the maximum count, 255, in those. cells.

c. -n
5.11.2

Constant Subtract

TQe Constant Subtract command (CA) subtracts a constant, n, from
cell of the core-resident matrix.

5-30

each

GENERAL DATA ANALYSIS COMMANDS
Command format:

CA ':"n~
where -n is an integer that is subtracted from each cell of the
matrix. For a byte-matrix the limits are -255 and +255.
For the word
matrix, the limits are -65535 and +65535.
If the arithmetic results
in an overflow (more than the maximum cell count), the maximum count
is stored in the cell.
If the result is an underflow, that is, if the
sum is less than zero, the cell remains zero.
•
For example, if there are cells (byte-matrix) that have a count of
100, and you type the following command, the cell count results in an
underflow.

CA -150~
The sum is less than zero, thus the cells remain at zero.

c
5.11.3

Constant Multiply

"~he

Constant Multiply command
(CM)
mUltiplies
core-resident matrix by a constant, nn.nn.

each

cell

the

Command format:
CM nn.nnC§)
where nn.nn is a decimal constant whose limits are 0.01 and 99.99.
You
can
obtain
larger
or
smaller
factors
by
successive
multiplications. Leading and trailing nonsignificant zeros may be
omitted.
The following forms of the command are all acceptable:
eM 45
CM.31

CM 0.2
CM5.4
Constant multiplication is often used to
combining its data with other frames.

5-31

normalize

matrix

before

GENERAL DATA ANALYSIS COMMANDS

5.12

NEGATIVE (COMPLEMENTED) IMAGES COMMAND

The Negate Image command (NI) creates a negative (complemented) image.
The program complements the contents of each cell by subtracting them
from the appropriate maximum cell count: 255 for a byte-matrix, 65535
for a word matrix. A count of zero remains zero. Type the following
command to obtain a negated image.
NI~

For example, to obtain a good negative image when there are many empty
__ cells, use the following suggested sequence of commands.
CAljNIQ!!)
Adding 1 to an empty cell ensures a maximum display level in its
complemented image.
To restore the original uncomplemented image,
type RETURN.
,A

negative image is shown in Figure 5-13.

Figure 5-13
Negative (Complemented) Image
5-32

GENERAL DATA ANALYSIS COMMANDS
BYTE-WORD EXPANSION COMMANDS

5.13

To preveht overflow and underflow in frame arithmetic, you can store
byte-matrix data in core in word-matrix form.
The byte-to-word
expansion occurs as the data is read from the disk. The disk contents
are unaffected.
The model of transfer is set by the commands in
Sections 5.13.1 and 5.13.2.

5.13.1

Expand

The Expand command (EX) sets a prevailing operation mode.
If tne
command
is
in effect, the program automatically converts all
byte-matrix data to word-matrix form when the data is transferred to
core. Type the following command on the terminal to expand the data.
EXGD
This mode also remains in effect during use of regions of interest and
slice.
The expand mode is another space saving feature of GAMMA-II,
in that it allows the data to be stored on the disk in byte form but
analyzed in word form. without the expand mode, adding byte frames
/~ogether could lead to cell overflow
(maximum cell count of 255).
Howev~r,
with expand in effect, many byte-matrices can be added
together since they will be converted to word format
(maximum cell
count 65535) when read into core. While the command is in effect, the
condition note "EX" appears at the bottom of the screen.

5.13.2

No Expansion

The No Expansion command (NX) turns off the Expand capability at any
time.
Type the following command to prohibit byte-matrix data from
expanding on transfer to core.
NX~

5-33

GENERAL DATA ANALYSIS COMMANDS
5.14

FRAME ARITHMETIC COMMANDS

Addition, subtraction, multiplication, division, and merging of frames
are all performed on a cell-by-cell basis, that is, corxesponding
cells of two matrices are combined to produce the resulting cell.
Thus, while addition and subtraction follow normal matrix arithmetic
rules, multiplication, division, and merging do not. For convenience,
all
these
operations
are termed frame arithmetic.
Addition,
subtraction, merge, and multiplication may be combined in a single
express/on, but division requires a separate command.
The

fo~lowing

restrictions apply to frame arithmetic operations:

Matrix configurations must match. You cannot combine frames
with different dimensions or cell sizes (word or byte).

You can use the frame arithmetic (FA)
dynamic studies (see Section 5.14.2).

command

only

with

you can combine 128 x 128 matrices only
areas (See Section 5.17).

the

save

lAD
5.14.1

using

Consecutive Add

The Consecutive Add command (AD) adds a selected number of fram~s to
the core-resident frame.
The AD commands work only for dynamic
studies.
Command format:
AD n~
where n is the number of frames that are added
frame.

the

core-resident

For example, if fram~ 7 is core-resident, and you type the following
command, the sum of frames 7, 8, and 9 appears on the display.
AD 2GD
The data in frames 7, 8, and 9 are ~dded together, and frame
remains as the current frame number.

still

The AD ncommand sets a prevailing mode that remains in effect for any
subsequent skip forward, backward, space bar, or display minified
command. In addition, these commands result in an n+l skip or
backspace.
•

5-34

GENERAL DATA ANALYSIS COMMANDS
For example, if the current frame number is 6, and the displayed FRAME
ALGEBRA command is AD3, striking the space bar and then the RETURN,
causes the routine to:
1.

Step ahead to frame 10. That is, the core-resident frame is
the sum of frames 6, 7, 8, and 9. The Space Bar command
skips forward one frame to fr~~e 10.

Add frames 11, 12, and 13 to frame 10 and display the sum.

In minified display mode, if the current frame number is 1, and the.
displayed FRAME ALGEBRA command iSAD4, striking the space bar and
then the RETURN, causes the routine to:
1.

Display the sum of frames 6-10 in position 1.

Display the sum of frames 11-15 in position 2.

Display the sum of frames 16-20 in position 3.

Display the sum of frames 21-25 in position 4.

Th'e FRAME ALGEBRA message is unchanged by this operation.

5.14.2

Frame Arithmetic

The Frame Arithmetic command (FA) provides two distinct functions
dynamic studies:

Sequential adding, subtracting, multiplying, or merging.

Selecting and displaying of particular frames.

for

Command format:
FA (exp) C§)
where (exp) represents the combination of arithmetic operators and
their operands, which are the frame numbers of the frames to be
manipulated. The operators are +, -, *, and!
(for merge which is
described below).
For example, if you type
FA 7-4+32*5C§)
on the terminal, the following processes take place:

Frame 4 is subtracted from frame 7.

The result is added to frame

The sum is then multiplied by frame 5.

5-35

32~

GENERAL DATA ANALYSIS COMMANDS

NOTE
The operations are strictly sequential
and no arithmetic hierarchy is observed.
If an operator (i.e., +,
,
*, or 1)
precedes the first frame number (e.g.,
+7, -4), the current core-resident data
is used as the first operand.
For
example, if you type FA +5-12,
frame 5
is added to the current.core-resident
data and then frame 12 is subtracted
from this data.
consequently, if you type the following command on the terminal, frame
13 is displayed.
FA 13~
In the merge operation, ~~cih cell of the resultant matrix is equal to
the larger cell c6unt of the two matrices being merged. The 1 is the
merge operator.
For example, the following command merges frame 1 and frame 2.
FA 112 ~
NOTE
To combine frames in a static study or
from different studies, or to combine
128 x 128 matrices, the save areas must
be used (see Section 5.17).

5.14.3

Save Area Arithmetic

Similar to the Frame Arithmetic command,
command (SA) does the following:

the

Save

Area

Sequential adding, subtracting, multiplying, and
save areas.

Selecting and displaying a particular save area.

Arithmetic
merging

Command format:
SA

(exp)~

where (exp) is an operation for addition, subtraction, multiplication
or merging of save areas, or a designated save ar~a by itself.

5-36

•

GENERAL DATA ANALYSIS COMMANDS
For example,
SA 3+2-7~
causes the following processes to occur:
t

The contents of save area 3 and save area 2 are added.

The contents of save area 7 are subtracted from the sum.

NOTE
Save area 0 cannot be used in this
command.
Save
area operations are
strictly sequential and no arithmetic
hierarchy is observed. If an operator
(+, -, 1, or *) precedes first save area
number
(e.g., -2, +3), the current
core-resident
data
is
used.
For
example,
if you type SA -7+2, save area
7 is subtracted
from
the
current
core-resident data and then save area 2
is added to this data.
Whenever you use the SA command, the mode

/~ode of the core-resident data.

operation

becomes

For example, the following command adds the contents of save
and 2.
SA

areas

the
3

3+2~

The mode of operation is now save area mode. To exit save area mode,
you have to type the following command to be able to perform other
GAMMA-II commands.
RS O~
The following command merges the
core-resident image.

contents

save

area

the

were

command

SA !2~
This command does not leave you in save area mode unless you
save area mode to begin with.
NOTE
To get out of save area mode, type RSO.
If you type the following command, save area 5 is displayed.
SA 5~
After performing save area arithmetic, use the
return to the original frame.
RS

5-37

following

~GENERAL

5.15

DATA ANALYSIS COMMANDS

FRAME DIVISION COMMANDS
;

The frame division is fixed point, which imposes limitations on the
results.
unlike other frame algebra commands where the binary point
is to the right of the matrix cell
(integer number), the division
commands move the point to the middle of the cell. For byte-matrices,
each cell has four bits to the left and four bits to the right of the
binary point;
and the values of each cell range from 1/16 to
15 15/16. For word-matrices, each cell has eight bits to the left and
eight bits to the right of the binary point:
and the values of each
cell range from 1/256 to 255 255/256.

5.15.1

Frame Divide High

The Frame Divide High command
(FOB)
divides one frame by
specified frame, and division by zero is treated as overflow.

another

Command format:
FDH n/m~
where:
f

r~presents

represents the divisor frame.

the dividend frame.

Frame n is divided by frame m.
If any cell of frame m is zero (which
would cause an attempted division by zero)
the quotient cell is
assigned a maximum value. That is, division by zero (except 0/0,
which yields zero)
is treated as a case of overflow (i.e., 15 for
bytes or 255 for words divided by 0).
You can omit the argument n from
core-resident frame by frame m.

the

FDH 1m(§)
For example,
FOB 7/32G!)
FOB /14C§)

5-38

command,

which

divides

the

GENERAL DATA ANALYSIS COMMANDS

5.15.1!

Frame Divide Low

The" Frame Divide Low command (FDL) divides one frame by another
specified frame, and division by zero is treated as underflow.
Command format:
FDL n/mGD
where:
n

represents the dividend frame.

represents the divisor frame.

Frame n is divided by frame m. Divisi~n"by zero is treated as a case
of underflow (i.e., 1 divided by any number greater than 16 for bytes,
or 256 for words). If this occurs, the quotient cell count will be
·zero.
The argument n may also be omitted from the command, which
the division of the core-resident frame by frame m.

represents

FDL /m~
For example,
FDL 5/4GD
FDL /9~

DH
5.15.3

Save Area Divide High

The Save Area Divide High command (SDH) divides one save area by
another specified save area. Division by zero on the contents of the
save area is treated as overflow.
Command format:
SDH n/mG!!)
where:
n

represents the dividend save area

represents the divisor save area.

5-39

GENERAL DATA ANALYSIS COMMANDS
Save area n is divided by save area m. Only save areas 1 through 9
can be specified by nand m.
Save area 0 cannot be used. The
argument n may also be omitted from the command, which represents the
division of the core-resident data by save area m.
SDH /mC§!)

5.15.4

Save Area Divide Low

The Save Area Divide Low command (SDL) divides one save area by
another specified save area. Division by zero on the contents of the
save area is treated as underflow. If this occurs, the quotients are
zero.
Command format:
SOL n/mGID
where:
~.

represents the dividend save area.

represents the divisor save area.

Save area n is divided by save area m. Only save areas 1
can be specified by m and n. Save area 0 cannot be used.

through

More meaningful images will result if the matrix in save area m is
first subjected to the commands, CA-b and CAb, where b is the number
of counts that correspond to the background. This procedure ensures a
more uniform background level and avoids division by zero.

5.16

NONLINEAR IMAGES

The default algorithm for computing the number of counts/intensity
the linear formula:

(Max counts - Min counts)/15 = #counts/intensity level
This formula does not have to be linear.
Using frame algebra, you can obtain nonlinear images for the purpose
of increasing the 'density of display levels in certain areas, while
reducing them in other parts of the display. A complete discussion of
the process is found in the followi~g sections.

5-40

GENERAL DATA ANALYSIS COMMANDS
5.16.1

Hyperbolic Images

you can obtain hyperbolic nonlinear images by using the frame division
or save area division commands. The image is shown as a rectangular
hyperbolic display;
that is~ the asymptotes are perpendicular, and
parallel to the count and intensity axes. The aim of a non-linear
display is to bring out areas of interest by increasing the density of
display levels in those areas while reducing the density in other
areas.
For hyperbolic images, the smaller the semi-axes of the curve, the
greater the nonlinearity. Two images are discussed in these sections.,
other imag€s can be obtained with algebr~ic operations on the frame
data.
In the discussion, byte-matrix counts are given.
1.

Frame divided by its complement:
This is a positive image in which the density of display
increases in high-count regions. The equation for
this image is

~evels

c· = 16C/(256-C)

[byte-matrix]

where C' is a cell of the nonlinear matrix, and C is the
corresponding cell of the original matrix. The image is
obtained by

SM j
NI
8M k

SOH j/k

(Save the matrix in save area j)
(Complement the image.
Use DCA
necessary)
(Save the negative image)
(Divide frame by complement)

Cells with counts below 16 and above 240 will underflow and
overflow, respectively.
If there are cells of interest with
counts above 240, subtract 16 from the frame (or multiply by
0.94) before division.
2.

Complement divided by frame:
This is a negative image in which the density of display
levels increases in low-count areas. Cells with counts below
16 or above 240 will overflow and underflow,
respectively.
In this case adding 16 or multiplying by 0.94 will bring out
cells below 16. The equation is:
C' = l6(256-C)/C

5.16.2

[byte-matrix]

A Multiplicative Nonlinear Image

Another commonly used means of obtaining a nonlinear image is
multiplying a frame by itself. This yields a matrix of the squares of
the cell counts, with the density of levels· increasing in high-count
regions.

5-41

GENERAL DATA ANALYSIS COMMANDS
5.17

SAVE AREA COMMANDS

The Save Matrix, Save Dynamic curves, Read Save Area, Read Regions of
Interest, and Delete Save Area commands are known as save area
commands. These commands provide direct access to ten (O-9) permanent
save areas and 55
(10-64)
optional save areas. The commands are
outlined in Sections 5~17.1 through 5.17.5. Save area 0 is a special
area used by the data analysis program. You can only read from save
area 0, not store data in it.
Save areas are essential because GAMMA-II has only one core-resident
frame at a time. Consequently, the results of an analysis could be
lost every time you select a new frame. To prevent this loss, you can
save core-resident data modified by analysis for future use by storing
the frame in one of these save areas.

M
5.17.1

Save Matrix

The Save Matrix command (SM) stores the core-resident matrix, with all
identifying, thresholding, and other displayed information in a
particular save area.
Command format:
SM n~
where n represents a save area number. Save areas I through 64 can be
specified for matrices. The core-resident matrix with all identifying
information is stored in save area n. You cannot specifically store
information in save area O. When you use the save matrix command, all
of the previous contents of save area n are lost, and the display
remains unchanged.

5.17.2

Save Dynamic Curves

The Save Dynamic Curves command
(SO)
stores the most recently
calculated set of dynamic curves, derived from regions of interest, in
a par~icular save area.
Command format:
SD

where n represents a specified save area number. Only save areaS 1
through 9 may be specified and used for dynamic curves. The previous
contents of save area n are lost and the display is unchanged.
The
use of this command is described in greater detail in Chapter 6.

5-42

GENERAL DATA ANALYSIS COMMANDS

5.17.3

Read Save Area

The Read Save Area command (RS) displays the contents of
save area.

specified,

Command format:
RS n~
where n represents a specified save area number.
The system stores
the previous display frame in save area O. The legend SAVE AREA n
appears in the upper right corner of the screen.
The execution of
this command depends o~ th~ contents of the save area accessed:

If the contents are a simple matrix, the matrix and all
associated information (identification, thresholding data,
etc.) are displayed.
You can perform thresholding and
constant arithmetic on the matrix. To restore the original
display, type:
RS

oGED

The previous frame is displayed, and the legend "SAVE AREA nn
disappears.
2.

If the contents of the save area are a matrix with regions of
interest, the program automatically places itself in the
region of interest mode, with the cursor displayed (see
Chapter 7).
To restore the original display, type CTRL/X,
then RS O.

If the contents are a set of dynamic curves calculated from
regions of interest, these curves are plotted in plot
average. Only the calculation and output commands (PN, PA,
PO, PU, PR, PP) are executable at this pOint (see Chapter 7).
Any other input brings the display matrix to the screen (save
area 0).

NOTE
If you want to read a save area that
contains region of interest information,
but do not want to automatically enter
the region of interest program, use the
save area arithmetic command. (i.e., SA
n) •

5-43

GENERAL DATA ANALYSIS COMMANDS
You cannot write int save area 0 since it is system protected.
However, you may read from save area o. Save area 0 is basically used
by the data analysis program to keep track of which patient's data you
are analyzing. Any time when the data matrix is going to be destroyed
(i.e., through frame algebra), the data analysis program writes out
patient information to save area 0 before destroying the image. save
area 0 is a temporary storage area used by the system.
Whenever the message SAVE AREA n appears in the upper right corner of
the display, type the following command to resume analysis of the
original study.
RS

5.17.4

Read Regions of Interest

The Read Regions of Interest command (RR) reads regions of interest
information from a specified save area and overlays this information
on the currently displayed frame.
Command format:
,~~ <

RR n~

where n represents a specified save area. Save area n must contain
matrix .data with region of interest information. The regions of
interest program is automatically called. This operation allows you
to define regions of interest in one study, save them, and then apply
them to another study. See Chapter 7.

5.17.5

Delete Save Area

The Delete Save Area command (DS) deletes any
areas (10-64).

the

optional

save

Command format:
OS nC§)

where n represents a specified save area. T~is command is useful for
eliminating data from the disk if it starts to approach capacity.
(Each save area is 33 blocks long.)
Save areas 0-9 cannot be deleted.

5-44

G~NERAL

DATA ANALYSIS COMMANDS

NOTE
A quick overview
commands follows:

the

save

area

The result of the SA n command is to
display the matrix stored in save area
n.
If ~ save area is read with the RS n
command, the matrix in save area n is
displayed with regions of interest, and
the system enters region of interest
mode. If a save area is read with the
RR n command, the regions of interest
stored in save area n are superimposed
on the core-resident matrix.

""5.18

SMOOTHING COMMAND
i

If statistical noise (i.e., low counts) results in an erratic image,
you can still extract meaningful information from the data. GAMMA-II
reduces noise by a smoothing process,
leaving a somewhat clearer
image. Successive smoothing applications may increase clarity, but at
the expense of data, as a certain amount of information is lost each
time.
In the smoothing process, each cell is averaged with its neighbors,
after weighting the cell counts. If a cell count is greatly different
from those around it, the smoothing process brings it more nearly in
line with its neighbors.
The Nine-Point Smooth command (S9) applies a weight of 4 to a cell and
a weight of I
to each neighboring corner cell and a weight of 2 to
each cell directly next to or below the weighted 4 cell.
Type the
following command on the terminal to perform a nine-point smooth.
S9G!!)
The value of the cell (which is represented by the diagram below)
in
the center is multiplied by 4 and each of the surrounding cells is
multiplied by 1 or 2. The values of all the cells are added together
and then divided by 16.
I 2 1
242

I 2 I
When the process is complete, the screen is erased, and the resulting
frame is displayed. The effect of smoothing is shown in Figures 5-14
and 5-15.

5-45

GENERAL DATA ANALYSIS COMMANDS

Figure 5-14

Figure 5-15
Nine-Point Smooth

,Or ig inal Matr ix

5.19

ISOCONTOUR COMMANDS

An isocontour is a line which separates those cells above a given
count level from those that are below the count level. Isocontours
make the visualization of some image features easier. For example, an
isocontour can be the outline of an organ or the outline of a
ventricular wall. These commands are discussed in Sections 5.19.1 and
5.19.2.

5.19.1

Isocontour Map

The Isocontour Map command (IC) converts a data matrix into an
isocontour matrix using 1 to 15 isocontour lines. The command format
is:
IC

f,s,n~

5-46

GENERAL DATA ANALYSIS COMMANDS
where:
f

is the first isocontour level, expressed as a percentage
total number of counts; i.e., a threshold level.

is a positive or negative threshold step size.

is the optional number of threshold
generated from the image (from 1 to 15).

levels

that

are

The isocontour map is generated at the following threshold levels:
f, f+s, f+2s, ••• ,f+14s
The threshold level cannot be greater than 100 or less than 0.
If s
and n are absent, only one level is generated. If n is absent, as
many levels as possible are generated up to a maximum of 15.
The
maximum number of levels that can be used in one image is 15.
The data matrix is converted into an isocontour matrix. A cell count
of 15 is used for the highest isocontour level. The cell counts of
the lower isocontours have evenly distributed lower cell counts.
Thus, each isocontour is represented by a different cell count and
intensity level.
Examples:
IC commands

Levels generated at

,<IC 50
IC 50, 10
IC 60, -10
IC 60, -20, 2

50
50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100
60, 50, 40, 30, 20, 10
60, 40

Figures 5-16 and 5-17 (color insert) show a normal image of the
and an isocontour image, respectively.

lungs

NOTE
Isocontours generally look better if you
have smoothed the data first.

5.19.2

Isocontoar Fill

The Isocontour Fill command (ICF) is similar to the isocontour
command except that it fills the interior of the isocontours.
command format is:
ICF f, s , n G!!)

5-47

map
The

GENERAL DATA ANALYSIS COMMANDS
where:
f

is the first isocontour level, expressed as a percentage
the threshold level.

is a positive or negative threshold step size.

is the number of levels that are generated from the image.

The threshold level cannot be greater than 100 or less than O.
If n
is absent, as many levels as possible are generated up to a maximum of
15. The maximum number of levels that can.be used in one image is 15.
Compare Figure 5-16, a normal image to Figure 5-18 (color insert).
A good example (Figure 5-19) of using both of the isocontour
(map and fill) is:

commands

Smooth the data twice by typing
S9iS9~

Blow-up the image for enhancement by typing
BU~

Define the isocontour map and save it in save area 1.

Type

IC 20,20~
SMl~
4.

Fill the isocontour and save it in save area 2 by typing
ICF

20,20~

SM2~
5~

Add the two save areas by typing
SAl+2~

Notice that Figure 5-19
filling isocontours.

5-48

combination

mapping

and

GENERAL DATA ANALYSIS COMMANDS

Figure 5-16
Lung-Normal Image

Figure 5-17
Isocontour Map

Figure 5-18
Isocontour Fill

Figure 5-19
Isocontour Map and Fill

5-49

GENERAL DATA ANALYSIS COMMANDS

Figure 5-20
Normal Liver/Spleen Display

Figure 5-21
Isometrics Display

Figure 5-22A
Data Rotated 90 Degrees

Figure 5-22B
Data Rotated 180 Degrees

5-50

GENERAL DATA ANALYSIS COMMANDS
5.20

ISOMETRIC COMMANDS

Isometrics are displayed in two different ways.
The color display
shows a modulated 3-dimensional to a 2-dimensional intensity image.
This image is defined as being volumetric.
That is the intensity
levels reside in the Z-axis.
The VTOI displays the 3-dimensional
image using a line representation of the intensity.
These commands
are described in Sections 5.20.1 and 5.20.2.

5.20.1

Isometrics Display

The Isometrics Display command (ID)
displays
pattern or a 3-dimensional mode. Type:

data

isometric

lOG!!)

This command causes all subsequent images to be presented in a
3-dimensional mode.
Figures 5-20 and 5-21
(color insert) show a
normal color image and its corresponding isometrics. Notice that the
highest points on the Z-axis represent the cells with the highest
~6unt
level.
Refer to Chapter 6 for an explanation of color
intensities.
On t~e VTOI only, the isometrics display command is
displaying four minified isometric displays.

also

useful

for

ID;DM~

Figure 5-23 shows the minified isometrics display. Also notice that
the figure is (from the VTOl) in a line isometric mode instead of
being volumetric as displayed on the color display.
NOTE
The color display does not have the
capability of displaying isometrics in
minified form.

5-51

GENERAL DATA ANALYSIS COMMANDS

Figure 5-23
Minified Isometrics

5.20.2

Display Normal

The Display Normal command (ON) converts an image from .anisometrics
display to the normal display mode and intensity. Type:
ON(§)
The size of the display frame
unaffected by the ON command.

5.21

(i.e.,

full

size

minified)

IMAGE ROTATION AND TRANSLATION COMMANDS

Data that is core resident can be rotated, and a rotation mode can be
set for subsequent data which is read from a patient file.
Rotation
enables you to manipulate any data that is~ead from a patient file.
This process is performed via the Rotate Data command procedure.

A matrix can also be translated vertically or horizontally -- that is,
moved up, down, left or right on the display. Translation is done
using the Translate Vertical or Translate Horizontal command.

5-52

GENERAL DATA ANALYSIS COMMANDS

5.2l.~

Rotate Data

Any pata read from a patient file automatically rotates clockwise
l80,i or 270 degrees when the Rotate Data command (RO) is issued.
command format is:

90,
The

RO nG!!)
where n = 1, 2, or 3.
The parameter n is the number of 90 degree clockwise rotations
desired. Thus, if you type the following command, all data is rotated
180 degrees (two 90 degree rotations).
RO 2~
Data that are read after you have issued the RO command are
automatically rotated when displayed.
The rotation (ROn) appears
below the threshold information to indicate that the data has been
-rotated. On the VTOl, the rotation (R n) appears to the right.
When you issue additional rotate commands, the rotation parameter
(n)
is added to the current parameter. That is, if you type R02 followed
by another R02, the display is in the upright position (0 degrees).
If you type R02 followed by R03, the display is in the 90 degree
posit,ion.
Figure 5-22A (color insert) displays data that has been rotated 90
degrees and Figure 5-228 (color insert) displays data that has been
rotated 180 degrees. The following drawings, Figures 5-24A and 5-248
also show rotated data.
The rotate data command is especially useful for isometric displays or
for
patient
study data that is not acquired in the correct
orientation. For example, you could use the minified display command
to show each rotation as a minified image •

. 5-53

GENERAL DATA ANALYSIS COMMANDS

USER TYPES R02
(data rotates 160°)
DATA IN NORMAL POSITION (0°)
0°

270.+~.

Data is now in 270° position

USER TYPES R03
(data rotates 270°)
USER TYPES ROI
(data rotates gaO)

Data is now In 180° position

Figure 5-24A
90 0 Rotation

5.21.2

Figure 5-24B
180 0 Rotation

Translate vertical

The Translate Vertical command (TV) has the two forms:
TVnG!!)
TV-n~

If you use TVn, the matrix is moved up on the display n rows. The top
n rows are lost.
If you use TV-n, the matrix is moved down on the
display n rows. The bottom n rows are lost.
The TV command sets a prevailing mode.
Once you have typed the
command, the system will display all subsequent frames similarly until
you issue a BE command or analyze a'new study.
Figure 5-25A shows a full matrix.
a TV20 command has been given.

Figure 5-25B shows the matrix after

5-54

GENERAL DATA ANALYSIS COMMANDS
5.21.3

Translate
Horizontal
i

The Translate Horizontal command (TH) has the two forms:
THn~
TH-n~

If you use THn, the matrix is moved right on the display n rows.
The
rightmost n rows are lost. If you use TH-n, the matrix is moved left
on the display n rows. The leftmost n rows are lost.
Like the TV command, the TH command sets a prevailing mode. Once you
have typed the TH command, all subsequent frames are displayed
similarly until you issue a BE command or analyze a new study.
Figure 5-25C shows a matrix after a TH-20 command has been given.
NOTE
Both the Rotate (RO) and
Translate
(TV,TH) commands set prevailing modes.
If both are in effect, rotation is
always done prior to translation.

5-55

GENERAL DATA ANALYSIS COMMANDS

Figure 5-25A
Size Matrix

Figure 5-25B
TV20

Fu~l

Figure 5-25C
TH-20

5-56

GENERAL DATA ANALYSIS COMMANDS

NOTE
The prevailing modes set by the Rotate
(RO)
and Tr1anslate (TV,TH) commands
affect only the patient files and not
the save areas.

5.22

COMMENT EDITOR COMMANDS

At any time during the examination of a study, you may edit or add to
the comments associated with the study. The comment editor is a small
set of operations obtained by issuing the Call Comment Editor command.

5.22.1

Call Comment Editor

The Call Comment Editor command (CO) stores the current display in
save area O.
The screen is erased and the comments associated with
study are displayed. Type:
CO~

The following request appears beneath the text.
EDIT COMMAND
If there are no comments, the request appears alone.
Each displayed
line is numbered for reference.
The numbers are not part of the
commentary. An example is shown in Figure 5-26.

5-57

GENERAL DATA ANALYSIS COMMANDS

Figure 5-26
Comment Text
When the EDIT COMMAND message
following editing commands.

nCm)

D@)

appears,

you

may

use

any

the

Append

Comments are added to the end of
the displayed text. An asterisk is
displayed to identify the beginning
of the new text. You can enter the
desired commentary.
The
entire
block of text may not exceed ten
lines of up to 49 characters "each.
Terminate the text by typing a null
line, that is, two RETURNS in a
row.

Replace
line n

An asterisk is displayed and you
must enter one
line
of
text
(maximum 49 characters), terminated
by a RETURN.
The new line will
replace line n.

Display Edited
Text

The screen is erased, and the newly
edited comments
are
displaye~.
Further editing is possible. This
is generally used to clean up the
display
and
verify the edited
comments.

Edit and
Return

When you type a RETURN as an EDIT
COMMAND response, the edited text
is written into the comment block
of the study on the disk.
The
previously saved frame reappears.

5-58

GENERAL DATA ANALYSIS COMMANDS
pG!)

The contents of the data that are
being edited are redisplayed on the
screen and printed on the console
terminal.

CTRL/X

Direct Return

The edited comments are not written'
into the file.
Control returns
.immediately to the
last
frame
displayed.
The original comments
are unaffected.

5.23

KEYBOARD ECHO-PRINT COMMANDS

Normally, keyboard input does not appear on the terminal's printer
when it is typed, though most entries are displayed on the screen. To
obtain a printer echo of all typed input, use the commands in Sections
5.23.1 and 5.23.2.

c
"...5 '.23.1
The

Echo Keyboard Input

Echo

char~cters

Keyboard Characters command (EC)
on the terminal printer. Type:

echoes

all

keyboard

EC~

The echo mode remains in effect until the NC command is given.
of interest commands (Chapter 7) are never echoed.

5.23.2

Region

No Echo

The No Echo command (NC) does not print keyboard input on the terminal
printer. Type:
NCG!!)

5-59

GENERAL DATA ANALYSIS COMMANDS

5.23.3

Text
i

At any time, during data analysis, a line of text may be displayed on
the screen to provide useful comments about the data. The command to
display text is:
TE text~
All characters up to the carriage return are displayed on the screen
in the command line. The text is automatically stored with the matrix
if you then store the matrix in a save area.
If you recall the matrix
by reading the save area, the text is displayed once again.

5.24

DATA ANALYSIS MACRO COMMANDS

A data analysis macro is a sequence of predefined data analysis
commands.
These sequences can be entered once into a macro file and
can then be executed (at a later time)
with a simple Macro Run
command.
For example, you may find that whenever regions of interest
is used, certain data manipulations prior to calling regions of
interest occur;
that is, adding frames, smoothing, thresholding. You
can predefine these set-up commands by using a macro, and from then
on, simply call the macro and automatically execute the commands.
The macro facility of the data analysis program also allows you to
create, edit, execute, save, or retrieve macro files.
A macro
consists of I to 10 command lines, each command line containing up to
49 characters.
The data analysis program has a resident macro buffer for the macro
currently in use. You can save the macro buffer on the system device
and load it from the system device by name. The same editor that is
used to edit the patient comment block is used to edit the macro
buffer.
The general format of a macro command is:
Mz

filename~

where z is a mnemonic for the specified command (e.g., MS for macro
save or MR for macro run). The filename is the name of the file on
the system device that contains the macro. A filename must consist of
I to 6 alphanumeric characters (a combination of A-Z and 0-9) •
Sections 5.24.1 through 5.24.12 explain how th~ macro commands work.
Section 5.24.13 will give a complete example of how to create and run
a macro.

5-60

'GENERAL DATA ANALYSIS COM~;~NDS

5.24.1

Macro Create

the
macro
buffer
and
The Macro Create command (MC) clears
automatically calls and appends to the macro editor. The command
format to create a new macro is:
MC filename@)
The commands to create a file in the macro editor are the same for the
comment editor. At this point you are ready to type in your macro.
replaces the current macro file name.
If filename is
absent, the current macro file name is cleared (replaced with nulls).
That is, the current macro file name is undefined. You should enter a
macro file name during macro create, but it is not necessary.

~hefilename

If you want to save your macro, a MS, macro save command should follow
the macro create.

E
5.24.2

Macro Edit

The command used to call the macro editor is:
ME

filename~

The filename is the name of the file to be edited. If the filename is
absent, the current contents of the core-resident macro buffer are
edited. The same editor is used to edit both the macro buffer and the
patient
study comment block.
During macro buffer editing the
following heading appears at the top of the screen.
MACRO filename
Take special note that this macro editor command edits only the
contents of the macro buffer and not the macro file on the system
device.

5-61

GENERAL DATA ANALYSIS COMMANDS
When the EDIT COMMAND message
following editing commands.

appears,

you

may

use

any

the

Append

Macro lines are added to the end of
the displayed text. An asterisk is
displayed to identify the beginning
of the new text. You can enter the
desired macro commands. The entire
block of text may not exceed ten
lines of up to 49 characters each.
Terminate the text by typing a null
line, that is, two RETURNs in a
row.

R nC§)

Replace
line n

An asterisk is displayed and you
must enter one
line
of
text
(maximum 49 characters), terminated
by a RETURN.
The new line will
replace line n.

DC§)

Display Edited
Text

The screen is erased, and the newly
edited macro is displayed.
Further
editing
is
possible.
Tnis is
generally used to clean up the
display
and
verify the edited
macro.

C§)

Edit and
Return

type a RETURN as an
When you
the edited
EDIT COMMAND response,
text is written into the macro
buffer of the study on the disk.
saved
previously
frame
The
reappears.

pC§)

The contents of the data that are
being edited are redisplayed on the
streen and printed on the console
terminal.

CTRL/X

Direct Return

The edited macro is not written
into the file.
Control returns
last
frame
immediately to the
displayed.
The original macro is
unaffected.
CAUTION

During the macro buffer editing, the
macro file on the system device is not
updated. Only the contents of the macro
buffer are modified. TO save the edited
macro use the macro save command, MS
(see Section 5.24.5).

5-62

GENERAL DATA ANALYSIS COMMANDS

5.24.~·

Macro Load

The Macro Load command (ML) loads the macro buffer with the contents
of a macro file on the system device. The command format is:
ML filename~
The filename MUST be specified. The previous contents of the macro
buffer are lost and the specified filename becomes the current macro
file name~ This command does not execute the macro,
but just loads
the buffer •. To execute the macro, use the macro run command.

R
5.24.4

Macro Run

The Macro Run command (MR) executes a macro.
MR

The command format is:

filename,n~

where n is the line number (1-10) at which execution is to begin.
Filename is the name of the macro file on the system device. This
command loads the macro buffer with the contents of the named macro
file and begins execution at line n.
If filename is omitted, the
contents of the current macro buffer are executed.
If n is omitted,
execution begins at line 1.
The specified filename becomes the
current macro file name.
Each command in the macro buffer
is
automatically executed.
Execution of a macro can be stopped in four ways:
1.

The system executes the macro exit (MX)
macro.

command

The system reaches the end of a macro
macro) •

You type a DELETE on the console terminal.

The system detects an error during. execution.

buffer

within

the

(finishes

the

If you type a DELETE to stop execution, execution is not stopped until
the command being executed is finished. Thus, execution may stop
immediately, or in the case of some commands,
it may take a few
seconds.

5-63

GENERAL DATA ANALYSIS COMMANDS
The ~y~tem suspends execution of a macro if it executes a command
requlrlng operator response (i.e., RI, IR, SH, or SV). When the
operator has made the required responses and then types CTRL/X, the
system resumes execution of the macro from the point at which it was
suspended.
The MR command is optional if the first two letters of the ma~ro name
are not a legal GAMMA-ll command. If you type a command that is not a
GAMMA-ll command, GAMMA-ll assumes that it is a macro name and
attempts to execute that macro.
For example, if you have a macro called HEART and you type in
HEARTG!!)
it will be treated as if you had typed
MR ~EART G!!)
However, if you type
SKIP(§)
SKIP will be treated as the SK command, not as
this case, you must type

the

macro

SKIP.

MR SKIPG!!)
~to

execute the macro.

If you have made a typographical error, and the letters you typed are
neither a command nor a macro name, the system issues an error
message.

5.24.5

Macro Save

The Macro Save command (MS) saves the current contents of the
buffer as a file on the system device. The command format is:

macro

MS filename G!!)
The filename must be unique (i.e., a file of that name must not
already exist on the system device). If the filename is not unique,
the system returns an error message, and you must change the filename.
If you do not specify the filename, the current macro name is used,
and this macro filename need not be unique.
If the current macro in the buffer does not
type:

have

MS filenameG!!)
The program does not prompt you to type a filename.

5-64

name,

you

must

GENERAL DATA ANALYSIS COMMANDS
If the macro in the buffer already has a name, and you
this version under the same name, type:

want

save

MS~

You will get an error message if you try to type the same_ filename as
the' macro currently in the buffer. You can type a different filenalue
to create a new macro.

D
5.24.6

Macro Delete

The Macio Delete command (MD) deletes a macro
device. The command format is:
MD

file

from

the

system

filename~

The filename MUST be specified.
When you issue the Macro Delete
command, neither the contents of the current macro buffer nor the
current macro filename is affected.

M
5.24.7

Macro Exit

The Macro Exit commqnd (MX) stops execution of the macro.
format is:

The command

MXG!D
Execution of the macro exit command immediately returns control to the
console terminal.

5.24.8

The Comment Line

You can insert comment lines or operator instructions in a macro.
These comments are printed on the console terminal when the macro is
executed. The command format is:
//textGED
When the command is executed all text following the slashes (II) up to
and including the RETURN is printed on the console terminal.
5-65

GENERAL DATA ANALYSIS COMMANDS
For example,

LTIOiUT80iS9G!!)
//DEFINE ROIlS OVER LEFT AND RIGHT
//PLOT OVERLAID DYNAMIC CURVES~
IRCED
SD5(ili)

HEMISPHERES~

The above example sets the lower and upper thresholds,
smooths the
image,
prints the text on the console and calls the irregular regions
of interest routine.
It also suspends operation of the macro.
Upon
returning from the irregular
regions' of interest routihe when the
operator types CTRL/X, the macro resumes operation and the curves are
stored in save area 5.

5.24.9

Execute Line

The Execute Line command (EL) executes one line of the
The command format is:

macro

buffer.

EL n~
where n is a line number contained in the macro
omitted, the current command line is re-executed.

buffer.

5~24.tO

Listing Macro Files

The actual RT-II file name of a macro is:
filename.GMC
file
Thus,
by using the DIRECTORY monitor command
(with
the
specification *.GMC)
you can obtain a directory listing of all
GAMMA-II macro files.
To obtain this list of all the macro files,
type the following monitor command:
DIR

*.GMC~

Remember that a monitor command is not a GAMMA-II command.
Since the macro is an ASCII file, the contents of
listed by the monitor command TYPE.
For example,
TYPE

macro

can

PLAY.GMC~

lists the contents of the macro file, PLAY, on the console terminal.

5-66

GENERAL DATA ANALYSIS COMMANDS

D
5.24.11

The Repeat-line Command

To repeat a whole line of GAMMA-II commands any number of times, type
the number of times as the first command in the line followed by a
colon. For example,
48:S9;PBSiSK~

will execute the line

S9iPBSiS K
The gen~rai form of the repeat-line command is:

48 times.

n: line of

commands~

As the command line is being repeated, the message
REPEAT

is displayed. The m is the number of times that the command line
been executed.

5.24.12

has

The Conditional Command

When the command line processor detects an error in a command line,
command execution stops.
Occasionally, you may expect an error
condition and would rather that execution not stop. For example, upon
reaching the end of a study with a skip command, you may wish to
continue processing the command line rather than stopping execution.
an
TO denote this expected error condition to GAMMA-II, type
before the command to be tested for an error.
exclamation point (1)
For example:
1SK 10~

This command will skip 10 frames if it is ~ossible.
If it is not
possible to skip 10 frames, no error message is generated. Instead,
control passes to the next command line of a macro.
The exclamation
point immediately precedes the command to be checked.

5-67

GENERAL DATA ANALYSIS COMMANDS
For example, suppose you have the following macro:
(I)
(2)
(3)

PBI GSA,O,48,1 (Create a playback buffer with 48 frames)
48: PBSjlSK
(fill the playback buffer)
PB GSA
(playback the buffer)

Line (1) initializes a playback buffer named GSA with a 48 frame
capacity.
If the study has 48 frames or more, then there is no
problem in line (2) which fills the buffer.
However,
if there are
less than 48 frames,. an error will occur which will stop the macro
without ever having executed line (3) unless you have the' 1'.
The form of the conditional is:
!command~

If the command can be executed, the system executes it.
If the
command cannot be executed, control will pass to the next command line
of a macro. If the command is not in a macro, command processing will
stop with no error indication given.

5.24.13

Inputting Commands While Running a Macro

To req6est input from the operator at the time a macro is run,. put a
question
mark
('?1)
as the first character of a macro line.
Explanatory text may follow the question mark.
For example,
the
following macro command:
?SET THE THRESHOLD

LEVELS~

will display the text (SET THE THRESHOLD LEVELS), then will display:
COMMAND:
The macro processor then waits for the operator to type in one line of
commands, executes that command line, and finally continues executing
the macro. The text following the question mark is displayed but
ignored by the system.
A question mark appearing anywhere but the
first position of a macro command line is considered an error.

5.24.14

A Macro Example

Suppose that you usually want to play back your in-core gatesynchronized studies in movie mode.
If you know that you will
normally acquire 48 frames, you can write a ~acro called GSA which
will do all of the following:
1.

Initialize the playback buffer.

Fill the buffer.

Play back the buffer in movie mode.

5-68

GENERAL DATA ANALYSIS COMMANDS
The stePr involved in writing and saving this macro are listed below:
1.

Type MC GSA~

The GAMMA-II will respond with an asterisk (*).
type in your macro as follows:

to create this macro.
Now you

can

*PBI GSA,O,48,1~
*48:PBS;!SK~

*PB GSA(§)

*G!D
3.

A RETURN will get you out of typing a
will respond with:

macro.

The

GAMMA-II

EDIT COMMAND
Here you can use any of the editor commands listed in Section
5.24.2.
A RETURN will get you out of the editor and back
into the study.

Once you are back in the study, to save the macro type:
MSG!)

Now,
to run the macro at any
gate-synchronized studies, type:

time,

any

your

MR GSAG!!)
The playback buffer will
filled, and played back.

5.25

automatically

initialized,

LANGUAGE EXECUTION COMMANDS

Three commands (BA, RU, and FO) run user-written BASIC, FORTRAN and
FOCAL programs.
These commands run directly from the GAMMA-II data
analysis program without the user having to exit from GAMMA-II.
No
typing of RT-II commands is necessary.
The form of the command is:
XX device:filename.extC§)
where XX is:
BA
RU
FO

for BASIC
for FORTRAN
for FOCAL

and device:filename.ext is the standard.RT-II file description.

5-69

GENERAL DATA ANALYSIS COMMANDS

5.25.1

BASIC

The BASIC command runs a user-written BASIC program from the
data analysis program. The command format is:

GAMMA-II

BA device:filename.ext~
If the BASIC program is on the system disk, you need to specify only
the name of the program. For example, to run a BASIC program called
QPQS.BAS, type:
SA QPQS~
If the program is on a disk other than the system disk
(or another
device), the device descriptor must precede the program name. For
example, if the QPQS.BAS program resides on disk unit 1, type:
BA RKI:QPQS~
lfthe program name is not specified, the BASIC interpreter prints an
error message and remains in the immediate mode. For more information
pertaining to the BASIC language, please refer to the BASIC/RT-Il
Language Reference Manual.

5.25.2

FORTRAN

The FORTRAN command runs a user-written FORTRAN program or any RT-ll
.SAV file from the GAMMA-II data analysis program. The command format
is:
RU device:filename.ext~
If the FORTRAN program is on the system disk, you need specify only
the name of the program. For example, to run a FORTRAN program called
PAVIA.SAV, type:
RU PAVIA(~)
If the program is on another device instead of the system disk, the
device descriptor must precede the program name. For example, if the
PAVIA.SAV program resides on disk unit 1, type:
RU

RKI:PAVIA~
I

For more information pertaining to the FORTRAN language, please
to the pOP-II FORTRAN Language Reference Manual.

5-70

refer

GENERAL DATA ANALYSIS COMMANDS

5.25.3

FOCAL

The FOCAL command runs a user-written FOCAL program from the
data analysis program. The command format is:

GAMMA-II

FO device:filename.ext~
If the FOCAL program is on the system disk, you need specify only the
name of. the program.
For example, to run a FOCAL program called
CAREY.FCL, type:
FO CAREY~
If the program is on another device instead of the system disk, the
device descriptor must precede the program name. For example, if the
CAREY.FCL program resides on disk unit 1, type:
FO RKl:CAREY~
,If the program name is not specified, the FOCAL interpreter remains in
the immediate mode.
For more information pertaining to the FOCAL
lang~~ge, please refer to the FOCAL-II user's Manual.

5.26

LIST MODE PROCESSING

TO analyze list-mode data, you must structure (frame) the data
collected in a list study in one of the five matrix configurations
described previously (see Section 4.1). You can organize the data
into a static or dynamic study. Frame rates other than those listed
in Sections 4.2.12 and 4.2.13 can be used when you reformat the list
study into a dynamic study. You can reframe the data at any time and
more than once (in many different ways). Finally, the framed data can
be stored as a normal static or dynamic patient study file.

5.26.1

List Study Framing

When you select a list study from the patient study index,
summary appears on the screen as in Figure 5-27.

5-71

the

study

GENERAL DATA ANALYSIS COMMANDS

Figure 5-27
List Study Summary
The collection parameters show the starting point and duration of the
collection run.
The P and C options operate as described in Section

5.1.1.
To begin the list framing procedure, press RETURN. The procedure is a
question and answer sequence similar to that for defining a study
plan. That is, the error-correcting methods for a list study and
those of a static or dynamic study, are the same (see Section 3.3.2).
A complete framing sequence is shown in Figure 5-28.

5-72

GENERAL DATA ANALYSIS COMMANDS

Figure 5-28
List Framing Sequence
The first four
lines of a list
immediately after you press RETURN.
TOT COUNTS:

framing

DISK BLOCKS:

sequence

are

displayed

TOT TIME:

The items in the line above are, respectively,
the total number of
counts collected, the number of disk blocks occupied by the list, and
the duration of the collection run. The next line requests a reply to
the type of study that is applicable.
FRAME STUDY AS

1) STATIC
2}DYNAMIC
3}GATED

(Refer to Section 5.27 for gated list mode processing.)
appears as:
SPECIFY START AND STOP TIMES IN SEC (OPTIONAL)
START=
STOP=

5-73

The next line

GENERAL DATA ANALYSIS COMMANDS
The starting and stopping times are optional, and you do not have to
frame the entire study. For example, if the duration of the study is
42 seconds, you can frame the data collected between 10 and 35 seconds
of the run. Either limit may be skipped by pressing RETURN for each
limit. If you press RETURN only for START and enter a number for
STOP, the system assumes zero for the STARTING time. If you press
RETURN only for STOP, the system assumes the maximum time in the study
(TOTAL TIME) for STOPPING time. The next request is:
SPECIFY FRAME RATE AS X FRAMES PER Y SEC
X=
Y=
This question is asked only if you have selected a dynamic study.
frame rate is subject to the following restrictions:

The

The fastest permitted rate is 100 frames/second .

. 2.

The rate must be an integral multiple of 10 milliseconds, the
interval
between
timing marks in the list.
Thus, 4
frames/sec (I every 250 msec) is acceptable, but 3 frames/sec
(1 every 333 1/3 msec) is not. If you select an inadmissible
rate, the program offers the nearest permitted alternative.
For example, if you specify 3 frames/sec, the program offers
100 frames every 33 seconds as an alternative.
You may
accept this by pressing RETURN, or pressing ESCape to enter a
new rate.

No more than 511 frames can be made from anyone study.

The next line displayed is:
TOTAL NUMBER OF FRAMES IS xxx
ONLY THE FIRST 511 WILL BE FRAMED
The first line gives the total number of frames (xxx) possible over
the specified period at the given rate. If this total is greater than
511, the second line is also displayed. The next line is displayed
and the possible matrix configurations are listed.
SPECIFY MATRIX SIZE
You should select the number of the desired matrix configuration.
128 x 128 matrix is available only for a static study.

The

You press ESCape to edit the framing parameters
proceed to the next step.

5-74

press

RETURN

GENERAL DATA ANALYSIS COMMANDS
5.26.2

Storage Options

When youihave accepted the framing parameters, the system scans the
list mode data. If you have chosen a dynamic study, the system sets
up a table of framing pointers and displays disk storage options on
the screen as follows:
IF YOU WISH DATA CAN OVERLAY LIST MODE DATA
FOR MATRIX TYPE 4 OR LESS
YOU HAVE SELECTED MATRIX TYPE 3
TYPE ALTMODE TO EDIT
RETURN TO DISPLAY DATA
TO SAVE FRAMED DATA
1) BY OVERLAYING LIST MODE DATA
2) BY CREATING A NEW STUDY
REPLY:
--The first statement of- the storage option is:
1) BY OVERLAYING LIST MODE DATA
If you wish to save framed data by overlaying the new study on top of
the list mode data, you should type 1. This procedure, like all
others that destroy data, requires verification.
The following
~essage is displayed:
OVERLAY CONFIRMATION
!FRAMED DATA WILL REPLACE LIST MODE DATA
TYPE "YES" TO INITIATE OVERLAY PROCEDURE
REPLY:
Type YES to confirm the procedure. The original list study data are
lost, and the framed -information, along with the administrative data,
comments, and index entry, replaces the original study.
CAUTION
Original data are lost entirely when
overlaying
occurs.
To
avoid this
problem transfer the list mode study to
another device (i.e., magtape or another
disk)
before framing.
If sufficient
disk space is not available, an error
message appears on the screen.

5-75

GENERAL DATA ANALYSIS COMMANDS

NOTE
If the overlay procedure wotild result in
the destruction of data that has not yet
been framed, the program will not offer
the
overlay option.
This situation
usually arises when the count rate is
low at the beginning of the study, and
it can be overcome by reframing with a
later starting time. The problem can be
anticipated and avoided by specifying a
delayed start during the acquisition
run.
The second statement of the storage option is:
2) BY CREATING A NEW STUDY
If ~his option is ieledted,the following message is displayed.
DISK UNIT:
Enter the disk unit number (0-7) where the new study is going to be
. saved.
Typing only a carriage return saves the study on disk unit o.
The system adds the study with its administrative data and comments to
the patient file,
and adds a new entry to the patient study index.
Then the system displays the first frame of the study. The program is
still; in list mode, as indicated by the "LM" note on the screen. To
access the saved study as a normal study, type CTRL/X and select the
study from the index.
However, if there is not enough room on the
.disk to save the framed study, the following error message appears:
NOT ENOUGH ROOM FOR FRAMED DATA ON UNIT N
At this point, you may press ESCape to edit, press carriage return
display data, or enter a new disk number.

R
5.26.3

Display Frame Command

Each frame of the structured study is identified by the note "LM" that
appears at the bottom of the screen. Otherwise, the display is as
usual, and the format~ed study is now a static or dynamic study.
All
display and analysis commands are permitted in list mode.
In
addition, the following command is available_whenever a list study is
being displayed:
FR~

Recall framing routine
The system recalls the framing sequence (see Section
5.26.1)
so that you can change the framing parameters
or save the framed data as a study. Typing FR RETURN
has
the
same effect as typing an Escape after
completing the framing sequence.
5-76

GENERAL DATA ANALYSIS COMMANDS
5.26.4

Framing Method

The system frames a 'static study and temporarily stores it on the
system disk. The system scans a dynamic -study and sets up a table of
timing pointers. The list data is then framed continuously (on the
fly) as it is transferred to c9re for display_ The framing is done at
a rat~ of approximately 30,000 counts per second,
so that for most
studies there should be no noticeable delay in the production of a
display frame.
The original scan, however, does require a detectable
amount of time, which could become tedious if you change the framing
parameters several times. The framing program saves time when you
change parameters by attempting to build a new pointer table from the
old one. This can be done if the old frame rate is mUltiple of the
new one.
For example, if you want to change the rate of a list study from 4
frames/sec to 2 frames/sec, the system builds a new table from every
other entry of the old one, removing the need for a complete rescan of
the list.

5.27

GATED-LIST-MODE PROCESSING

A gated-list-mode study differs from a regular list-mode study in
ways:
(triggers)

occur

only

two

Gate marks
study.

the

gated-list-mode

Time marks occur every -millisecond in the
study instead of every ten milliseconds
list-mode study.

-gated-l ist-mode
in the regular

A gated-list-mode study generates a representative cycle study similar
to the in-core gate-synchronized study. Advantages of the gated-listmode study not found in the in-core gate-synchronized study are:
1.

You can combine high temporal resolution
resolution.

You can perform complete arrhythmia rejection.

can
begin
You
(pretr igger ing) •

At the same time,
disadvantages:

"the

formatting
gated-list-mode

prior
study

high

spatial

the

trigger

has

the

following

with

RK05 disks can hold up to 1.2 million counts and
up to 7.2 million.

RK06

Formatting time extends from 2 to 15 minutes~ and
extreme cases.

longer

The initial study requires large amounts of disk space.

The maximum count rate for acquisition is 70,000 counts/sec.

5-77

disks
in

GENERAL DATA ANALYSIS COMMANDS
5.27.1

Gated-List-Mode Study Framing

A gated-list-mode study and a regular list-mode study have identical
starting routines.
The gated framing procedure begins at choice
3) GATED (see Section 5.26.1). Figure 5-29 shows a complete framing
sequence.
After you press RETURN, the program immediately displays the first few
lines of the gated list framing sequence.
The following line is the first line of the framing sequence.
TOT COUNTS:

DISK BLOCKS:

TOT TIME:

TOTAL COUNTS is the number of counts collected, DISK BLOCKS is the
number of occupied disk blocks, and TOTAL TIME is the duration of the
collection run.
The program then prints:
FRAME STUDY AS l)STATIC 2)DYNAMIC 3)GATED
After you type 3, the following line appears:
AVERAGE GATE INTERVAL IS xxx MILLISEC.
where xxx represents the number of milliseconds in
interval. Next, the program prints:

the

average

gate

SPECIFY START AND STOP TIME IN SEC (OPTIONAL)
START=
STOP=
The starting and stopping times are optional, and you need not frame
. the entire study. For example, in a study of 300 second duration, you
can frame the data collected between 10 and 200 seconds of the run.
You have the option to press RETURN each time you wish to omit the
starting limit or the stopping limit of the run.
If you press RETURN
for START and enter a number for STOP, the program will use zero as
the starting time. Similarly, if you enter a number for START and
press RETURN for STOP, the program will use the maximum time in the
study for stopping time.

5-78

GENERAL DATA ANALYSIS COMMANDS

Figure 5-29
A Gated List Mode Framing Sequence
The next two questions asked are:
FRAME DURATION (IN MILLISEC) IS
and
NUMBER OF FRAMES IS
You may answer both of these questions and the program will use both
of your answers;
or you may answer one of the questions and default
the response to the second.
If you choose to answer only one of' the
questions,
the program calculates the answer to the other using a.
complete cycle time.
Answering Only the Frame-Duration Question
Should you choose to answer only
the
frame-duration
question, the following sequence would appear:
FRAME DURATION (IN MILLISEC) IS
You should respond to this question with the duration of a
single frame in milliseconds. The program then calculates
the number of frames required in order to generate an entire
cycle by dividing the average cycle duration by the frame
duration. This is displayed next as:
xxx FRAMES REQUIRED FOR A COMPLETE CYCLE
The next question is:
NUMBER OF FRAMES IS
which you default by typing a RETURN.
If you default this
question,
the program uses the number of frames calculated
for a complete cycle. The maximum number of frames is 511.
5-79

GENERAL DATA ANALYSIS COMMANDS
Answering Only the Number-of-Frames Question
When the following question appears:
FRAME DURATION (IN MILLISEC) IS
you respond by typing a RETURN to default the answer.
If
you default this question, the following question appears:
NUMBER OF FRAMES IS
You must answer this question if you defaulted the first.
In this case, the frame duration is calculated by dividing
the average cycle time (over the last 30 seconds)
by your
response to the number of frames.
No matter how you answered the FRAME DURATION and NUMBER OF FRAMES
questions,. in all cases you are then asked:

PRETRIGGER TIME (IN MILLISEC) IS
Here you enter thepre~rigger time in milliseconds. This is the time
PRIOR
to
the
gate signal at which the first frame of the
representative cycle will start. You can enter this value in three
forms:
1.

a postive number -- which is the number of milliseconds prior
to the gate signal

a negative number -- which
after the gate signal

0 or RETURN -- which means to start at the gate signal

the

number

milliseconds

The program then asks for the matrix type as follows:
SPECIFY MATRIX SIZE
SIZE

MAX CELL DISK BLOCKS
255
nnn
2) 32 x 32
65535
nnn
3) 64 x 64
255
nnn
4) 64 x 64
65535
nnn

1) 32 x 32

REPLY:
You must enter 1, 2, 3, or 4 in the normal manner. The program then
asks that you verify your answers by typing a RETURN or that you edit
your answers by typing an ESCape.
When
you
complete
this
verification,
the program erases the screen and asks for the unit
number of the disks on which the framed data will be stored.
The
default is unit O.
If there is not enough room on this disk, the
following message appears:
NOT ENOUGH ROOM FOR FRAMED DATA ON DISK UNIT n

...
At this point you must either enter another disk unit number or type
an ESCape to edit the framing parameters (i.e., number of frames or
matrix type.)
The program then asks:
SAVED FRAMED DATA AS PATIENT STUDY?

5-80

(Y OR N)

GENERAL DATA ANALYSIS COMMANDS
If you respond with a Y, the framed data will be saved as a GAMMA-II
patient study; that is, it will always be available for analysis. Y
is the default response.
If you respond with N, the framed data will not be saved as a patient
study and will have to be! reformatted from the list-mode data in
subsequent analysis sessions. The program will normally delete the
framed data when you exit the data analysis program. However, if you
exit the data analysis program via a BA (BASIC), FO (FOCAL), or RU
(RUN F,ORTRAN) command and re-enter the data analysis program via tne
CA command, the program will not delete the framed data. If you exit
the data analysis program via a CTRL/X or enter data analysis by the
AD command, the framed data will be deleted.
The last question asked is:
TOLERANCE CHECK?

(Y OR N)

If you specify N or RETURN, the formatting procedure begins (see
section 5.27.2).
If you answer with a Y, a histogram showing the
distribution of the gate intervals (in milliseconds)
is displayed.
See Figure 5-30.

*
Fi9ur~

5-30

*
* *

Histogram of Gate Intervals

A vertical cursor is displayed at the point equal to 1/2 the maximum
of the gate intervals during acquisition. You can choose to make the
system reject arrhythmic gate intervals in this study by moving the
cursor with the commands R (right), L (left), and J (jump 10 spaces)
in order to specify the lower and upper bound of the allowable gate
intervals. Below the histogram is:
LOW BOUND nnn
where nnn is the current position (in milliseconds) of the cursor.
This nnn changes as you move the cursor. When you have positioned the
cursor for the lower bound, press RETURN. Then do the same for the
upper bound.
The cursor will move to an equivalent position to the
right of the maximum as its initial position: The program will not
allow the upper bound to be less than the lower bound.
If you move the cursor to the extreme left, the lower bound will be 0
milliseconds.
If you move it to the extreme right, the upper bound
will be 65,535 milliseconds.

5-81

GENERAL DATA ANALYSIS COMMANDS
5.27.2

Formatting the Data

Af.ter you have answered all the questions,
the program begins
formatting the data into a dynamic study. The formatting has two
steps.
First the program makes one complete pass through the data in
order to find the gate signals and genera.tes a table of pointers for
the formatting passes. The table of pointers corresponds to the start
of each cycle and is stored in an internal GAMMA-II file.
The
following message is displayed during this pass.

S~UDY BEING SCANNED FOR TIME MARKS, PLEASE WAIT
Then the program begins its actual formatting.
following message is displayed.

During this

time

the

mmm FRAMES OF nnn FORMATTED
xx MIN.
FOR THE REMAINDER
This message tells you how many frames have been generated and how
much more time is required for generating the rest. The time given i~
approximate. This message is updated at each pass through the data,
which is about every 30 to 60 seconds.
The actual time that is required to format the
following factors:

data

depends

the

The total counts being framed.
The formatting time' is
proportional to the number of counts.
For example, 2 million
counts will take twice as long as I million counts.

Disk type, RK05 or RK06.
In general, the RK06 is about twice
as fast as an RK05, but an RK06 holds up to six times the
data of an RK05.

Matrix type. A 32 x 32 matrix is about four times faster
than a 64 x 64 matrix.
There is only a minimal time
difference between byte and word mode.

Available free core space.
The framing program
makes
multiple passes through the data, framing as many frames as
will fit in core on each pass. Thus,
the more free space
available for buffers,
the fewer passes are required.
If
possible, foreground/background users should remove
the
FGAMMA program from the foreground when formatting gatedlist-mode studies.

The following table shows example framing times.
In the two cases
given, each study has 64 frames. The first case is a one million
count study on a RK05 disk, and the .second is a one million count
study on an RK06 disk.
32 x 32 NO FGAMMA
64 X 64 NO FGAMMA
32 X 32 WITH FGAMMA
64 X 64 WITH FGAMMA

1 M counts/RK05
2 MIN.
5 MIN.
5 MIN.
17 MIN.

1 M counts/RK06
I MIN.
2 MIN.
2 MIN.
8 MIN.

The times given in this example are approximate and for a GAMMA-II
system with 28K of core. Users with 16K of core should use the times
listed with FGAMMA.

5-82

GENERAL DATA ANALYSIS COMMANDS
Once framing of a gated-list-mode study is completei the study takes
the form of a gate-synchronized study, and all of the analysis and
display commands are applicable.

5.28

ERRORS

In general, the system rejects erroneous keyboard input.
It displays
the command line to the point of error and then displays a new COMMAND
reques~ beneath the preceding one.
If there is no more room on the
scre~n, the following message is displayed.
TYPE

FOR NEXT PAGE

When you type CTRL/N, the screen is erased, and the COMMAND message
appears.
As soon as you type in an acceptable input, the matrix
display is restored. The DI command is useful at this point to
restore the display without modifying the data.
If you detect an error before typing a RETURN, you
using the DELETE key or pressing CTRL/U.

5.29

can

erase

AUTOMATING DATA ACQUISITION AND ANALYSIS

The GAMMA-II system offers you three powerful tools for minimizing the
,,-efforts of entering initial information into the system and for
performing common analysis procedures. The tools are:
1.

predefined studies

Data analysis macros

Autoanalysis

predefined studies enable you to standardize and simplify the data
acquisition set up, while the data analysis macro feature enables you
to simplify data analysis procedures.
You can combine these two
features through autoanalysis, . enabling the acquisition program to
call the analysis program. The combination of these three features
enables you to semiautomate acquisition and analysis.

5-83

CHAPTER 6
ADDITIONAL ANALYSIS COMMANDS FOR THE COLOR DISPLAY

This chapter describes the color display and playback functions
provided by the data analysis program. The features described in this
chapter are for the color display only. None are available for the
VTOI storage scope. This chapter describes:

6.1

the color tables and their functions

the color table editor

interpolated displays

dual full size displays

dynamic playback routines

8 and 16 image displays

BLACK AND WHITE COMMANDS

The black and white commands allow you to switch from a color image to
a monochrome (green) image to a true black and white image.

B
6.1.1

From Color to Black and White

The command to switch from a color image to a monochrome display is:
BWG!!)
This command causes all subsequent displays to be presented in a
l6-level monochrome
(green) scale. To ob~ain a true black and white
display, press the CHAN B button on the color display monitor.
TO
return to the green display press the CHAN B button again.

6-1

ADDITIONAL ANALYSIS COMMANDS FOR THE COLOR DISPLAY

6.1.2

From Black and White to Color

The command to switch from a green image to a color display is:
CLG!)
If the display does not change to color, press the CHAN B button again
to obtain a color display.

-6.2

INTENSITY COMMANDS

The intensity commands display a color scale bar next to the
This bar enables you to identify the high and low count areas.

6.2.1

image.

Intensity Scale Bar

The Display Levels command (DL) causes all subsequent displays
presented with a color scale bar to the right of the image.
this command, type:

to be
To use

DL~

This command displays a color bar that shows the current 16 colors
used in the image.
The scale runs from bottom to top, where the
bottom color corresponds to the lowest number of cell counts, and the
top color corresponds to the highest number of cell counts. That is,
if dark red is at the top of the bar, then the greatest number of
counts occur in the dark red portion of the image. If the display
mode is monochrome, the 16 intensity levels are displayed in green or
gray.
In monochrome, the highest areas have the maximum counts and
the dark areas have the minimum counts.

6-2

ADDITIONAL ANALYSIS COMMANDS FOR THE COLOR DISPLAY

6.2.~
!

Removing the Intensity Scale Bar

To"r¢move the color scale bar from the display, type:
NL~

When this command is issued, the system omits the scale bar
subsequent images.

6.3

from

all

THE COLOR TABLE AND THE COLOR TABLE COMMANDS

The data analysis program supports up to 31 color tables.
Each color
table consists of 16 elements which correspond to 16 of the color
levels of the color display. Each intensity level of the display is
made up of a combination of the following three colors.
1.

Red

Green

Blue

Each of the above colors has an intensity ranging from 0 to 3, where 0
is off (absence of color) and 3 is maximum intensity. For example, an
intensity level of the display can be represented by the following
three numbers:

where I is the intensity of the red, 0 is the intensity of the green
and 2 is the intensity of the blue. Therefore, there are 64 possible
colors available for the display.
Each color table has an identifying number (from I to 31). The number
of the color table that is currently in use is called the current
color table number. The color tables are stored on the system disk
and are referenced by the color table number. GAMMA-II has supplied
you with two color tables:

A 16-color "rainbow" spectrum

An 8-color "hot body" spectrum

You may make up the other 29 color tables~
Although a 32nd color
table exists with a color table number of 0, it is reserved for system
use only. This 32nd table contains the current color table. When the
data analysis program is called, it defaults to color table zero, that
is, the last color table used.

6-3

ADDITIONAL
ANALYSIS COMMANDS FOR THE COLOR DISPLAY
lFive commands are available to
level. These commands are:

6.3.1

you

the

data

analysis

COMMAND:

Retrieve a color table from the system disk

Save the current color table on the system disk

Call the color table editor

Change a color level at the COMMAND level

Switch to and from monochrome (green) displays (discussed
Sections 6.1.1 and 6.1.2)

Retrieving a Color Table

The Retrieve a Color Table command
(CT)
to
defined color table from the system disk is:

retrieve

previoudly

CT nC§)
where n is the color table number (1-31). Color table n becomes the
current color table, which is used until another color table is
retrieved or until the current color table is modified.
The display
changes in respect to the newly retrieved color table.
If you do not
specify n, the system retrieves the last color table used.

6.3.2

Saving a Color Table

The Save Color Table command (ST) to save the current color
the system disk is:

table

ST nC§)
where n is the color table number
(1-31),
Once saved, a table can be retrieved
command.

which you must specify.
at any time with the CT n

You must use the ST command when you want t~ save a changed color
table from a displayed image; otherwise, the colors are not saved.

6-4

ADDITIONAL ANALYSIS COMMANDS FOR THE COLOR DISPLAY

6.3.~

Changing a Color Level

The ~hange Color Level command (CL) to change a
COMMAND level is:

color

level

the

CL n,rgbG£)
where n represents the color level (0-15) to be changed, and rgb is a
3-digit number representing the color of level n (made up of a
combination of the colors red, green, and blue).
Individually, the
digits r, g, and b can have only one of the four values (0-3).
The best way to change a color level is to first
intensity bar by typing the following command.

display

the

color

DLe§)
Next, count from the bottom up on the color bar to the level that
needs to be changed (the n parameter). For example, if the sixth
color up on the color bar is red (color level 5)
and you wish to
change it to blue, type the command:
CL 5,003 C!ED
This command replaces all of the red cells with the most intense (3)
blue color.
Notice that the 00 shows that the red and green colors
have been turned off.
To change the first color level to gray, type:
CL O,lll~
A good example of this command appears in Figure 6-2
(color insert).
Figure 6-1 (color insert) is a normal color image. The combination of
these three colors, each at levell, produces gray.

6.4

COLOR-TABLE EDITING COMMANDS

The color-table edi tor enables yo'u to modify the current
with commands to do the following:
lev~ls

Zero the color table (i.e., setting all

Change a color table element

Insert a new element into the color table

6-5

color
to off)

table

ADDITIONAL ANALYSIS COMMANDS FOR THE COLOR DISPLAY

I
6.4.1

Delete an element from the color table

Save a newly created color table on the disk

Print the color table on the terminal

Display a ramp of the colors

Color-Table Editor

The Edit Color Table command (ET) to call the color table editor is:
ET nG!!)
where n is the number of the color table that you want to modify. The
program retrieves color table n from the disk, and it becomes the
current color table.
If you do not specify n, the color table that is
currently displayed becomes the current color table.
To the right of the displayed image is a l6-level color bar. To allow
e~sier
identification of the color level numbers, color levels 3, 7,
11, and 15 are two times wider in the bar- than the other color levels.
To the right of each level is a color level number
(0-15)
and an
intensity number
(0-3)
for each of the red, green, and blue colors.
The following example shows a sample color table and lists the level
numbers with their corresponding intensities.
COLOR TABLE n
R G B
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8

7
6
5

4
3
2
1
0

3 3 3
2 3 3
3 3 2
3 3 1
2 2 0
3 2 0
3 2 1
3 1 0
3 '0 0
2 0 0
1 0 1
1 0 3
o0 3
o0 2
o0 1
o0 0

6-6

ADDITI9NAL ANALYSIS COMMANDS FOR THE COLOR DISPLAY
Notice that below the image is the message COLOR COMMAND (see Figure
6-3 in the color insert). This message accepts any of the following
color-table editor commands:

6.4.2

Zero all of the color table elements

Change an element value

Insert an element value

Delete a color level

Save a color table

Get a color table from the disk

Display a ramp of the current color table

Display the matrix image

Print the color table on the terminal

CTRL/X or ~

Exit

zeroing the Color Table

The command to set all color table elements to zero is:

zGD
It is strongly suggested that before attempting to zero a color table,
you save the current color table
(see Section 6.4.6). Since all
elements will have a value of zero, the image and the color bar
disappear.

6.4.3

Changin9 a Color Element

The command to change a single color element without affecting any
the other color elements is:

C n,rgbG!)
where n represents the color level (0-15), and rgb is a 3-digit number
representing the colors red, green, and blue. Individually, the
digits, r, g, and b can have only four values (0-3). Both the color
bar and the image will change to reflect the new value. The C command
is equivalent to the CL command at the COMMAND level.
See Section
6.3.3.
6-7

ADDITIONAL ANALYSIS COMMANDS FOR THE COLOR DISPLAY

6.4.4

Inserting a Color Element
I
The command to insert a new color element into the color table is:
I

n,rgb~

where n represents the color level (-15 to +15), and rgb is a 3-digit
number representing the colors red, green, and blue. Individually,
the digits, r, g, and b can have only four values (0-3).
If n is a positive number, the elements
move up one level.

above

the

inserted

element

For example, if n is 4, the old level 4 and all of the levels above 4
move up one level.
That is, old level 4 now becomes 5 (n+l), old
level 5 becomes 6 (n+2), and so forth.
Level 15 is lost, and all
levels below 4 are left unchanged.
If n is a negative number, the elements below the inserted element
move down one level. For example, if n is -4, the old level 4 and all
of the levels below 4 move down one level. That is, old level 4 now
becomes 3 (n-l), old level 3 becomes 2 (n-2), and so forth.
Level 0
is lost and all levels above 4 are left unchanged.

6.4.5

Deleting a Color Level

The command to delete a color level from the color table is:
D nC§)

where n represents one of the color levels (-15 to +15) •
The levels
above n move down or the levels below n move up, depending upon the
sign of n.
For example, if n is 7, level 7 is deleted and the levels above 7 move
That is, old level 8 (n+l) becomes 7 (n), old
down one position.
level 9 (n+2) becomes 8 (n+l), and so forth.
Level 15 assumes a color
value of zero.
If n is -7, the levels below level 7 move up one position.
That is,
old level 6 (n-l)
becomes 7 (n), old level 5 (n-2) becomes level 6
(n-l), and so forth. Level 0 assumes a color value of zero.

6-8

ADDITIqNAL ANALYSIS COMMANDS FOR THE COLOR DISPLAY

6.4.6

saving an Edited Color Table

The command to save an edited color table on the system disk is:
S n~

where n is the color table number (l~3l). The n must be specified
because the current color table number
is not affected by this
command. Do not forget to use this command BEFORE zeroing a color
table,
because the zeroed color table can never be retrieved again
unless it has been previously saved. See Section 6.4.2.

6.4.7

Getting a Color Table

The command to obtain a color table from the system disk is:
G n~

where n is the color table number
(1-31).
The display changes in
respect to the newly obtained color table. Thus, n now becomes the
current color table number.
If n is not specified, the last color,
table used will be the one obtained.
This command is equivalent to the CTn command
level.

6.4.8

the

command

table

printing a Color Table

The command to print the color table is:

The P command causes the color table number and the
current color table to be printed on the terminal.

6-9

contents

the

ADDITIONAL ANALYSIS COMMANDS FOR THE COLOR DISPLAY

6.4.9

Displaying a Ramp

To display a ramp of the colors in the current color table type:
RG!)

Should you choose to change a color while the ramp is
ramp will be updated and redisplayed.

displayed,

the

NOTE
If ¥ou ~ were in dual
display
mode
prevlous to displaying a ramp, the dual
display will be lost. Upon exiting the
ramp, you will have to retype:
DU~

to redisplay the dual di~play.

6.4.10

Displaying the Matrix

To display the core-resident matrix in the color table editor, type:

This command can also be used to exit from a ramp.

6.4.11

Exiting from the Color Table Editor

To exit from the color table editor, type either a RETURN or a CTRL/X.
Control returns to the COMMAND level and the edited color table
becomes the current color table.

6.5

THE INTERPOLATED DISPLAY

The color display has a 128 x 128 display matrix for displaying the
images.
To display a 64 x 64 image, the system maps each of the data
cells into four cells of this display matrix (i.e., each cell is
quadrupled) •
To display a 32 x 32 image, the system maps each data
cell into 16 display cells of the 128 x 128 display matrix.
This
6-10

ADDITIONAL ANALYSIS COMMANDS FOR THE COLOR DISPLAY
~.

duplication of data causes 64 x 64 and 32 x 32 images to have a boxed
appearance. That is, each cell looks like a box instead of a point.
You can obtain a more pleasing display by interpolating the data.
The commands to interpolate a display depend on the number of bit maps
in the VSVOI. One bit map contains 128 x 128 matrix points, which is
one full-size display on the VSVOI.

6.5.1

Interpolation Command

The command to interpolate the displayed data is:
ITG!)
This command interpolates all 32 x 32 matrices to 64 x 64 and all
64 x 64 matrices to 128 x 128. If the VSV01 has four bit maps, all
128 x 128 matrices are interpolated to 256 x 256.
If the VSVOI does
not have 4 bit maps, the system ignores the IT command for 128 x 128
matrices. It also causes all subsequent data to be interpolated.
Note that the actual core-resident data is not modified and that the
interpolation mode determines only the display format.
See Figure 6-4
~tcolor
insert)
for an interpolated display and compare it to Figure
6-1 (color insert), a normal color image.
!
The interpolation algorithm is a linear interpolation. For each real
data point, the system generates three interpolated points.

6.5.2

No Interpolation

The command to turn off interpolation is:
NTG!D
When you type
interpolated.

this

command,

none

6-11

the

subsequent

images

are

ADDITION~L

6.5.3

ANALYSIS COMMANDS FOR THE COLOR DISPLAY

Double Interpolation

The command to doubly interpolate the displayed data is:
IT2~

This command interpolates all 32 x 32 matrices to 128 x 128.
If the
VSVOI has four bit maps, 64 x 64 matrices are interpolated to
256 x 256.
If the VSVOI does not have 4 bit maps,
the system
interpolates as far as it can with the IT2 command.
For example,
64 x 64 matrices are interpolated to 128 x 128.
-The-IT2 command also causes all subsequent data to be interpolated.
The actual core-resident data is not modified, and interpolation mode
affects only the color display. The NT command turns off the IT2
command also.
The interpolation algorithm is a linear interpolation.
For each
data point, the system generates fifteen interpolated points.

real

ADDITIO~AL

ANALYSIS COMMANDS FOR THE COLOR DISPLAY

Figure 6-1
Normal Color Image

Figure 6-2
Changing a Color Level

Figure 6-3
Color Table Editor

Figure 6-4
Interpolated Display

6-13

ADDITIONAt ANALYSIS COMMANDS FOR THE COLOR DISPLAY

Figure 6-5
Blow-Up

Figure 6-6
Dual Display

Figure 6-7
Miniature and Normal Dual Display

Figure 6-8
Swap

6-14

ADDITIONAL ANALYSIS COMMANDS FOR THE COLOR DISPLAY

6.6

DISPLAY COMMANDS

Two color display commands enhance the visibility
These are the blow-up and no blow-up commands.

6.6.1

the

display.

Blow-Up

The Blow-Up command (BU) , which increases the normal displayed
by a fact~r of two in each of the X and Y positions, is:

image

BUG!)
This cOlamand causes all subsequent image displays to be presented four
times larger than the normal displayed image.
This command is
particularly useful in enhancing the visibility of the display.
A
blown-up image almost occupies the entire screen. TO prevent the
normal text information from overlaying and interfering with the
display, the program displays only the index line. COMMAND: appears
. directly below the index line . . Figure 6-5 shows an example of the
.blow-up command.

6.6.2

No Blow-Up

The No Blow-Up command (NB) , which switches from a blown-up image to a
normal display image, is:
NBG!!)
This command causes all subsequent images to be displayed normally.

6.7

DUAL DISPLAY COMMANDS

The standard GAMMA-II hardware system contains two bit. maps. One bit
map contains 128 x 128 matrix points, which is one full-size display.
Normally, only one bit map is used to displ~y images. A special dual
full SIze display mode is available for displaying two full size
images simultaneously. The left-hand image is the current coreresident data and can be manipulated in the normal manner. The
right-hand image remains fixed. The right-hand image is stored in a
disk-resident area called the dual display buffer.
The general
procedure for generating a dual display is as follows:
1.

Store the current core-resident data in the dual display
buffer by using the Load (LD) command. This stored image
will be the right-hand image.
6-15

ADDITIONAL ANALYSIS COMMANDS FOR THE COLOR DISPLAY
2.

Modify or change the core-resident data to suit you, and then
issue the Dual Display (DU) command. The core-resident data
will be displayed on the left and the contents of the dual
display buffer will be displayed on the right.

The DU command causes the dual display to remain in effect until you
issue the no dual display command. Once you have issued this command,
you can change or modify the left-hand image by using the data
analysis commands in the normal way.
To change the right-hand image,
issue a swap command
(SW).
This
command swaps the left and right images (the core-resident data go to
the dual display buffer and the contents of the dual display buffer
become core resident).

6.7.1

Loading Dual Displays

The command to load a dual display buffer is:
LD~

The L~ command causes the current core-resident data to be transferred
to the disk-resident dual display buffer.
This command does not
initiate a dual display, it merely loads the buffer.
The command to load and display an image is:
LD nG!D
This command transfers the contents of save area n (where n is 1-64)
to the dual display buffer and invokes the dual display mode. That
is, this command causes the contents of the save area to be displayed
on the-~ight with the core-resident data on the left.
NOTE
Only matrix save areas can be
(not dynamic curves).

6.7.2

displayed

Dual Display

The command to display the contents of the dual display buffer is:
DU~

6-16

ADDITIONAL ANALYSIS COMMANDS FOR THE COLOR DISPLAY
This command causes the contents of the dual display buffer to be
displayed full size on the right side of the screen. The coreresident data is displayed on the left side. You can change or modify
the left-hand image with all the available commands in data analysis
at the COMMAND:
level. You cannot modify the right-hand image unless
you make the contents of the dual display buffer core resident (see
Section 6.7.4). Dual displays are only available at the COMMAND:
level. If you leave this level (e.g., to enter regions of interest or
the slice procedure), the display reverts to the normal image. For an
example of a dual display, see Figures 6-6 and 6-7.

NOTE
The Dual Display and Blow-Up commands
are mutually exclusive.
If blow-up is
in effect when the Dual Display command
is issued, the display reverts to normal
size.

6.7.3 I No Dual Display
,

The command to return to the normal single image display is:
NU Cili.)

The right image is turned off and the left image (core-resident data)
becomes the single image. This command causes all subsequent displays
to be single images. The dual display mode can be initiated at any
later time by ~ntering the Dual Display command, DU.

6.7.4

Dual Overlay

The command to overlay the contents of the two display-buffers is:
DOCE!)
This command displays the contents of the dual display on top of the
core-resident image. Different color scales may be used in this mode.
However, if one of the two overlayed images is in black-and-white, the
combined images will be entirely black-and-white while they are
overlayed. The conditions used for reverting to a normal display mode
are the same for dual displays.

6-17

ADDITIONAL ANALYSIS COMMANDS FOR THE COLOR DISPLAY

6.7.5

Swap

If you wish to modify the contents of the dual display buffer
(right
image), the buffer must be core-resident. Thus, the buffers must be
swapped. To swap buffers, type:
SW~

This command swaps the current core-resident data and the data in the
dual display buffer;
it also swaps the displayed images. The
previous contents of the dual display buffer can now be modified,
since
they
are
core-resident.
After performing the desired
--6per ations, issue SWag ain.
The display returns . to its or ig inal
state,
but the right-hand image is modified.
Figure 6-8 (color
insert) represents the swapping of the two images in Figure 6-6.

6.8

DYNAMIC PLAYBACK

'~ynamic playback

allows you to play back patient studies in a
movie+like manner.
You establish the speed and direction of the
playback in one of the following three ways.
1.

Control with a joystick

presetting to a specific rate

Manual control (i.e., stepped)

by using the terminal keyboard

The playback feature can also be used to show a closed-loop show of a
small number of frames.
For example, a twelve-frame gated cardiac
study (end-diastole, end-systole) can be played back to view cardiac
wall motion.
Dynamic playback uses a disk-resident playback buffer.
This buffer
contains formatted prescaled images that are ready to be displayed.
The use of prescaled images allows the data to be played back at very
fast rates.
It is possible to playback images at a rate exceeding 15
images per second. The prescaled images can be stored in one of three
matrix sizes: 64 x 64, 64 x 128, or 128 x 128. Choosing a matrix is
determined by:
1.

The desired image resolution

The desired playback rate

The available disk space

6-18

ADDITIONAL ANALYSIS COMMANDS FOR THE COLOR DISPLAY
In general, larger matrices require more disk space and have a lower
maximum playback rate.
The procedure for using the playback option
is:
1.

Create a playback buffer by specifying a buffer name, a disk
unit number, the number of image~, the image matrix, and the
scaling factor.

2.,

Store data in the playback buffer.

Display the playback buffer.

The i~ages that are stored in the buffer can be preprocessed images
(i.e., smoothed images). Any data analysis command available at the
COMMAND: level can be used to enhance data prior to storing the image
in the playback buffer. Once a playback buffer has been created, it
can be displayed at any time.
The actual matrix size and playback image matrix size do not have to
match. A scaling routine converts the data to the correct matrix size
when the image is stored in the buffer. That is, it interpolates or
condenses data to match matrix sizes. For example, 64 x 64 data is
interpolated when it is stored in a 128 x 128 image buffer.
Conversely, 128 x 128 data is condensed by averaging four points when
it is stored in a 64 x 64 buffer •

.~~8.l

Playback Buffer

A playback buffer is a disk-resident buffer. Buffers can exist on any
disk unit and each buffer has a unique 1-6 alphanumeric character
name. The actual buffers are individual RT-ll files and the file
extension is GPB. For example, if a playback buffer is named HEART,
it is really an RT-ll file called HEART.GPB.
The playback buffer consists of a series of prescaled images.
The
internal format of these images is such that they can be loaded
directly into the color display without any time-consuming processes,
thus maximizing the playback rate.
Images stored in the playback
buffer can be one of three matrix sizes: 64 x 64, 64 x 128, Or 128 x
128.
The matrix size (i.e., 32 x 32, 64 x 64, or 128 x 128) does not
have to match the playback matrix size. If the data matrix size is
less than the playback image size, the data is interpolated to the
playback image size. If the matrix size is greater than the playDack
matrix size, the data will be averaged prior to storage in the
playback buffer. The following table describes the process for all
possible combinations.

6-19

ADDITIONAL ANALYSIS COMMANDS FOR THE COLOR DISPLAY
Table 6-1
Matrix Sizes
Playback Matrix

Data Matrix
64 x 64

64 x 128

128 x 128

32 x 32

Interpolate
x and y

Interpolate x and y
Duplicate x

Interpolate x
and y
Duplicate x
and y

64 x 64

No conversion
required

Interpolate x

Interpolate x
and y

128 x 128

Average 4
points

Average 2 points

No conversion
required

Disk Blocks
per Image

Maximum
Playback
Rate

14 images/sec

15 images/sec

8 images/sec
15 (for RK06)

NOTE
The playback rates described in the
table are for 11/40 processor or the
equivalent.
Playback rates for
the
11/10 or the equivalent are less.
Note, from Table 6-1 that 32 x 32 data is always interpolated.
Storing 32 x 32 matrices in a playback matrix of 128 x 128 is not
necessary and is wasteful of disk space. The fourth row of the table
indicates the number of disks blocks required to store one image. For
example, consider a playback buffer with 100 images, where matrix size
1 requires 400 disk blocks, matrix size 2 requires 800 disk blocks,
and matrix size 3 requires 1600 disk blocks.
One RK05 disk has
slightly more than 4800 blocks, thus, in this case, the 128 x 128
matrix size would require one third of the total disk capacity.
The fifth row of the table indicates the maximum playback rates for
each image matrix size.
The 64 x 128 playback has the fastest
playback rate.
NOTE
It might be assumed that the- 64 . x 64
matrix size has the fastest playback
rate l
however,
this
storage
mode
requires some unpacking when the images
are displayed.
The 64 x ~4 playback rate is determined by the processor speed, while
the 128 x 128 playback rate is limited by the disk transfer rate.
Thus, the 64 x 128 matrix size has the best match to processor speed,
disk transfer rates, and disk storage.
6-20

ADDITIONAL ANALYSIS COMMANDS FOR THE COLOR DISPLAY
6.8.2

Scaling Algorithms

The actual data stored in the playback buffer are intensity levels
rather than counts.
Storing intensity levels instead of counts not
only saves disk space, but also saves time during playoack' (i.e., the
playback routine does not have to scale each image). Tne data are
scaled when the playback buffer is loaded.·
I

There are two scaling algorithms available. The ~irst algorithm is
the same algorithm that is used to scale data for the normal display.
This algorithm scales each image to its own maximum and minimum cell
counts, using the upper and lower threshold settings. This method is
referred to as the relative scaling algorithm.
The second scaling algorithm scales every image to
the
same
user-specified maximum and minimum cell count. This scaling algorithm
is referred to as the absolute scaling algorithm. The data is scaled
to a specific cell count independent of the maximum and minimum cell
count of the individual frames.
Upper and lower thresholds are not
used in this method.
For either algorithm, cells with contents above the upper threshold or
maximum scaling factor are displayed with the maximum intensity level.
Cells below the lower threshold or lower scaling cell count are
displayed with zero intensity. Each algorithm generates images that
differ somewhat when played back.
The absolute scaling algorithm
approximates
what is seen on the gamma camera console when the data
is acquired.
For example, if a cardiac flow study is played back, the bolus
initially appears very bright. As the bolus disperses, the overall
brightness of the display decreases. The actual brightness depends
upon the scaling factors used to scale the data.
If the relative scaling algorithm is used to generate the playoack
buffer, the overall brightness of the image remains fairly constant.
In this case, as the bolus disperses, the brightness and contrast are
enhanced by the scaling algorithm. This algorithm compensates for any
changes in the absolute count rate.
The resultant images are
independent from the actual count rate. Statistical fluctuations
(noise) cause low count rate images that are somewhat grainy and
random. Choosing an algorithm depends upon what you wish to determine
from the playback. If your interest is in the overall flow and
activity, both spatially and temporarily, use the absolute scaling
algorithm.
However, if your inter~st is in the relative spatial activity, the
relative scaling algorithm would provide a better overall display.
The relative scaling algorithm is easier to use since the algorithm
scales each image for perfect co~trast. To use the absolute scaling
algorithm, you must establish the maximum and minimum scaling factors
before the playback buffer is created.
6.8.3

Storing Images in the Playback Buffe!

A playback buffer is created or re-initialized by using the PBI
command
(see Section 6.8.4).
Each image is stored in the playback
buffer wi~h the PBS command (see Section 6.8.5).
Any GAMMA-II data
analysis command available at the COMMAND:
level can be used to
modify or process a data frame before storing it in the playback
buffer.
A multiple command line or macro allows you to set up a
closed loop series of commands that can enhance each frame before
storing it in the buffer.
6-21

ADDITIONAL ANALYSIS COMMANDS FOR THE COLOR DISPLAY
After creating a playback buffer, the buffer can be played back with
the PB command.
The playback routine allows you to control the
playback via the joystick, keyboard, or fix the playback at a
specified rate.
Images can be displayed in the forward or reverse
direction.
The following sections describe the procedures for:
1.

Creating or initializing a playback buffer

Storing images in the buffer

Playing back the buffer

6.8.4

Creating a Playback Buffer

Before any images can be stored in a playback buffer, you must create
a buffer or re-initialize an existing buffer. The command to create
o~ initialize a playback buffer is:
PBI

name,unit,n,r,max,min~

where:
name

is a 1-6 alphanumeric character name for the buffer.

unit

is the disk unit
resides.

is the total number of images in the buffer.

is the playback buffer image matrix size (1-3)

number

(O-7)

which

the

buffer

1 is for 64 x 64 matrices
2 is for 64 x 128 matrices
3

is for 128 x 128 matrices

max

is the maximum number of cell counts that are used to
scale the data for the absolute scaling algorithm. If
max is zero or absent from the command line,' the
relative scaling algorithm is used.

min

is the minimum number of cell counts that are used to
scale the data for the absolu~e scaling algorithm. Min
is only present when max is greater than zero.

6-22

ADDITIONAL ANALYSIS COMMANDS FOR THE COLOR DISPLAY
When the system executes 'this command, it creates a playback buffer on
the specified disk unit.
If a playback buffer with this specified
name already exists on the unit, the buffer is re-initialized.
Any
images previously stored in the buffer are erased. This command stores
the current index line in the buffer and uses the current frame
algebra message for the comment line. Note that you can use the Text
command (TE) prior to the PBI command to insert any comment to be
displayed during playback. An alternate form of this command is:
PBI~

with this alternate form, the creation routine enters an interactive'
mode.
You are asked for the required parameters one at a time. You
can use the editing functions in the data acquisition program (i.e.,
ESCape to edit and DELETE to erase a line). In the interactive mode,
you are asked to enter a comment line.
If there is not enough disk space available for the
the following error message appears.

playback

buffer,

NOT ENOUGH DISK SPACE ON UNIT n
THIS BUFFER REQUIRES xxx BLOCKS, ONLY
yyy BLOCKS ARE AVAILABLE
At this point, if the system is in the interactive mode, you can type
an ESCape to change some of the parameters (i.e., reduce the number of
images, change the image matrix size, or select another disk unit).
You can type a carriage return to return to the COMMAND level.
If the
~ystem is not in the interactive
mode, a carriage return must be
typed.
If the 'system is in the interactive mode and a
specified that already exists on the disk, the
appears.

buffer
f~llowing

name is
message

BUFFER name ALREADY EXISTS ON UNIT n
You can type an ESCape to change the buffer name or type a carriage
return to re-initialize the existing playback buffer.
If the system
is not in the interactive mode, an existing playback buffer is
automatically re-initialized and no message is printed.
Note that the first form of the PBI command is most useful within a
data analysis macro.
This command automatically sets up a buffer,
while the second form of the command, PBI (the interactive mode),
is
easier to use when not running a macro.

6.8.5

Storing Images in a Playback Buffer

When a buffer has been created or initialized by using the PBI
command, data images are converted or stored in the playback buffer by
using the following command:
PBS

6-23

ADDITIONAL ANALYSIS COMMANDS FOR THE COLOR DISPLAY
This command converts the current core-resident data into the playback
buffer format and stores it in a buffer. The first time the PBS
command ts executed (following the PBI command), the image is stored
as image number one.
The next time PBS is executed, the data is
stored as image number two. The data analysis program keeps track of
the last image number stored. The PBS command stores the current data
in the next sequential position of the playback buffer. Since the PBS
command stores only one image at a time,
it would be very time
consuming for you to manually fill the buffer by typing
PBS
repeatedly.
The PBS ~ommand is intended to be used in a multiple command line or a
data analysis macro along with the execute line (EL) command. The EL
command allows the set-up of a closed loop command string.
This
process handles and stores frames sequentially in the buffer. For
example, the following simple command line causes the data analysis
pro~ram to store a series of smoothed images in the buffer.
59 i PBS i!

i EL G!!)

S9 smooths the current data, PBS stores the smoothed data in a buffer,
exclamation point- and space bar skips to the next frame unless it
is the last frame, and the EL command causes the entire command line
to be re-executed. Thus, the playback buffer is filled with a series
of smoothed images.
The above command will not
be
repeated
indefinitely because:

-tbe-

the playback buffer will be filled, or

the end of the study will be reached.

In either case, command execution stops. You can then issue the PB
command
(see Section 6.8.6) to display the buffer. You can also stop
command execution by pressing the DELETE key.
The following data analysis commands are
prior to storing it in a buffer.

helpful

for

handling

Smooth data to eliminate noise

AD n

Add sequential frames

SK n or Space bar

Skip frames

IC n or ICF n

Isocontour (useful for wall motion)

SA +n

Save area add

data

See Sections 5.3.1 and 5.24.12 for an explanation of the exclamation
point.
The save area add command, SA +n, is useful for generating
composite images. For example, an outline (such as a ventricular
wall) can be stored in a save area and then added to every image as it
is stored in the playback buffer. One possible form - of a command
string could be:

S9iSA +3iPBSi iELG!!)
The AD n command is useful for storing a sum of frames in
of the playback buffer. Consider the following sequence:
AD 4(§)

S9jPBSi!

;EL~

6-24

each

image

ADDITIONAL ANALYSIS COMMANDS FOR THE COLOR DISPLAY
AD 4 adds four frames to the current frame (i.e., sums five frames).
The next line stores the smoothed sum, skips five frames, sums the
ne~t five frames, and then re-executes the line.
Note that the space
bar command skips n+l frames (five, in this case). Thus, the playoack
buffer will contain a sequence of images, each having a smoothed sum
of five. A modification to this command sequence is:
AD 4~

S9:PBS;!SK l:EL~
!

th~s

case, five frames are summed but only one is skipped.
This
may be called a temporal smoothing algorithm. This procedure
is Useful when images are stored from a very fast dynamic study.
The
summing of images improves the statistics of the data, while skipping
only one frame preserves the dynamics of the study.
proce~s

p
Playing Back the Playback Buffer

6.8.6

After you have initialized and stored at least one image in a playback
buffer, the buffer can be played back by using the following command:
PB name,unit~
where:
name

is the name of the playback buffer.

unit

is the disk unit on which the buffer resides.

If unit is not specified, unit zero is assumed. If both name and unit
are absent from the command line, the most recently initialized
playback buffer is used.
When a playback buffer is displayed, the images appear in the center
of the screen. To the right of the image is the current image number,
the current playback rate in images per second, and the playnack
direction, FORWARD or REVERSE. The index line and·comment line, which
was optionally entered at creation of the playback buffer, appear at
the top of the screen. When playback begins, the joystick controls
the speed and direction of the playback. Moving the joystick forwatd
causes the playback rate to increase. Moving the joystick backward
causes the playback rate to decr~ase.
If you move the joystick
further backward, the direction of the playback reverses. The current
image number, rate, and direction are displayed to the right of the
image.
You can fix the playback rate at a constant. rate, or you can
step through the study manually by using the T, M, and S commands.
See Section 6.8.7.
All playback files are stored on the disks with the extension .GPB.
To get a list of all the playback files stored on the system disk,
type the following monitor command:
DIR *.GPBG!!)

6-25

ADDITIONAL ANALYSIS COMMANDS FOR THE COLOR DISPLAY
To get a list of all the playback files stored on disk unit 1, type:
DIR DKl:*.GPB~
Remember that monitor commands are not the same as GAMMA-II commands.

6.8.7

Playback
Commands
I

You can/use the following commands to control the mode of display and
playback.
All of these commands are immediate effect commands (i.e.,
no carriage return is needed).
The following four commands control the display mode:
C

Display in color, the

Display in black-and-white (i.e., monochrome) •

Display in blow-up mode~

Display in normal size mode.

The next four
playback:

commands

c~rrent

control

the

color table is used.

speed

and

Timed mode;

Manual mode; playback stops;
display the next frame.

Joystick mode;
speed and direction are
joystick (i.e., initial mode).

Switch direction;

direction

the

locks the playback rate at the current rate.

type

carriage

return

controlled

the

type

or M mode only.

To exit the playback mode and return to the COMMAND:
CTRL/X.

6.8.8

level,

Deleting a Playback Buffer

When you create a playback buffer, it remains on the disk
delete it. The command to delete a playback buffer is:

until

you

always

PBD name,unit~
where:
name is the name of the buffer.
unit is the disk unit number.
If unit is absent, disk unit zero is assumed.
Name
specified, otherwise an error message is printed.

6-26

must

ADDITIONAL ANALYSIS COMMANDS FOR THE COLOR DISPLAY

PB
6.8.9

Playback Merge

The Playback Merge command can merge up to four playoack buffers into·
one buffer that displays up to four
images simultaneously. The
command to create a merged playback buffer is:
PBM

name,unit,bufl,unitl,buf2,unit2,buf3,unit3,buf4,unit4~

where:
name
unit
bufl
unitl
buf2
unit2
buf3
unit3
buf4
unit4

is the name of the
merged buffers
is the unit number
is the name of the
is the unit number
is the name of the
is the unit number
is the name of the
is the unit number
is the name of the
is the unit number

new

buffer

which

will

hold

the

where the new buffer will be stored
first buffer to be merged
where bufl is stored
second buffer to be merged
where buf2 is stored
third buffer to be merged
where buf3 is stored
fourth buffer to be merged
where buf4 is stored

For example,
PBM MERGED,I,GANEK,I,PAVIA,2,GOODMN,2,SHIELS,I~
or

PBM MERGED,I,GANEK,I",GOODMN,2,PAVIA,2~

The total number of frames in the new merged buffer is the minimum
number of frames of the four existing buffers. You may leave any of
the four buffer names and units blank which will leave a blank area in
the merged buffer. The merged display is filled in the order shown in
Figure 6-9.
The alternate form of the PBM command is:
PBM~

If you type only PBM, GAMMA-II enters an interactive mode which
prompts you to type in each buffer name and unit number individually.
The rules for editing your responses and adding comments are the same
as for PBI.
The error messages and messages dealing with available
disk space are the same as PBI also.
Should you type an incorrect buffer name or unit number for buffer
through buffer 4, the following message apPQars on the display.
NONEXISTENT BUFFER
Then you will be prompted to retype that buffer name and unit number.

6-27

ADDITIONAL ANALYSIS COMMANDS FOR THE COLOR DISPLAY

The area marked 1 is the area filled by buffer 1.
1 is left blank '/ area 1 is left blank.

If buffer

The area marked 2 is the area filled by buffer 2.
2 is left blank, area 2 is left blank.

If buffer

The area marked 3 is the area filled by buffer 3.
3 is left blank, area 3 is left blank.

If buffer

The area marked 4 is the area filled by buffer 4.
4 is left blank, area 4 is left blank.

If buffer

Figure 6-9
Filling the Playback Merge Buffer

6.9

EIGHT AND SIXTEEN IMAGE DISPLAYS

The following two commands are variations of the minified-display mode
that work only on the color display.

6-28

ADDITIO~AL

6.9.1

ANALYSIS COMMANDS FOR THE COLOR DISPLAY

Display Eight Images

The command to display eight images is:
I

08G§)

This command produces up to eight minified images on the display.
These eight images are sequential frames of a dynamic study beginning
with the core-resident image. The core-resident image is in the upper
left corner of the display_

D1
fi.9.2

Display Sixteen Images

The command to display sixteen images is:
016~

This command produces up to sixteen minified images on the display
only if the VSVOl has four bit maps. If the VSVOl has only two bit
maps, the 016 command stops at only eight images.
The sixteen images are sequential frames of a dynamic study beginning
with the core-resident image. The core-resident image is in the upper
left corner of the display.

6-29

CHAPTER 7
REGIONS OF INTEREST

GAMMA-II
You can select regions of interest (ROIs) within an image.
uses these ROls to plot curves and display count data. ROls are
sometimes rectangular but can be irregularly shaped, and they are
within the boundaries of the matrix. You can specify as many as 12
ROls at one time. The ROls may overlap,
intersect, or be wholly
contained within other ROIs.
In dynamic studies, GAMMA-II can
calculate curves based on the count rate within each ROI, and can
display, print, or punch them. GAMMA-II can store both dynamic-study
curves and matrices with ROls in save areas.
The ROI commands are a subset of the data-analysis routine (command AD
at the command-table level). The ROI commands set a prevailing mode
that must be exited before returning to the study.
Two types of ROls exist: regular, and irregular.
Regular
rect,angular, and irregular ROls can take any shape.

ROls

are

NOTE
Type CTRL/X to exit from ROI mode back
to
the study.
Reentering ROI mode
restores all of the previously defined
ROls.
The DELETE key does not work for correcting typing errors in ROI mode.
You can cancel a typing error in a RETURN-terminated command (before
typing the RETURN) by typing:
CTRL/U
The CTRL/U cancels the, whole line, and you must retype the command.
The ROI commands do not appear on the display or on the console.

7-1

REGIONS OF INTEREST

7.1

REGULAR REGION OF INTEREST (ROI) COMMAND

To enter the regular ROI mode, type the following
terminal in response to the COMMAND: request.

command

the

RI~

GAMMA-II redisplays the matrix with a cursor approximately in the
middle of the matrix.
You use the cursor to outline or otherwise
determi~ the matrix cells that are to be included in an ROI.
Figure
7-10
(color insert)
shows a matrix display with the cursor (cross
hairs for the color display). you control the motion of the cursor
lro~
the
keyboard.
The cursor can move only vertically or
horizontally.
.
If the VTOI display is bright at the center, the cursor may not be
readily visible.
Use the control commands to move the cursor into a
sparse area of the matrix. Often the motion itself makes the cursor
apparent.

T~ define a regular ROI, you must mark the diagonally opposed
of the
for each
control
display,

corners
region by moving the cursor and typing the Mark command, once
corner. When you have marked the two corners using the
commands, the rectangle defining the ROI appears on the
superimposed on the matrix.

When you have defined the ROI, the program identifies it with a letter
of the alphabet, rather than a number. That is, the first ROI defined
is labeled A, the second B, up to the twelfth, L.
The letter is
placed in the interior of the ROI for the color display.
For the
VTOl, the identifying letter designates the border of the region. You
always know the exact position of the cursor, so that regions as small
as a single cell can be precisely located and marked.

7.2

CONTROL COMMANDS

The ROI program identifies each defined ROI by a letter of the
alphabet, from A through L. A region, its associated count data, and
its derived dynamic curve are all identified by the same letter. This
procedure is described in greater detail in Sections 7.2.1 through
7.2.6.
Most
of
the
ROI
commands
are
single
character,
immediate-effect commands (i.e., no carriage return is required). Tne
system executes the command as soon as you type the character.
The
system does not echo any of the ROI commands ,Pn the display.

7-2

REGIONS OF INTEREST

7.2.1

The Up command (U) moves the displayed cursor up one cell.

Type

with no carriage return since the 60mmand is an immediate-effect
command. The letter U does not appear on the screen.

7.2.2

Down

The Down command (D) moves the displayed cursor down one cell.

Type

with ho carriage return since the command is an immediate-effect
command. The letter D does not appear on the screen.

7.2.3

Left

The Left command (L) moves the displayed cursor left one cell.

Type

with no carriage return since the command is an immediate-effect
command. The letter L does not appear on the screen.

7-3

REGIONS OF INTEREST

7.2.4

Right

The Right command (R) moves the displayed cursor right one cell.

Type

with no carriage return since the command is an immediate-effect
command. The letter R does not appear on the screen.

7.2.5

Jump

rThe Jump command (J) moves the cursor ten cells in
the last typed D, D, L, or R command. Type

the

direction

with no carriage return since the command is an immediate-effect
command. The letter J does not appear on the screen.

7.2.6

Mark

The Mark command (M) marks the present location of the cursor.

Type

with no carriage return since all of
The letter
immediate-effect commands.
screen.

7-4

the control
M does not

commands are
appear on the

REGIONS OF INTEREST
Region of Interest Count Data - As soon as you have defined an ROI by
designating two marks, the program extracts the following data from
the region and displays it to the right of (beneath for a VTOI)
the
matrix. See Figure 7-11 (color insert).
ROI COUNT

is the sum of the counts of all the cells
the region.

i OF CELLS

is the total number of cells in the region.

AV CELL COUNT

is the average cell count in the
(i.e., (ROI COUNT)/(# OF CELLS».

region

When you mark another ROI, the procedure remains the same, except that
this second region is labeled with the letter B. The system once
again displays ROI count data to the right of the matrix along with
the count data and outline of the first ROI. Figure 7-2 shows two
ROIs, with the count data for each region displayed.

7.2.7

Same Shape

". . ·The Same Shape command (S) defines a new ROI wi th the
shap~ as a previously defined region.
Type

same

size

and

S aC§)

where "a" is an identifying letter of a defined ROI.
If "a" is
absent, the last ROI definition is used. The letter ~ does not appear
on the screen. You should move the cursor by uSIng the control
commands.
The position of the cursor marks the lower right corner of
the new ROI.

7.2.8

Kill

The Kill command (K) erases the first mark of a pair of marks.
NOTE
The Kill command must be typed
the second Mark is issued.

7-5

before

REGIONS OF INTEREST
Type
K

on the terminal with no carriage return. This is an immediate-effect
command and the letter K is not displayed on the screen. You cannot
use the Kill command to erase a completely defined ROI.
Use the E
command for this purpose (see Section 7.2.10).

7.2.9

Step Through the Study

The Step ~hrough the Study command (T) displays the current frame of a
dynamic study and then displays each succeeding frame in turn at a
-- specified rate.
Command format:
T n G!D

where n represents the delay in seconds between frames. The argument.
n can range from 0-9 seconds. The argument n is optional. If you
~mit n, the program uses a delay of 0 seconds.
If n is 0, the program
displays the frames as quickly as possible. To stop the automatic
step,_ you must type any printing character on the terminal.
I

As each frame comes to the screen, the program superimposes the
currently defined ROls on the matrix in the prevailing display mode,
and calculates and displays the count data for the frame.

7.2.10

Erase

The Erase command (E) erases specified ROls.
Command format:
E abc ••• ~
You specify the ROls by typing their letters as the arguments of the
command. The system deletes these ROls from the display. If you give
no argument, all ROls are deleted. The'system displays the current
matrix, and you can define new ROls. If you delete an ROI, the newly
defined ROI replaces the ROI that you deleted.

7-6

REGIONS OF INTEREST
For example, if you have previously defined five ROIs, A, B, C, 0, and
E, and you type
E

BDG!D

on the terminal, the ROIs Band 0 are erased. NOw, if you define two
new ROIs, GAMMA-II labels the new ROIs with the letters Band 0
respectively.
Note that commas are not required, and the ROIs need not be
in alphabetical order.

specified

You can correct errors that you type. For example, suppose you type
the following command, and then you realize that you listed an ROI
that you really do not want to delete.
E ABGJ
If you have not already typed RETURN, you can type CTRL/U on the
terminal' to erase the command line.
The ROI procedure doeS not
recognize DELETEs. For example, if you type the following line,
E ABFJ"'U
the CTRL/U causes the incorrect line to be ignored.
the correct command line.

You can now enter

E ABGJG!!)

.;r'------------------------7.3

IRREGULAR REGIONS OF INTEREST (ROIs)

Irregular ROIs can be any shape or size within the boundaries of the
matrix.
You can specify as many as 12 irregular regions at anyone
time. The regions may overlap, intersect, or be wholly contained in
other regions.

7.3.1

Joystick Positioning

Since the irregular ROI may be any shape, you control the shape of an
ROI using a joystick that moves the cursor in any direction. When you
pres~ the INTERRUPT bar on the joystick, the program records the
path
of the cursor.
You complete the definition of an irregular ROI by marking its postion
using one Mark (M) command.

7.3.2

Irregular ROI Command

To enter the irregular ROI mode, type the following
terminal in response to the COMMAND: request.
IRG!!)
7-7

command

the

REGIONS OF INTEREST
The system erases the screen and then redisplays it with the cursor
somewhere in the matrix, depending upon the position of the joystick.
The COMMAND:
request does not appear.
If the cursor is not readily
apparent when using the VTOI, wiggle the joystick a bit to find it.
Orient the control unit so that the tip of the joystick reflects the
position of the cursor. You should pull the joystick toward your body
to move ~,he cursor to the bottom of the matrix.
Move the joystick
away from your body to move the cursor toward the top.
Move the
joystick left or right for corresponding motions.
In general, the method for defining an irregular ROI is as follows:

Move the cursor to the desired point.

Press the INTERRUPT bar on the joystick control.

Keeping the INTERRUPT bar depressed, move the
that the cursor draws the outline of the ROI.

Release the INTERRUPT bar, and mark the ROI by typing the
immediate-effect command, M. The letter A appears inside the
regiori on theVSVOl only.

joystick

The system calculates and displays the count data for each region.
To delete an ROI path before the mark, press RETURN.
You cannot define irregular regions on 128 x 128 matrices.
Use
regular ROls for this configuration.
For 128 x 128 matrices the IR
command defaults to RI.
Irregular ROls appear regular within the regular ROI procedure.
If
you reenter irregular ROI mode,
the irregular ROIs again appear
irregular.
NOTE
Sections 7.3.3 and 7.3.4 apply
the VSVOl Color Display.

7.3.3

only

Erase Cells

The Erase Cells command enables you to erase part of an irregular ROI
while you are outlining it. The following immediate-effect command
switches the mode from marking to unmarking.
K

As in marking, you control the unmarking with the joystick.
As you
move the crosshairs along the partial ROI, the system erases the
previously defined cells.

7-8

REGIONS OF INTEREST
TO switch back from unmarking,
command.,

type

the

following

immediate-effect

You can use the K and A commands to erase only a partial ROI and not a
region that has already been marked with an M command. TO erase a '
marked ROI, use the E command (see Section 7.2.10).

7.3.4

Enlarging an Area of the Display

You can enlarge an area of an image to define an ROI more easily.
To
enlarge the area, move the crosshairs to the middle of the area to be
-- "en-larged (see Figure 7-1). Then type the following immediate-effect
command, which en~arges the area by a factor of 4 (see Figure 7-2).
Q

Once the area is enlarged, you can define the ROI in the normal
manner.
The image automatically returns to the normal size with any
"~ommand but K or A.

Figure 7-1
Positioning the Crosshairs

Figure 7-2
Enlarged Area of the Image

7-9

REGIONS OF INTEREST
7.4

DEFINITION MODE COMMANDS

You can define irregular
mode-setting commands.
1.

Circumference mode

Fill mode

ROIs

means

two

immediate-effect

Circumference mode is the default.

7.4.1

Circumference Mode

-Onc~ ~gain,

you define ~region by outliriirig it withth~ cursor.
In
circumference mode, an irregular ROI consists of cells along a
circumference path and all of the cells in the interior of the
outlined area.
This mode is the default condition when you first
issue the IR command.

To switch to circumference mode from fill
cpmmand with no carriage return.

mode,

type

the

following

c
In circumference mode, the path of the cursor can be simply or
multiply connected, or not connected at all. If the path of the
cursor is disconnected, each piece of the ROI defines a sub-ROI.
The
total 'ROI consists of all sub-ROls. The illustration in Figure 7-13
(color insert) displays such an outline. Figure 7-12 (color insert)
displays a simply connected ROI.
The ends of the outline need not meet exactly, but if they cross, the
loose ends are included in the defined ROI (see Figure 7-14 in tpe
color insert). Notice that the total cell count incluaes the outlined
area, plus the extra cells that the loose ends cover.
You do not have to close an outline. However, if you do not close
outline, the resulting ROI consists of only the path traced by
cursor. The total cell count is the sum of only those cells in
border of the ROI
(i.e., those cells specifically marked by
joystick) .

7-10

the
the
the
the

REGIONS OF INTEREST

7.4.2

Fill Mode

In fill mode, the defined.ROI consists of only those cells through
which/the cursor actually passes when the INTERRUPT bar is down. That
is, you must fill in every cell in the ROI. To switch to the fill
mode, type the following command with no carriage return.
F
In fill mode, the path of the cursor can be simply or mUltiply
connected, or not connected at all. An irregular ROI can consist of a
single curve or of several noncontiguous areas obtained by filling in
a patch, raising the INTERRUPT bar, and moving the cursor to a new
~pot.
you can define several such areas in one irregular ROI, since
the region is not defined until you type the mark command (M). Figure
7-15 (color insert) shows a
noncontiguous
ROI.
Unlike
the
circumference mode, the fill mode requires you to define every point
in the region.
NOTE
Section 7.4.3 applies only to the
color display.

7.4.3

VSVOl

Defining an ROI Using Threshold Levels

You can use a threshold level or an isocontour to create an ROI.
To
use a threshold level as an ROI, you must first obtain an image with
lower and upper threshold levels that define the ROI (see Figure 7-3).
You can obtain this image using the LT, LTN, UT, UTN, W, X, Y, and Z
commands. Alternately, to use an isocontour as an ROI, obtain the
appropriate isocontour image using 'the IC or ICF command.

7-11

REGIONS OF INTEREST
Then, enter ROI mode and define an ROI using the joystick in the
normal manner
(see Figure 7-4).
You can use either fill mode or
circumference mode (see Section 7.4). Instead of typing M for mark,

tYl?e
v
to mark the ROI. You do not need to type RETURN because V is an
immediate effect command. The new ROI is defined by those cells that
are in both the area circled by the joystick and the' displayed cells
of the! isocontour
(see Figure 7-5). The new ROI is defined in the
prevail~ng mode, circumference mode or fill mode.
Figures 7-6, 7-7,
7-8, and 7-9 show defining an ROI using an isocontour.
NOTE
If you enter ROI mode and type V without
having used the joystick to circle the
threshold or isocontour, the
entire
threshold or isocontour defines the ROI.
This method of defining an ROI is very useful when you desire to see
the exact shape of an organ;
for example, defining the left
ventricle.

7-12

REGIONS OF INTEREST

Defini~g

Figure 7-4
Defining the ROI

Figure 7-3
Threshold Level

Figure 7-5
The New ROI

7-13

REGIONS OF INTEREST

f'i~nlre

e 1 j ur"~

7-6

r; C' fin i :1 ~ a n I s () COil t . ) U r

De fin i:1.]

Figure 7-8
The New ROI

7- 7
t r)(? lZJ [

Figure 7-9
The ROI if the
Iscontour Is Not
Circled by the Joystick

7-14

REGIONS OF INTEREST
7.5

DISPLAY MODE COMMANDS

GAMMA-I) provides two modes of displaying irregular ROIS.
You
establish these modes with the following immediate-effect commands:
1.

Boundary display

Interior display

7.5.1

Boundary Display

You can display an outline of each ROI
(regular
issuing the Boundary Display command. Type:

irregular)

with no carriage return. When you type this command, the system
erases the screen, and redisplays the frame with the outlines of the
defined ROIs displayed in their respective positions without the
~matrix.
An example is shown in Figure 7-16 (color insert). To
restore the matrix display, press RETURN. The irregular ROI outlines
remain superimposed on the matrix.

7.5.2

Interior Display

You can display the area (or interior) of an irregular ROI by issuing
the Interior Display command.
Type the following command with no
carriage return.
I

When you type this command, the system erases the screen and
redisplays the frame with the irregular ROIs in their respecti~e
positions without the matrix. The interior of each irregular ROI IS
filled with white (or its letter if using the VT01) (see Figure 7-17
in the color insert). To restore the matrix display, press RETURN.
The filled-in irregular ROIs remain superimposed on the matrix.
The Boundary Display and Interior Display commands set a prevailing
mode that remains in effect until you type an alternate command.
These commands display only the irregular ROIs, which is useful for
verifying sizes, shapes, and positions without interference from
matrix data in the background.

7-15

REGIONS OF INTEREST
7.6

OTHER COMMANDS

The following sections (7.6.1 through
commands applicable during ROI mode.

7.6.1

7.6.4)

describe

the

other

Threshold Adjustment

The following immediate-effect commands
are
threshold-adjusting
commands. These commands are also effective within ROI mode.
I

W,! X, Y, Z, N, 0

These commands are described in sections 5.7.3 through 5.7.6, and
5.8.2 through 5.8.3.
The first four commands adjust the thresholds
individually according to step sizes currently displayed.
The last
two adjust the threshold band up or down according to the thresholds
currently displayed.

7,.• 6.2

Carr iage Return

The Carriage Return command (a RETURN by itself) restores the current
frame, as indicated by the frame number, with ROIs in the prevailing
mode. Type:

on the terminal.

7.6.3

Space Bar

The Space Bar command displays
current ROIs. Type:

the

frame

the

study

with

on the terminal. No carriage return is required because this is an
immediate-effect command.
The program calc~lates and displays count
data for the new frame.
If the message
FRAME ARITH:

ADn

is on the screen when you type the space bar, or if ADn appears under
the threshold settings, the program performs the indicated sliding
add.

7-16

REGIONS OF INTEREST

7.6.4

Hyphen

The Hyphen command displays the previous frame of the study
current ROIs and new count data. Type:
-

with

(hyphen)

on the terminal. No carriage return is required, because this
immediate-effect command.

7.7

all

DYNAMIC-STUDY CURVES

In a normal dynamic study, the count-collection rate varies from frame
to frame. with the commands described in the following sections, the
system can calculate the count rate for each ROI and can plot curves
for each region over the entire study. You can store the curve data
in a save area. The system can also calculate and plot curves derived
~rom the average count-rate per cell in each region.
You can print or
'punch tabular lists of counts per frame for each ROI.
A typical dynamic curve is shown in Figure 7-18 (color inse~t).
system plots count raie on the Y-axis and time on the X-axis.
figure at the top of the Y-axis is a maximum count rate.

Tne
The

The system marks off the X-axis in frames. This scale is linear in
time.
The frame marks of slower groups are further apart, as you can
see in Figure 7-18. The numbers on the X-axis are frame numbers.

7.8

CURVE-CALCULATION COMMANDS

The ROI program can calculate curves for each defined ROI and for the
entire matrix.
You can specify individual curves by an argument
consisting of the letters of the ROls whose curves are to be
calculated.
The letters need not appear in order, and commas are not
required.

7.8.1

Plot Normal Dynamic Curves

The Plot Normal Dynamic Curves command '(PN) calculates the
curves for the total matrix and for each (specified) ROI.

7-17

count-rate

REGIONS OF INTEREST
Command format:
PN abc ••• G!D
The program displays the curves up to two at a time, each on its own
axes, in alphabetical order (see Figure 7-19 in the color insert). If
you type the command line without an argument:
I

PN G!!)
I

the pro~ram displays the first two curves. The top curve represents
the to~al-count-rate-versus-time curve for all frames. The "versus
time" means that the abscissa scaling reflects any frame-rate changes.
However, the units of the abscissa are the frame numbers (not.the
time). This curve is called the T curve. The bottom curve is the
first defined ROI. The system displays the next pair of curves when
you type any printing keyboard character except the letter P.
After
the system displays the last curve, typing anything othdr than the
letter P erases the plot and restores the matrix display with ROls.
At any time during the plot display, if you wish to issue another plot
'command, you can do so by typing the appropriate command line. For
example, if you type the following command on the terminal, the
program displays curves A and C.
PN ACFGI G!!)
When you press any keyboard character (other than P, because P alerts
the system that another plot command is going to be typed), the
p~ogram displays curves F and G.
If you type:
PNQ!!)
on the terminal, the program displays all defined ROls in alphabetical
order.
That is, if you originally defined ROls A, B, C, 0, and E,
those curves are presented on the display in pairs (that is, first
curves T and A, then Band C, then 0 and E, etc.).

7.8.2

plot Overlaid Dynamic Curves

The Plot Overlaid Dynamic Curves command (PO)
calculates the countrate curves for the total matrix and for each specified ROI, and then
plots these curves on the same set of axes.
Command format:
PO abc ••• ~

7-18

REGIONS OF INTEREST
Each ROI is represented by a color.
blue, and green.
yellow
red
blue
green

These

colors

are

yellow,

red,

= the first, fifth, ninth, and thirteenth curves
= the second, sixth, and tenth curves
= the third, sev~nth, and eleventh curves

= the fourth, eighth, and twelfth curves

This configuration is displayed beneath the set of axes.
The system
plots each curve in its respective color.
Figure 7-20 (color insert)
is a typical example of the overlaid curve display.
On the VTOl, the system plots each curve with its ROI identification
letter.
The total matrix curve is plotted with the letter T. Each
curve on the VTOl is still identified with its ROI identification
letter.
If the argument is omitted from the command line by your typing:

poG!D
the program overlays all of the ROI curves on one set of axes.
Each
curve on the VTOI is· still identified with its ROI identification
letter.
TO restore the matrix ROI display, type any keyboard character
the letter P.

except

,or example, if you type:
PO ABGJL~

on the terminal, the program overlays curve~ A, B, G, J,
the following identifying colors (letters for a VTOI) :
durve

A =

and

with

yellow

B = red

G = blue
J = green
L = yellow
When you press a keyboard character (other than P, because P alerts
the system that another plot command is going to be typed), the
program displays the original ROI matrix.

7-19

REGIONS OF INTEREST

7.8.3

Plot Overlaid Average Rate Curves

(PA)
calculates the
The Plot Overlaid Average Rate Curves command
average count rate per cell for each"specified"ROI and plots the
curves on the same set of axes.
Command ·format:
PA abc .•• G!D
The program plots each curve of average count rates per cell with its
ROI· identification color (letter for a VTOl). The total matrix curve
-is ~lotted in yellow (or ~ for a VTOl).
If you" type the' following
command line without an argument:
PAG!)
the program overlays all of the average-count-rate ROIs on one set of
axes.
Each curve is still identified with the ROI identification
~910r .
TO restore the matrix ROI display, type any keyboard character except
the letter P. Palerts the system that a new plot command is going to
be issued.

7.9

FRAME-LINEAR SCALE COMMANDS

At times, you may wish to make the X-axis linear with respect to frame
numbers rather than to time intervals.
You can do so by issuing the
commands outlined in sections 7.9.1 through 7.9.3.

PN
7.9.1

Plot Normal Frame-Linear Curves

The Plot Normal Frame-Linear Curves command
(PNM)
displays the
count-rate curves as counts versus frame numbers rather than counts
versus time intervals. That is, the X-axis units are frame numbers
rather than time intervals.
Command format:
PNM abc •.• GD

7-20

REGIONS OF INTEREST

Figure 7-10
Matrix with Cursor

Figure 7-11
Two ROIs: A and B

Figure 7-12
Simply Connected ROI

Figure 7-13
Multiply Connected ROI

7-21

REGIONS OF INTEREST

Figure 7-14
ROI with "Loose Ends"

Figure 7-15
Noncontiguous Irregular
Region (Fill Mode)

Figure 7-16
Boundary Display:
Three Regions

Figure 7-17
Interior Display:
Three Regions

7-22

REGIONS OF INTEREST

Figure 7-18
ROI Count Rate Curve

Figure 7-19
Individual Curve Display (PN)

Figure 7-20
Overlaid C~rve Display (PO)

Figure 7-21
Frame-Linear
Curve Display (PNM)

7-23

REGIONS OF INTEREST
The program displays the curves two at a time in alphabetical order
(Figure 7-21 in the color insert), each on its own axes. When the
graph is drawn, the X-axis frame ticks are equally spaced and the
graph title changes to:
ROI x COUNT RATE VS FRAME NUMBER
to ind~cate that this is a frame-linear curve.
The top frame
represents the TOTAL COUNT RATE VS FRAME number .(where number is the
total, frame number) for all ROls. The program automatically expands
that i part of the X-axis so that the distance between ticks produces a
legible curve plot.
Compare Figure 7-19 to Figure 7-21
(color
insert) .
Notice, that in Figure 7-19 there are some tick marks ~lose
together at the beginning of the study, and in Figure 7-22 the' tick
marks are equidistant to provide a linear curve.
The bottom curve is the first defined ROI.
The program brings the
next pair of curves to the screen when you type any character on the
keyboard' except the letter P. Each time you type a character, the
next pair of ROI curves appear on the screen. After the last curve is
displayed, typing any keyboard character restores the matrix display
with ROIs. you can omit the argument from the command line by typing:
PNt-1G!D
This process brings all ROIs to the screen at your command.
~.

·At any time during the plo~ display, you can initiate another plot
typing the appropriate command line.

\POMI
7.9.2

Plot Overlaid Frame-Linear Curves

The Plot Overlaid Frame-Linear Curves command
(POM)
frame-linear curves overlaid on the same set of axes.

displays

the

Command format:
POM abc ••. CED
The program plots each curve with its ROI identification color (letter
for a VTOI).
The total matrix.curve is yellow (or plotted with the
letter T for a VTOI). The program spaces the X-axis frame ticks
equally, and the graph title changes to:
COUNT RATE VS FRAME NUMBER
to indicate that this is a frame-linear _curve.
command line without the argument:

you

type

the

all of the ROI curves are overlaid on one set of axes and
marks are equally spaced to indicate frame-linear curves.

the

tick

POM~

7-25

REGIONS OF INTEREST
To restore the matrix ROI, type any keyboard character except the
letter P. Typing P alerts the system that a new plot command is going
to be entered.

7.9.3

plot Average Frame-Linear Curves

The Plot Average Frame-Linear Curves command (PAM) displays
count-rate curves as average cell count versus frame number.
program overlays the curves on the same set of axes.

the
The

Command format:
PAM abc •.• ~
The program plots each curve of average count rates per cell with its
ROI identification color.
The total matrix curve is yellow (or
plotted with the letter T for a VTOl). The program spaces the X~axis
frame ticks equally, and the graph title changes to:
COUNT RATE VS FRAME NUMBER
<""

to indicate that this is a frame-linear
typed without an argument:

curve.

the

command

PAM~

the program overlays all of the average cell count rates for each ROI
on one set of axes, and spaces the tick marks equally_to indicate
frame-linear curves.
To restore the matrix ROI, type any keyboard character except the
letter P. Typing P alerts the system that a new plot command is going
to be entered.

7.10

WINDOW COMMANDS (PARTIAL CURVE PLOTTING)

Window commands plot a portion of a curve. The
outlined in Sections 7.10.1 through 7.10.3.

window

commands

are

p
7.10.1

Plot Window

The Plot Window command, (PW) plots a particular number of frames (part
of an entire curve), starting with a specified frame number.

7-26

REGIONS OF INTEREST
Command format:
PW f,n C@)
PW f Q!D

PW ,n

pwGD
where,
f

is an integer indicating the first frame t6 plot.

is an integer indicating the number of frames to plot.

Both f and n are optional. If you omit either parameter from the
command, the program uses the previous value.
If you omit both
parameters; all points are plotted.
You must issue one of
c()mmands can work.

th~ p~ot

commands (PO, PA,PN) before the window

For example, if you type:
PN sG!!)

oq the terminal, the plotted curve looks like the full plot
~igure 7-22.

Figure 7-22
Full Plot

7-27

- 40

shown

100

REGIONS OF INTEREST
If you then type:
PW 1,lO~
on the terminal, the program plots the first 10 frames of data. The 1
represents the starting frame and the. 10 represents the number of
frames to plot. The plot changes to look like the partial plot shown
in Figure 7-23.

Figure 7-23
Partial plot (Window Frames 1-10)
Notice that the program displays only the data from the ROI
in frame
il through frame #10. This area represents the first shaded area in
Figure 7-22. This procedure is known as windowing.
To restore a full plot, type:
PWG!!)
TO restore the matrix ROI, type any keyboard character except the
letter P. Typing P alerts the syst~m that a new plot command is going
to be entered.

7-28

REGIONS OF INTEREST

7.10.2

Plot Forward Window

The Plot Forward Window command (PF) brings the next group of frames
from the specified number of frames to plot and displays this partial
curve on the screen. Internally, the program computes a new f value
by adding the window size n to the previous f value. Type:
PFC§)
on the terminal to bring the next group of frames specified via the Pw
command.
For example, in Figure 7-22 the data of the first 10 frames
is brought to the screen when you type the following commands.
PNC§)
PW 1,10 <ED
. If you then type the PF command, the program brings the next 10 frames
of data (for an ROI plot) to the screen. Thus, the diagram changes as
shown in Figure 7-24.
The display in Figure 7-24
Figure 7-22.

repres~nts

the

second

shaded

area

from

Each time you type the PF command, the next 10 frames are windowed (or
shown on a full scale of the graph). Example:
Command

Effect

PF (§)

Frames 21-30 are brought to the screen.

PFG!!)

Frames 31-40 are brought to
forth.

the

screen,

and

To restore the matrix ROI, type any keyboard character except the
letter P. Typing P alerts the system that a new plot command is going
to be entered.

7-29

REGIONS OF INTEREST

Figure 7-24
Partial Plot (Window Frames 11-20)

7-30

REGIONS OF INTEREST

7.10.3

Plot Backward Window

The Plot Backward Window command (PB) brings the previous group of
frames from the specified number of frames to plot and displays this
partial curve on the screen. Type:
PB G!D
on the terminal to bring the previous group of frames
the PW command.
For example, when you type:

specified

with

plotted.

NOw,

PNG!!)
PW 1,100 Cili)
frames 1 through 100 are plotted.

Next, typing:

PFG!!)
on the terminal causes frames 101 through 200
.typing:

PBG!!)
on the terminal causes frames 1 through 100 to be restored.
Example:
Command
PW,.Ll.O GD
PFU!!..J
PF~

PBC@
PF~

PFGi)
PB G!D

Effect
frames
frames
frames
frames
frames
frames
frames

1-10 are displayed
11-20 are displayed
21-30 are displayed
11-20 are displayed
21-30 are displayed
31-40 are displayed
21-30 are displayed

To restore the matrix and ROI, type any keyboard character except the
letter P. Typing P alerts the system that a new plot command is going
to be entered.

7.10.4

Plotted Averages

When a study contains a large number of frames, the points of a curve
may be crowded together, making the curva difficult to read. This is
especially true in overlaid graphs.
If this should happen, GAMMA-II
can selectively average points when you include a digit n as part of
the argument of any curve-plot command (PN, PO, PA).
The permitted
values of n are 1 through 9,

7-31

REGIONS OF INTEREST
n=l, every point is plotted
n=2, every two points are averaged and plotted
n~3, every three points are averaged and plotted
n=4, every four points are averaged and plotted

where

n=9, every nine points are averaged and plotted
The value n=l is the default for all of the commands.
if you omit n, the program plots every point.
The digit may appear anywhere in the argument.

In other words,

For example:

Command

Effect

PA 3G!)

Every three points of each curve are averaged.
All of the averaged curves are overlaid.

PO BF2 ~

Every two points of
averaged.
Then B
axes.

·7.11
.

4AE G!D

each curve, B and F, are
and F are plotted on the same

Every four points of each
averaged and plotted.

curve,

and

are

TABULAR DATA

,."~

You can;print a table of counts within an ROI for each frame in each
ROI in
dynamic study. If you give the tabular data commands without
arguments, the commands produce output for every defined ROI.
By
specifying ROI identification letters as arguments to the commands,
you command only the tables for those ROls to be printed.

You must specify the total-matrix table, consisting of the total
number of counts in the entire matrix for each frame, by the letter T.
The total-matrix is not printed or punched when you give no argument.

7.11.1

Print Count Data

The Print count Data command (PR) provides you with a tabular list of
counts per frame for each ROI that is listed as an argument. If no
argument is given, all ROIs are printed.
Command format:
PR abc ••• G!D
The tables are prefaced with an identifying header consisting of the
study's index entry, the number of curves to be printed, and the
number of frames in the study. An example of an ROI tabular list is
represented in Figure 7-25.

7-32

REGIONS OF INTEREST

CAYER, 49-06-81,

CAr~rr

I AC, D, 11/15/73

1 CURVES
50 FRAMES IN STUDY

ROI

A CELL

COUNTS PER FRAME

0
12
164
1564
2608
1950
1590
1154
793
675
613
730
850
803
974
751
696
715
574
515
498
486
,444
1472
'438
458
381
423
401
369
355
384
375
400
386
374
402
359
363
410
370
371
361
343
347
343
366
339
325
363

Figure 7-25
ROI Tabular Data (Command: PR A)

7-33

REGIONS OF INTEREST

7.11.2

Punch Count Data

The punch Count Data command CPU} punches
paper tape.

the

count-data

tables

Comma-nd format:
PU abc .•• ~
The format of the count-data tables on paper tape is the ASCII
equivalent of the printed information, except that there is only one
pair of carriage return/line feeds between lines.
For legibility, the
-~program deletes extra blank lines that appear on the terminal from the
punch output.

7.11.:3

Pr int and Punch Count Data

The Print and Punch Count Data command
(PP)
outputs count data
simultaneously on the terminal and onto paper tape. The data are
represented by their respective formats.
Command format:
PP abc ••• ~

7.12

SAVE AREA USE

You can use the save areas to store matrix-plus-ROI information and
dynamic curves.
To save a displayed matrix with its ROIs, type the
following command sequence {from either ROI mode}:
CTRL/X

SM n G!D

When you type CTRL/X, the ROI display disappears and the request
COMMAND:
reappears.
If you type SM n in response to COMMAND:, the
previous matrix-ROI 'display is stored in save area n. You can store
matrices in save areas I through 64.
When the system reads the contents of the save area, it displays the
matrix and ROIs and automatically calls the ROI subset into operation.

7-34

REGIONS OF INTEREST
TO save a set of dynamic-study curves, use the following sequence:
1.

If the curves are on the screen, type anything
restore the matrix-ROI display.

Type CTRL/X

3•

Type SD n (§)

except

When you type SD n in response to the displayed COMMAND:
request, as
described above, the program stores the curve data in save area n.
You may store dynamic curves only in save areas 1 through 9. When the
system reads contents of the save area, it displays the curves as plot
average. At this point, only the commands PN, PA, PO, PU, PR, PW, PF,
PB, and PP are executable. Any other input has tne effect of an RSO
command, restoring the previous matrix display.

7.13

EXIT

To leave an ROI

procedure~ ·type:

CTRL/X
CTRL/X returns to the data-analysis
reappears.

7-35

mode,

and

the

COMMAND: request

CHAPTER 8
SLICING

The operations described in this chapter allow you to examine the data
patterns of slices through the matrix (i.e., horizontal or vertical
strips of varying width). For each slice, the program plots a curve
of the' cell-count distribution.
You can copy the curve data in
tabular form on printed copy, punched tape, or screen display.
In a
dynamic study, once you have selected the slices, you may examine each
frame in sequence. ~New curves are automatically plotted when the new
frame is displayed.
Six of the slice commands, U, D, L, R, M, and J~ are
all
immediate-effect commands.
They require no RETURN terminator and do
not appear on the screen when typed. The remaining commands are all
carriage-return terminated.

8.1

SLICE SELECTION COMMANDS

A slice can be horizontal or vertical and can vary in width from 1 to
9 rows or columns.
On the VTOl, 26 slices can be selected for one
display. On the VSVOl, three slices can be displayed, as well as the
current position.

8.1.1

Horizontal Slice

TO initiate the horizontal slice procedure, type the following command
on the terminal.
58 n(!!D

The argument n is optional and represents the number of rows
width of the slice. If you omit n, the sl.ice is one row.

the

The program is now prepared to accept horizontal slices.
Figure 8-1
(color insert) represents a preparatory display of a horizontal slice.
At the top of the screen is a display of the core-resident matrix.
Directly beneath it are the axes on which the curves are plotted.

8-1

SLICING
On the VSVOl, a cursor appears as a long line through the center of
the matrix. You can now issue immediate-effect commands (U, 0, M, and
J).
(See Sections 8.2 and 8.2.1.) On the VTOl, the cursor is shown
as a small open circle, and it appears to the right of the matrix.
Additional study data (i.e., thresholds, counts, frame number, etc.)
remain on the screen.
The unlabeled axis
(X-axis)
of the plot
represents cell position along the slice. The other axis
(Y-axis),
labeled at two points (four points for the VTOl), plots the number of
counts per cell or group of cells.
The scale of this axis is
determined by the maximum number of counts per cell (CELL CT: MAX) in
the mat~ix. Initially, as shown in Figure 8-1
(color insert), the
scale 'factor is 1.
You can adj ust the scale factor to any desired
value (see Section 8.S.l).

8.1.2

Vertical Slice

To initiate the vertical slice procedure, type the
on the terminal.

following

command

SV n~
The argument n is optional and represents the number of columns of the
width of the slice. If n is omitted, the slice is one column.
The program is now prepared to accept vertical slices.
Figure 8-2
(c6lor insert) represents a preparatory display of a vertical slice.
Notice that the cursor for a vertical slice appears vertically through
the center of the matrix. The curve of the slice is plotted in white
vertically to the right of the matrix.
On the VTOI, the cursor for a vertical slice appears at the bottom
the minified matrix.
You can now issue immediate-effect commands {L, R, M,
Sections 8.2 and 8.2.1.)

and

J}.

of
(See

The unlabeled axis (Y-axis) of the graph plots cell position along the
slice.
The other axis (X-axis), labeled at two points (four points
for the VTOl), plots the number of counts per cell or group of cells.
The scale of this axis is determined by the maximum number of counts
per cell (CELL CT: MAX) in the matrix.
Initially, as shown in Figure
8-2, the scale factor is 1. You can adjust the scale factor to any
desired value (see Section 8.5.1).

8-2

SLICING
8.2

IMMEDIATE-EFFECT SELECTION COMMANDS

The immediate-effect commands move the cursor and mark the position of
the slice.
For greater detail, see Sections 7.2.1 through 7.2.5.
These commands are:
U

Move the cursor up one row.

Move the cursor down one row.

Move the cursor left one column.

. R!
f

Move the cursor right one column.
Jump the cursor 10 cells in the direction of the
U, D, L, or R command.

last

typed

The cursor moves as indicated. Commands U and D are valid only for
horizontal slices, Land R are valid only for vertical slices.
In no
case does 'the cur sor move past the boundar ies of the matr ix in any
direction.

8.2.1

Mark

TO mark a slice, type M with no carriage return. The program draws a
line through the indicated row or column of the matrix and plots a
curve of cell counts along the line of the slice.
(See Figures 8-3
,an'd 8-4 in the color inser t. )

8.3

FRAME SELECTION (DYNAMIC STUDIES ONLY)

You may examine each frame of a dynamic study using the currently
marked slices.
You must press the space bar on the terminal to
advance to the next frame. The next frame in the study is displayed,
and curves are plotted for each slice using the new data.

8.4

STARTING THE SLICE OVER

At any time during the slice procedure, you can change the orientation
(horizontal or vertical)
or the width of the slice by using the
. commands
SH n~
SV nG!)
as previously described. The system erases the existing display,
deleting all curves and slices.
A new display, with new axes and
cursor, appears on the screen.
you can delete curves without changing the o±her conditions using
following ~ommand.

the

Erase
The screen is erased and all curves and marked slices
are deleted.
The preparatory display reappears. The
orientation, slice width,
and scale factor are not
changed.
8-3

SLICING
8.5

SLICE CURVE PLOTS

As soon as you issue the Mark command (M), the program draws a line
through the indicated row or column of the matrix and plots a curve of
cell counts along the line of 'the slice.
Figure 8-3
(color insert)
displays the plots of one three-row ~orizontal slice. Figure 8-4
(color ,insert) displays the plots of three one-column vertical slices.
Each point on the horizontal slice curve in Figure. 8-3 represents the
sum of the three points in that position of the slice. That is, the
first!point of the curve represents the sum of the three points in the
fir~~
column of the horizontal slice. Since the slices in Figure 8-4
are tine column wide, each point on a slice curve represents the number
of counts in that position of the slice.
On the VTOl, the curves are identified by a letter designating
slice. The first slice is A, the second is B, and so on.

the

E~ch marked
slice and its associated curve is identified by a
different color. The current color table determines the color of the
slices. The most currently marked slice is at level 4 of the color
table,
the second most currently marked slice is at level 8, and the
third is at level 12. The color at level 15 always represents the
curve of the cursor.

Since "the most currently marked slice" is at level 4 of the color
table,
the colors of the slices can change. As you mark each new
.slice, the associated colors change. You can mark only three slices
/on the VSVOI (26 on the VTOl).
If you mark a fourth slice, the first
one is lost. As you mark each new slice, the least recently marked
slice is lost. The vertical slice has the same color-coding procedure
as the horizontal slice.

8-4

SLICING

Figure 8-1
Preparatory Display:
Horizontal Slice

t'igure 8-2
preparatory Display:
vertical Slice

Figure 8-3
Hor izontal: Three-Row·
Slice and. Curve

Figure 8-4
Vertical: Three
One-Column Slices
and Curves

8-5

SLICING

Figure 8-5
Scale Factor 1:
Truncated Curve

Figure 8-6
Scale Factor .5:
Truncation Eliminated

Figure 8-7
Scale Factor 1:
Low Contour Curve

Figure 8-8
Scale Factor 2:
Contour Enhanced

8-6

SLICING
8.5.1

Curve Scales

When the program firit draws the axes for a slice curve, the count
axis is labeled at two points, the highest point being n times the
maximum cell count. This point is also the upper
(or rightmost)
boundary of the graph. Thus, the scale of the graph is determined (by
default), by the maximum cell count along the slice.
sometimes,
however~ this default scale is not appropriate.
;

One effect of an inappropriate count-axis scale occurs when points on
the cutve are beyond the maximum cell count (255 or 65,535), which may
result 'when adjacent cells of an n-row (or n-column) slice are added
together.
These points are plotted along the boundary of the curve.
Likewise, at the base of the curve, cell counts below the minimum
plottable level appear on the axis, which is the lower boundary of the
graph. As a result, parts of the curve may have no real meaning.
These curves are said to be truncated.
Another effect of an inappropriate count-axis scale occurs when a
slice through a relatively sparse region of the matrix results in a
~curve with very little contour.
These curves are known as low-contour
curves.
When the scale of the curve is inappropriate, it can be
the Scale Factor command.

altered

with

Is n.nnl
8.5.2

Scale Factor

The Scale Factor command eliminates truncation and low-contour curves
by adjusting the count-axis scale. Type the following command on the
terminal to alter the scale by a factor of n.nn.
s n.nnG!D
The current count-axis scale is divided by the scale factor.
The

scale

factor may range from 0.01 to 9.99.
To
eliminate
expand the scale by using factors less than 1.0. An
example of truncation is shown in Figure 8-5, and a correction of
truncation is shown in Figure 8-6 (color insert).

~runcation,

TO enhance low-contour curves, contract the
greater than 1.0.
Figure 8-7 displays
Figure 8-8 enhances contour.

scale by using factors
a curve with low contour.

You can omit spaces, nonsignificant zeros, and decimal points from the
Scale Factor command. The following forms a~e all acceptable:
S5.3
S9
SO.OS
S.8
S 2

8-7

SLICING
8.6

SLICE TABULAR DATA

You can obtain tabular data on punched tape, printed copy, or screen
display.
The system provides the tabular data for the last defined
slice (VTOI). The cursor plot on the VSVOI
is represented by the
tabular data.
If you desire a complete record, the data must be
printe~ or punched after each slice is matked.

8.6.1

Print Slice Data

The Print Slice Data command (PR) provides you with a table listing
(from the terminal)
of the total number of counts for each cell
position in a slice. A typical output is shown in Figure 8-9.
To
obtain a listing of slice data, type the fol16wing command on the
terminal.
PR G!D
The orientation (HORIZONTAL
_positions are given.

SLICE),

slice

ROW(S) 16

HORIZONTAL SLICE
COL

CNTS

COL

1
2
3

0
0
0
0
1
3
13
17

1·7
18
19

4
5
6

7
8
9
10
11
12
13

14
15
16

20
21
::~~~

24
42
89
86
87
95
89
76

CNTS
54
4~5

46
60
65
90

23
24

25
26

69
38

:L7
9
...)

28
29
~~O
~~:J.

Figure 8-9
Tabular Data

8-8

width

f.J8

.'-

0
0
0

(ROW (S) ) ,

and

SLICING

8.6.2

Punch Slice Data

The Purich Slice Data command (PU) provides you with a table listing
the total counts for each cell position of the slice punched on paper
tape. 'TO obtain a punched table of slice data,
type the following
command on the terminal.
pu~

The data lines are separated by carriage return/line feed
identifying information or column headers are punched.

J.6.3

pairs.

Place Data on Screen

The Place Data on Screen command (PS) provides the same information as
. the Print Slice Data (PR)
command, but displays it on the screen
instead of printing it. To obtain slice data on the screen, type the
following command on the terminal.
PSG!!)
~o

restore the original slice
terminal.

8.7

display,

type

EXIT

TO leave the slice procedure at any time, type:
CTRL/X

8-9

any

character

the

CHAPTER 9
FLOOD CORRECTION

Irregularities in the view-field response of a gamma camera can affect
the accuracy of the data transmitted to an image. GAMMA-II can
compensate for these irregularities by creating a correction matrix
tha~ can correct the displayed or stored patient-study data.
You can acquire a flood study by taking an image of a uniformly
radioactive field. GAMMA-II can then create a correction matrix that
increases the low-response areas and decreases the high-response
areas.
Then, by multiplying each patient image by the correction
matrix, you can compensate for the irregularities in the image due to
poor camera response.
A flood correction has three parts:
1.

Acquiring a flood study (described in Section 4.4)

Converting
matrix

Correcting displayed
correction matrix

the

into

stored

data,

using

Items 2 and 3 are described in this chapter.
commands are carriage-return terminated.

9.1

flood-correction

data

flood-study

the

flood-

All the flood-correction

CREATING A FLOOD-CORRECTION MATRIX

A flood-correction matrix is created only from a flood-study frame or
from a static-study frame with a 64 x 64 word-matrix configuration.
In either case, the settings of the orientation and rotation switches
for the flood study should match those of the study or studies to be
corrected (see Section 9.7.I).
.
A flood-study frame is shown in Figure 9-1.

9-1

FLOOD CORRECTION

Figure 9-1
Flood-Study Matrix
To create a flood-correction matrix, you must
steps.

9.2

perform

the

following

Select a flood study from the patient study index.

If necessary, adjust the display thresholds of the frame.

Type the Flood Correction command (FC).

FLOOD CORRECTION COMMAND

The Flood Correction (Fe) command converts
frame into a flood-correction matrix.

data

from

flood-study

An average cell count is calculated for the whole matrix. A cutoff is
a percentage of this calculated average cell count. Those cells whose
counts are below the cutoff are zeroed, and a new average is
calculated using the remaining cells. The higher the cutoff, the more
an image will be altered by the flood-correction matrix.
9-2

FLOOD CORRECTION
Command format:
FC n,m~
where n is a save area (1-64) and m is the percentage of cutoff from
0-100%~
Either argument, n or m, can be omitted. If n is absent, the
resulting matrix is not stored in a save atea, but remains in core.
If m is omitted, a cutoff of 50% is used. In any case, you must
always type the space between the command and the ~irst argument. The
form FCn,m is not permitted. The following forms are acceptable:
!

Gommand
FC 2,20
FC ,35
FC 4
FC

9.3

Effect
save area 2, cutoff 20%
matrix in core, cutoff 35% (PLEASE NOTICE COMMA!)
save area 4, cutoff 50% by default
matrix in core, cutoff 50%

CONVERTING A FLOOD-STUDY FRAME

The flood-correction program converts the fl~od-study
flood-correction matrix in the following manner.

frame

into

All cells whose counts lie outside the display thresholds are
zeroed.

The average cell count (which in this case is called AVI, for
clarification purposes only) of the remaining nonzero cells
is computed.

All cells below the cutoff, that is, with counts smaller than
m% of AVI, are zeroed. A new average cell count (AV2) of the
nonzero cells now remaining is calculated.

Each of these remaining nonzero cells is converted into a
flood-correction factor by replacing its contents with the
value AV2/CT, where CT is the original number of counts in
the cell.

When the conversion is complete, the correction matrix is displayed
(see Figure 9-2), and if specified by the command, is stored in a save
area.
For further notes on the calculation method, see Section 9.7.

9-3

FLOOD CORRECTION

Figure 9-2
Resulting Flood-Correction Matrix (m=50%)

9.4

ERROR MESSAGES FOR FC COMMAND

Errors resulting from the use of the FC command are signaled by
messages displayed below the word COMMAND:. In each case, the input
is rejected, and the request COMMAND: is redisplayed below the error
message. The error messages and their explanations follow.
INVALID CHARACTER

the

arguments

nand

the

program

detected a character other

than a
RETURN.

digit,

space,

comma,

INVALID SAVE AREA

The argument n was not in the range
1-64.

INVALID %

The argument m was not in the range
1-100.

NO NON-ZERO CELLS

The frame is empty and cannot be
converted.
This error may occur
during the process of creating the
correction matrix, if the cutoff
and averaging computation result in
an empty m-atr ix.

THIS IS A FLOOD CORRECTION MATRIX
An attempt was made to convert what
is already a correction matrix into
such a matrix.
THIS IS NOT A FLOOD STUDY

An attempt was made to convert a
study frame that is neither a flood
9-4

FLOOD CORRECTION
study
nor
the
configuration.

proper

matrix

THIS IS NOT A FLOOD STUDY, DO YOU WISH TO USE IT AS SUCH?
REPLY (YES OR NO) :
Although the selected frame is not
internally identified as a flood
study,
it
has
the
proper
configuration (64x64 word-matrix),
and can be used as such.
You
should type YES to convert it.
ONDEFINED "FC" COMMAND

9.5

A character other than a'space bar
or a RETURN was typed after the
letters FC. A space must always
separate FC and its arguments.

FLOOD-CORRECTING COMMANDS

The correction matrix must be stored in a save area if it is to be
used.
A flood correction can be performed either on a core-resident
frame or on all the frames of a study.
In the latter case, the
original
data
in
the
disk study file are replaced by the
flood-corrected data.
NOTE
If a whole study is flood-corrected, the
original data on the disk is altered.
To prepare to flood-correct a study, select the study to be corrected
from the patient study index.
The flood-correcting commands are
discussed in Sections 9.5.1 and 9.5.2.

9.5.1

Flood-Correct the Displayed )rame

When correcting the displayed frame only, use the correction matrix
stored in save area n. In this case, the disk-resident data are not
affected. The command format used to flood-correct the displayed
frame (core-resident frame) is
FeD n~

If the
where n is the save area holding the correction matrix.
orientation and rotation switch settings of the two matrices do not
match, the program returns with the following message, which is
displayed on the screen.
ROTATION AND ORIENTATION SWITCHES DIFFER
9-5

FLOOD CORRECTION
When the correction is complete, the corrected matrix
and the note FC appears at the bottom of the screen.

9.5.2

displayed,

Flood-Correct a Study

When you are flood-correcting an entire study, the correction matrix
in save area n corrects each frame of the current study. The
resulting data replace the original data in the disk file.
Because
the disk is being altered, you must also confirm the process.
The command format used to flood-correct a study is
FCS n G!!)
where n is the save area holding the flood-correction matrix.
After
you type the FCS command, the selected correction matrix is displayed
with the following question:
IS THIS THE FLOOD CORRECTION MATRIX YOU WISH TO USE?
REPLY (YES OR NO) :
If you type anything but YES, the procedure is terminated.
If you
type YES,
the orientation and rotation switch settings of the two
matrices are compared.
If they match, the process goes to the final
confirmation (see below).
If the two matrices do not match, the
. following message appears:
ORIENTATION AND ROTATION SWITCHES DO NOT MATCH
The system returns to the last procedure in use before the FCS command
was issued.
If the rotation and orientation switches match, the following
is displayed.

message

FINAL CONFIRMATION
REPLY (YES OR NO):
To begin the flood correction, type YES.
Once the flood correction begins, it takes about one second per f~ame.
When the correction is complete, the original core-resident frame is
redisplayed. Note,' however, that the frame is now flood-corrected, as
are all the frames in the study. The note FC appears at the bottom of
the screen as a reminder.

9-6

FLOOD CORRECTION
9.6

ERROR MESSAGES FOR FCS AND FCD COMMANDS

The following error messages may appear when an FCS or FCD command
typed.
ALREADY FLOOD CORRECTED

The c~rrent frame (for FCD command)
or study (for FCS command) has
already been flood-corrected.

CAN'T FLOOD CORRECT A LIST MODE STUDY
FCS command only.
data of a list
flood-corrected.

The unstructured
study cannot be

INVALID CHARACTER

In the argument n, the program
detected a character other than a
digit, space, comma, or RETURN.

INVALID FC COMMAND

A character other than a D or an S
appeared as the third character of
the command ~
(Th i s i s the same
error message described in Section
9.4. It does not appear if thethird character is D, S,space, or
a RETURN.)

INVALID SAVE AREA

The number n was not in
1-64.

NO FLOOD CORR.

the

range

MATRIX IN SAVE AREA
The matrix in the specified save
area
is not a flood-correction
matrix.

NO MATRIX IN SAVE AREA

The specified save area
contain matrix data.

does

not

THIS IS A FLOOD STUDY

FCS command only. An attempt was
made to correct a disk-resident
flood
study,
which
is
not
permitted.
A flood study can be
flood-corrected only by using the
FCD command, since this command
does not destroy the original data.

THIS IS A SAVE ~REA, PLEASE "RSO"
FCS command only. An attempt was
made
to
flood-correct a diskresident study by referencing the
study through a frame read from a
save area. In other words, an FCS
command is invalid whenever the
message SAVE AREA n appears at the
upper right corner of the display.
To rem~ve the message and restore
the previous core-resident frame,
type RSO.

9-7

FLOOD CORRECTION
9.7

NOTES ON FLOOD CORRECTION

The following sections provide more detail for flood correction.
explain
camera
orientation, correction-matrix calculation,
overflow, and the statistical accuracy of flood correction.

9.7.1

They
cell

Orientation Matching

The orientation and rotation switches on the gamma camera determine
the relation between the camera's X- .and Y-axes and those of the
GAMMA-II display.
Because flood correction is dependent on the
camera's orientation, the settings of these switches at the time a
flood study is acquired must match those of the studies to be
corrected.

9.7.2

Correction-Matrix Calculation

In the calculation of the correction factors, the difference between
the averages AVI and AV2 (see Section 9.3) is not significant unless
the cutoff, m, is very large.
The correction factors are stored as l6-bit fixed-point fractions with
the binary point between bits 12 and 13. The size of the factor
limits the maximum correction factor to 7.77774 (octal), or slightly
more than 7.999 (decimal). Therefore, the minimum cutoff must be 13%
because a smaller cutoff results in a maximum factor larger than the
limit (maximum factor x mInImum cutoff = lOO%). Factors equal to or
greater than 8 are set to zero.

9.7.3

Cell Overflow

A source of image
cell-count overflow.

distortion in the flood-corrected
Overflow can occur at two points:

study

During the acquisition of the patient study data

When a cell at or near the maximum count is flood-corrected

The flood-correction routine cannot recognize cells
that
have
overflowed. These cells are treated simply as cases of maximum count.
If such a cell count is multiplied by a correction factor smaller than
1, the resulting count will be too low since the correction process
has no way of knowing by how much the cell overflowed.
Similarly, if a cell count is almost at. a maximum, a correction factor
greater than 1 can result in a corrected count larger than the
maximum, thus causing an overflow. The effect is to distort the data
in areas of the patient study matrix where cell counts are close to
maximum.
Overflow of either sort is not usually a problem with word matrices.
Byte-matrix cells, on the other hand, have a cell capacity of only 255
counts, making overflow quite likely.
Here are a
overflow.

few

ways

reduce

9-8

eliminate

the

possibility

FLOOD CORRECTION
1.

Adjust the gamma camera to reduce irregularities as much as
possible, so that flood-correction factors are all close to
1.

If space is available on the disk, use word matrices for
studies to be flood-corrected, rather than byte matrices.

In dynamic studies, collect data at frame rates high enough
to lessen the possibility of overflow in anyone frame.

A che~k for overflow should be made by flood-correcting a few
individual frames of a study (with FCD) before correcting the entire
disk~resident study (with FCS).

9.7.4

Statistical Accuracy

The accuracy of the flood correcti~n depends on the uniformity of the
radiation source used in the flood-study acquisition. Commercially
available sheet sources are generally uniform within plus or minus 5%.
The statistical accuracy of the flood-study data should be equal to~
or preferably greater than, 5%.
The standard deviation of the cell count is equal to the square root
of cell count. If the cell count is N, the percentage variance, PV,
is defined as:

PV=lOO{IN'/N)
=100/1N
and

1002/{PV) (PV)
= 10,000/{PV) (PV)

The total number of counts required in a flood study is equal to the
number of cells in the matrix times N.
In a flood study, the 64 x 64
matrix contains 4096 cells, but only about half of these are actually
used, so that the total number of counts, NTOT, can be given by:
NTOT = (4096/2) (N)
= 2xl0 7 /(PV) (PV)

where N = 10,000/(PV) (PV)

so that the number NTOT required for a given PV as shown in Table 9-1.
Table 9-1
Total Number of Counts Table

NTOT

10%
5%
2%
1%

200,000
800,000
5,000,0~0

20,000,000

Thus, the minimum desirable number of
800,000.

9-9

counts

flood

study

PART 4
GAMMA-II UTILITIES

CHAPTER

FILE DELETION

CHAPTER

STUDY TRANSFERS

CHAPTER 10
FILE DELETION

The file deletion program is called from the background command table.
it allows you to delete studies from a disk and to squeeze the disk.

D
10.1

FILE DELETION

when studies are no longer needed, you can remove them from the
patient file to release space for new studies. To delete studies,
type the Delete Study (OS) command as follows, where n is an optional
disk unit number.
OS nC§)

Immediately, the program displays the first page of the patient study
. index, with the procedure options at the bottom (see Figure 10-1).
You may delete any or all of the studies on the page.
Type ALL to
delete all the studies on the page.

10-1

FILE DELETION

Figure 10-1
Patient Study Index for File Deletion
To delete selected studies, type the
commas and terminated by a RETURN.

index

numbers,

separated

Examples:
5 G!!)

Study 5 is to be deleted.

l2,3,7G!D

Studies 12,3,7 are to be deleted.

ALLG!!)

All studies on the displayed page are to
be deleted.

After you have made your selection,
selected entries are redisplayed
10-2).

10-2

the index is erased, and the
for your verification {see Figure

FILE DELETION

Figure 10-2
Verification Frame
If you type anything but YES, the selection is ignored, and the page
of the index is redisplayed. No deletions take place.
If you answer
YES, the following message appears while the file is being deleted.
DELETIONS UNDER WAY
After you have deleted the selected studies, the program displays the
next page of the index when you type N for the next page in response
to:
TYPE N FOR THE NEXT PAGE
If you do not wish to delete any more files or if you have verified
and deleted the last page, type RETURN. At this point the following
message appears:
DO YOU WISH TO SQUEEZE THE DISK?
REPLY YES OR NO:
If you type anything but
command table.

YES,

GAMMA-II

returns

the

background

If you reply YES and the foreground is at the foreground command table
(or is absent), the following appears on the display and on the
console terminal:
DISK SQUEEZE UNDERWAY, PLEASE WAIT •••.
If the program squeezes the disk while the foreground is present, the
foreground program is automatically stopped while the disk is being
10-3

FILE DELETION
squeezed. After the disk is squeezed, both
and background are a~tomatically rebooted.

the

GAMMA-II

foreground

If the foreground is not at the foreground command table when
request the disk to be squeezed, the following message appears:

you

FGAMMA IS BUSY
DISK CAN'T BE SQUE~ZED
TYPE A CARRIAGE RETURN TO EXIT
In this case, you must exit to the background command table. You can
squeeze the disk later, when the foreground is idle, by using the OS
command and choosing S to squeeze the disk (see Section 10.2).

10.2

SQUEEZING A DISK

The Study Deletion program can also be used to squeeze a disk without
--del-eting any studies. _.. Choose the S option to squeeze the disk.
If the foreground is not at the foreground command table when
request the disk to be squeezed, the following message appears:

you

FGAMMA IS BUSY
DISK CAN'T BE SQUEEZED
TYPE A CARRIAGE RETURN TO EXIT
If the disk squeeze can be done (i.e., the foreground is at the
foreground command table or is absent) the following message appears
on the display and on the console terminal:
DISK SQUEEZE UNDERWAY, PLEASE WAIT ••••
If the disk is squeezed while the foreground is present, the
foreground program is automatically stopped while the disk is being
squeezed. After the disk is squeezed, both the foreground and
background are automatically rebooted.

10-4

CHAPTER 11
STUDY TRANSFERS

The GAMMA-II Transfer Study program transfers GAMMA-II patient studies
between any RT-II devices that have directories. Because magnetic
tapes do not have RT-II directories, they are treated as special
cases.
The Transfer Study program runs only as a background GAMMA-II program.
--It--is called from the background command table via the TS (Transfer
Study) command. When you request the Transfer Study program, you must
enter the source (from) and destination (to) devices. After you have
entered the devices, you select the transfer of studies analogous to
the GAMMA-II Study Deletion program (see Chapter 10).

11.1

TRANSFER STUDY COMMAND

The Transfer Study program is called from the background
table. Type the following command on the terminal.

command

TSG!!)
The optional disk unit number
(n), which appears in many of the
commands, is ignored by the Transfer Study program. Once the Transfer
Study command has been issued, a list of commonly used RT-ll device
mnemonics appear on the screen.
Following is a description of each device and its associated
name:
SY
RK

MT
DM
DX

System device
RK05 disk pack
Magnetic tape

mnemonic

RK06

Floppy disk

11-1

STUDY TRANSFERS

NOTE
The Transfer Study program does not
support cassettes.
Use the RT-ll COpy
command or the PIP utility program to
transfer a study to cassettes.
The next line asks you to enter a source-device
number followed by a carriage return.

mnemonic

and

unit

PLEASE ENTER THE SOURCE DEVICE
The mnemonic device name and unit number are optional.
•

If· the device mnemonic and the uni t number are not specified,
DK (the device from which the system is normally booted) is
the default source device.

•

If only a device mnemonic is specified but no unit
null is the default unit number.

number,

•

If only a unit number is specified but no device mnemonic,
(system device) is the default source device.

Examples:

G"D

RK~

Ie§)
DXO~

(OK:
(RK:
(SYl:
(dx:

System device from which RT-ll is booted)
disk pack on unit 0)
System device on unit 1)
Floppy disk on unit 0)

If you enter an unacceptable device mnemonic
following error message appears on the screen:

unit

number,

the

ILLEGAL RESPONSE, PLEASE TRY AGAIN
If the device is not a file-structured device
(e.g., line printer,
high-speed reader), the following message appears on the screen:
THE SOURCE (DESTINATION) DEVICE IS ILLEGAL
NOT A FILE STRUCTURED DEVICE, PLEASE TRY AGAIN
The next line asks you to enter a destination-device mnemonic and unit
number followed by a carriage return.
PLEASE ENTER THE DESTINATION DEVICE
Both name and number are optional. The same method for
source device can be used to define a destination device.

defining

If you enter an unacceptable device mnemonic or unit number for a
destination device, the same error message appears; however, both
source device and destination device must be re-entered.
Also, if two devices without directories (for example, two magnetic
tapes)
have been specified, the following error message appears
immediately after you have specified the second magnetic tape:
MAGTAPE BOTH SOURCE AND DESTINATION DEVICE!

11-2

STUDY TRANSFERS
A device with a directory must be entered as either the source or
destination device.
Once the system has accepted legal souroe and
destination devices," the following message appears on the screen.
READY THE DEVICES TO START THE TRANSFER
TYPE RETURN TO BEGIN
For example, if a device has been specified as a source or destination
device and there is no device on the system, or the device unit is not
ready, the following message appears on the screen.
DEVICE NOT READY!
THE DEVICE IS---, READY IT FOR TRANSFER
TYPE RETURN TO BEGIN
When the devices are ready, page 1 of the patient study index from the
source device is displayed.
NOTE
Magnetic tapes do not display the index
because they are not RT-ll devices that
have directories. See Section 11.3.
The same op~ions that are available with study deletion
analysis are available with study transfers. These are:

and

data

SELECT STUDIES TO BE TRANSFERRED BY ENTERING THE INDEX
NUMBERS
TYPE P TO PRINT THE INDEX
TYPE F TO DISPLAY THE RT-ll FILENAMES
TYPE N FOR THE NEXT PAGE OF THE INDEX
TYPE ALL TO TRANSFER ALL STUDIES ON THE PAGE
The studies selected for transfer must be on the displayed page.
If
you enter duplicate entries, the first entry is transferred and the
second is ignored.
If you enter an illegal number
(i.e., one that
does not exist), the following error message appears on the screen.
ILLEGAL STUDY NUMBER
Typing P provides you with a hard-copy output of the patient index.
Typing F displays the patient index files with their associated RT-ll
file names. An example of this display is shown in Figure 11-1.

11-3

STUDY TRANSFERS

Figure 11-1
Patient Index File
Typing N displays the next page of the index (that is, patient studies
13-24).
Examples for transferring patient studies are:
1,2,7,9@)
2,lO,5G!!)
4G!!)
After the studies have been selected, the index line of each study to
be transferred is displayed. At this point, you are asked to verify
the transfer of studies by typing YES RETURN. Any response other than
YES causes the index to be redisplayed, with no transfer taking place.
If your response is YES to the verification question, the destination
device is readied for the transfer.
The studies are transferred
individually in the order you specified. If there is no room on the
destination device for one of the source files, that particular
patient study index line is displayed and you are given the following
option:
THERE IS NOT ENOUGH ROOM FOR THE FILE
ON THE DESTINATION DEVICE
THE FILE IS xxxx BLOCKS LONG
.THE DESTINATION DEVICE ONLY HAS xxx BLOCKS LEFT
DO YOU WANT TO TRY TO TRANSFER THE NEXT FILE?
TYPE YES TO CONTINUE
This message gives the size of the file to be transferred
amount of free space available in the destination device.
11-4

and

the

STUDY TRANSFERS
At this point, the next study for transfer is scanned to see if it can
fit on. the destination device. If the study fits on the remaining
space on the destination device,
it is transferred.
If not, the
option line appears once more on the screen.
NOTE
By using the monitor SQUEEZE command to
squeeze the destination device, it may
be possible to complete the transfer of
the patient files on the source device.
If anything but YES is typed on the terminal in response
option, the system returns to the background command table.

11.·2

the

MAGNETIC TAPE AS A SOURCE DEVICE

~agnetic

tapes as source devices are treated as special cases because
they do not have RT-ll directories. If a magnetic tape is specified
as a source device, no index is displayed.
Instead, you are given
three alternatives to transfer studies. These are:
TYPE

1
2
3

TO RECEIVE A HARD COpy OF PATIENT INDEX
SEQUENTIALLY CHOOSE FILES TO BE TRANSFERRED
SELECTIVELY CHOOSE INDEX NUMBER

If you type 1, the program scans the magnetic tape, lists a hard copy
of the patient index on the terminal, and displays the first 12
patient studies on the screen.
(If more than 12 patient studies exist
on a magnetic tape, the screen erases and displays patients 13-24 as
the next display.) An example of the hard copy is represented in
Figure 11-2.

11-5

STUDY TRANSFERS
5/23/76
INDEX TO PATIENT STUDIES
1 JOHN DOE :1:3, 25, LIVER/SPLEEN, S, 2/20/74
12 JOHN DOE :1=4" 12-43-173, VENTRICULES, S, 24-07-75
3 JOHN DOE :JI:~.:j , 751183, PL.CHOROIDES, S, 11-6-75
4 ~JC)HN [tOE *6, 75 1183, PL.CHOROIDES, S, 11-06/75
Figure 11-2
Magnetic Tape Study Index
Typing 2 displays the index line of the first file on
the system asks the following questions:

the

tape,

and

DO YOU WISH TO TRANSFER THIS FILE?
TYPE

YES
NO
RETURN
R

DIGIT

TO TRANSFER THIS FILE
TO CONTINUE TO NEXT FILE
TO CONTINUE TO NEXT FILE
TO REWIND TAPE AND START AGAIN
TO SKIP TO THAT FILE INDEX NUMBER
(ONLY IN SINGLE STEP MODE)

If you type NO or press RETURN,
the next patient index line is
displayed and the same questions are asked. This procedure allows you
to step through the tape, a single study at a time, and transfers only
those files that you wish to transfer.
If you type a number, the program skips to that study on the tape and
the index line with options. Thus, if you know that a study
is further down the tape, you can have the program skip ahead quickly.
If youi enter a patient index number with a value less than the number
displayed, the following message appears on the screen.

d~splays

ILLEGAL RESPONSE
REPLY:
Answer the REPLY with an R (to rewind) or with the new index number.
Typing 3 (selectively choose
message on the screen.

index

11-6

number)

displays

the

following

STUDY TRANSFERS
SELECTIVE STEP MODE
CHOOSE THE INDEX NUMBERS YOU WISH TO DISPLAY
(MAXIMUM OF 20)
You may enter the patient index number in any order with a maximum
20
numbers.
The program automatically sorts these numbers
ascending order. For example, when you type:

of
in

5,10,3,7,15 ~
the system sorts the numbers (3,5,7,10,15) and ignores any duplicate
entries.
The program then scans the tape and displays the index line
of each study along with its transfer options. Thus, patient index 3
is displayed on the screen with the same options as provided in the
sequential mode.
NOTE
To leave selective mode, enter R or
complete the list of studies chosen for
transfer.

11.2.1
~if

Non-GAMMA-ll Files on Magnetic Tape

a magnetic tape contains files other than GAMMA-II patient
files are identified by the following index line.

files,

thes~

XXX NOT A GAMMA FILE
You cannot transfer such files.

11.2.2

Magnetic Tape as a Destination Device

When you use a magnetic tape as a destination device, a hard-copy
index of patient studies is automatically printed on the terminal as
the program moves to the end of the tape. As each file is output to
the tape, the patient index line is also printed. Thus, whenever
studies are added to the tape, a new hard copy of the index is
printed. If you do not want this copy printed out, type a CTRL/O when
the printing begins.
When you use a magnetic tape as a destination device, device-full
conditions are not detected until the actual transfers take place.
Thus, if the magnetic tape fills up, the index line of the offending
study is displayed, the output file is deleted and the following
message appears:
OUTPUT ERROR I!!
MAGTAPE HIT END OF TAPE MARK
FILE DELETED!
PROGRAM NOW CONTINUED:

(TYPE RETURN)

The background command table is now displayed.

11-7

STUDY TRANSFERS
11.3

ERROR PROCESSING

The following
transfers.

11.3.1

section~

describe errors that

can

occur

during

study

Input Errors

If an error occurs in reading the administrative block of a file, that
file is immediately skipped, you are told of the error, and control is
passed to the next file to be transferred.
If any other input error for the source device occurs, the index line
of the current study is displayed and you are asked if you wish to
ignore the errors. If the answer is YES, the error is ignored.
If
you answer anything else, the output file is purged and transfer of
the next study begins. If an input error occurs and you choose to
ignore the error and continue the transfer, the integrity of the
transferred data cannot be guaranteed.

11.3.2

Magnetic Tape Input Errors

Any magnetic tape input error causes the transfer of data to fail.
The RT-ll magnetic tape handler, upon receiving a hard error (an error
that prevents the system from continuing operation) automatically
rewinds the tape. Thus, the Transfer Study program cannot ignore the
error and proceed with the transfer. The progr~ repositions the tape
at the start of the file and gives you the following options:
TYPE

1
2
3

SKIP TO THE NEXT FIL£
REWIND THE TAPE AND RESTART
SKIP TO A NUMBERED FILE
(SINGLE MODE ONLY)
NOTE
Deleted files on magnetic tape are not
physically removed, and they cause input
errors if their position on the tape is
referenced
by
the
Transfer
Study
program.

11.3.3

Output Errors

If an error occurs on the output (destination) device,' the program
displays the index line of the current study, and attempts to purge
the current output file. No more transfers are attempted.

11.3.4

Other I/O Errors

Any other types of errors (e.g., fetching handlers, opening or closing
files, etc.) are reported as fatal errors. Control returns to the
background command table after such errors.

11-8

APPENDIX A
LOADING GAMMA-II FOR THE SINGLE AND BACKGROUND USERS ON AN 11/40

The operating procedures for loading and starting RT-ll and GAMMA-II
with RK05 disks are outlined below. The disk loading procedure (steps
4 through 7) is for an RK05 disk. To load RK06 disks, see Appendix C.
CAUTION
Whenever changing system disks, you MUST
start the system again.
If you do not
start the system again, disk destruction
results.

Turn computer console lock power switch clockwise to
position.

the

Turn the LINE/OFF/LOCAL switch on the terminal to be used
LINE.

Set the ENABLE/HALT switch on the PDP-II console to HALT.

Pull the RK05 disk drive (unit #0) door down and place the
removable disk cartridge in the disk drive with the metal
ring on the bottom of the cartridge facing down.

Close the RK05 disk drive door.

Set the LOAD/RUN switch on the RK05 disk drive controller
RUN.

Make sure that the disk controller WRITE PROTECT light is
off. If the light is not off, press the WRITE PROTECT switch
once. This places the system in the WRITE ENABLE position.

When the disk READY light comes on, set the PDP-II processor
SWITCH REGISTER to 773100
(octal)
as indicated in the
following diagram. A (down-arrow) means push down on the
switch and an
(up-arrow) means push up on the switch.

15114

12111

91 8
t ,

,
7

press the processor LOAD ADDR switch down.
This
773100 (octal) as the starting address in the system.

A-l

,,
1

places

LOADING GAMMA-lION AN 11/40
10.

set the PDP-II processor SWITCH REGISTER to 777406 (octal) as
follows:
117

15 ) 14

12 ) 11

t t t

91 8

6 15

t !

t t

312
~

11.

Raise the PDP-II ENABLE/HALT switch to ENABLE.

12.

Press the PDP-II processor START switch down.
RT-l1 from the disk.

13.

Four numbers are printed on the terminal followed by a $.

14.

Type DK followed by a carriage return for RK05 disks.
DM followed by a carriage return for RK06 disks.

15.

The system responds with the version number of RT-l1.

This calls

The system then types:
PLEASE ENTER
TODAY'S DATE:
and waits for you to enter the current date in the form
dd-mmm-yy
followed by the RETURN key, where dd-mmm-yy is the day,
month, and year to be entered. dd is a decimal number in the
range 1-31; mmm is the first three characters of the name of
the month, and yy is a decimal number in the range 73-99.
Example:
To enter May 25, 1977 as the current
type

date

for

the

system,

25-MAY-77~

If the date is entered in an incorrect format, the message is
repeated.
16.

The system then responds with the prompt
CURRENT TIME:
and waits for you to respond in the form
hh:mm:ss
or
hh:mm
or
hh
followed by a RETURN, where
minute, and second.
The
seconds past midnight.

A-2

hrr:mm:ss
time is

represents the hour,
in hours, minutes, and

LOADING GAMMA-lION AN 11/40
Example:
CURRENT TIME:

l4:48:32~

sets the internal clock to
seconds.

and

17.

The system'responds with the background command table on
color display (or VTOl).

the

18.

The background is now loaded

A-3

~nd

hours,

running.

minutes,

APPENDIX B
LOADING GAMMA-II FOR THE FOREGROUND/BACKGROUND USERS ON AN 11/40

The operating procedures for loading and starting RT-Il and GAMMA-II
are outlined below. The disk loading procedure (steps 4 through 7) is
for an RK05 disk. To load RK06 disks, see Appendix C.
CAUTION
Whenever changing system disks, you MUST
start the system again.
If you do not
start the system again, disk destruction
can result.

Turn the computer console lock power switch clockwise to
ON position.

Turn the LINE/OFF/LOCAL switch on the terminal to be used to
LINE.
(Set to REMOTE if an LA30.) Also press the ON/OFF
switch on the VT05 or VT52 to ON.

Set the ENABLE/HALT switch on the PDP-II console to halt.

Pull the RK05 disk drive (unit #0) door down and place the
removable disk cartridge in the disk drive with the metal
ring on the bottom of the cartridge facing down.

Close the RK05 disk drive door.

Set the LOAD/RUN switch on the RK05 disk drive controller
RUN.

Make sure that the disk controller WRITE PROTECT light is
off. If the light is not off, press the WRITE PROTECT switch
once. This places the system in the WRITE ENABLE position.

When the disk READY light comes on, set the PDP-II processor
SWITCH REGISTER to 773100
(octal)
as indicated in the
following diagram. A I (down-arrow) means push down on the
switch and an t (up-arrow) means pus~ up on the switch.
16

t
9.

15 1 14

12111
~

Press the processor LOAD ADDR switch down. This will
773100 (octal) as the starting address in the system.

B-1

the

, ,I
1

place

LOADING GAMMA-II FIB ON AN 11/40
10.

Set the PDP-II processor SWITCH REGISTER to 777406 (octal) as
follows:
117

151 14

12111

91 8

t tI t

7
~

61 5

4
~

t t

01
~

This calls

31 2
~

11.

Raise the PDP-II ENABLE/HALT switch to ENABLE.

12.

Press the PDP-II processor START switch down.
RT-ll from the disk.

13.

Four numbers are printed on the terminal followed by a $.

14.

Type OK followed by a carriage return for RK05 disks.
DM followed by a carriage return for RK06 disks.

15.

The system responds with the version number of RT-ll.

Type

The system then types
PLEASE ENTER
TODAY'S DATE:
and waits for you to enter the current date in the form
dd-mmm-yy
followed by th~ RETURN key, where dd-mmm-yy is the day,
month, and year to be entered. dd is a decimal number in the
range l-3l~ mmm is the first three characters of the name of
the month, and yy is a decimal number in the range 73-99.
Example:
If you wish to enter May 25, 1977 as the current date for the
system, type
25-MAY-77G!D
If the date is entered in an incorrect format, the message is
repeated.
16.

The system then responds with the prompt
CURRENT TIME:
and waits for you to respond in the form
hh:mmm:ss
or
hh:mm
or
hh
followed by a RETURN, where
minute, and second.
The
·seconds past midnight.

B-2

hh:mm:ss
time is

represents the hour,
in hours, minutes, and

LOADING GAMMA-II F/s ON AN 11/40
Example:
CURRENT TIME:

l6:48:32~

sets the internal clock to
seconds.
17.

hours,

minutes,

and

There is 'a slight pause, and the system responds
by
presenting the foreground command table on the VT52 (see
Section 3.2.1). The following message is printed on the
console:
FGAMMA LOADED AND RUNNING

18.

The system now responds with the background command table
the color display (or VTOl).
(See Section 3.1.1.)

19.

Both the background and foreground GAMMA-II programs are
.loaded and running.

now

B-3

APPENDIX C
LOADING AN RK06K CARTRIDGE
1. Prepare an RK06K cartridge for loading as follows:

2. Place the cartridge in the drive shroud with the handle
recess facing the rear of the machine (Figure 3).

a. Lift the cartridge by grasping the handle with the
right hand.

3. Rotate the cartridge a few -degrees clockwise and
counter-clockwise to ensure that it is properly seated
within the shroud .

b. Support the cartridge from underneath with the
.Ieft hand (Figure J).

4. Gently lower the handle to a horizontal position to
engage the drive spindle (Figure 4).

c. Lower the handle and push the handle slide to
the left with the thumb of the right hand
(Figure 1).

5. Place the protection cover on top of the cartridge.
6. Carefully close the drive lid.

d. Raise the handle to its full upright position to
separate the cartridge from the protection cover
(Figure 2).

Figure 1

Figure 3

Figure 2

Figure 4

C-l

APPENDIX D
SUMMARY OF COMMANDS

0.1

CONTROL COMMANDS

All GAMMA-II functions are carried out or initiated in response to
commands typed on the keyboard. The principal functions are called
into operation by the Control Commands, which are of the form:
AS
AF
AP
SP
MP
DP
S8

AD
CA
DS
TS
PM

0.1.1

General-Purpose GAMMA-II Control Commands
CTRL/X
CTRL/Z

0.1.2

Return GAMMA-II to previous functional level
Return GAMMA-II to background command table

GAMMA-II Editing Commands
DELETE
CTRL/U
ESC
CTRL/E

D.l.3

Set up and acquire patient study
Set up and acquire flood study
Acquire study using predefined study
Set up a predefined study
Modify a predefined study
Delete a predefined study
GAMMA-II system summary
Data analysis and review (background only)
Continue analysis (background only)
Delete patient studies (background only)
Transfer study (background only)
Patient monitor (background only)

. Delete character (same as RUBOUT)
Delete line
Edit page (same as ALT)
'Edit and redisplay page

RT-ll Monitor Commands
CTRL/C
CTRL/F
CTRL/B
CTRL/O
CTRL/S, CTRL/Q

Return control from GAMMA-II to monitor
Direct terminal input to foreground job
Reverse CTRL/F
Inhibit output from printing or displaying
Suspend, reinstate output to terminal

D-I

SUMMARY OF COMMANDS
D.2

DATA ACQUISITION COMMANDS

The entire procedure is controlled from the keyboard, in response to
questions, instructions, or choices appearing on the display screen.

CTRL/R
CTRL/Z
CTRL/X

D.3

Restart a static frame
Terminate the study early
Terminate the study early

DATA ANALYSIS COMMANDS
I

procedures include display options, mathematical operations, and
analytical tools for working with the collected data of study. These
functions are summarized below.
CTRL/N

~
.G)

BE
BK n

DI
DM n
10

DN
IC f,s,n
ICF f,s,n
OX
DP

ND
EC
NC
TE
S9

RO n

TV n
TH n

D.3.1

No room for COMMAND; clear screen
Restore current frame (after study summary)
Display next frame
Restore first frame and initial conditions
Backspace n frames
Skip forward n ~rames
Display matr ix, _normal size
Display matrix, minified
Display isometrics
Display normal
Isocontour map
Iscontour fill
Display index
Display patient data
No display; multiple command lines
Echo keyboard on printer
No echo
Display text
Nine-point smooth
Rotate data
Translate matrix vertically
Translate matrix horizontally

Color Display Commands

The commands described in this section apply only to the color
display.
These
commands describe the color tables and their
functions, the color table editor, interpolated displays, and dual
full
size
displays.
These commands are all carriage return
termina~ed.

BW
CL
DL
NL
CT n
ST n
CL n,rgb
ET n
Z

C n, rgb
I n,rgb
D n
S n
G n

From color" to black and white
From black and white to color
Display an intensity scale bar
Remove the intensity scale bar
Retrieve a color table
Save a color table
Change a color level
Edit a color table
Zero a color table
Change a color element
Insert a color element
Delete a color level
Save an edited color" table
Get a color table
D-2

SUMMARY OF COMMANDS
Print color table
Display Ramp
Display matrix using current color table
M
Exit color table editor
G!!) , CTRL/X
Interpolate a display
IT
Turn off an interpolated display
NT
Blow up (increas~) the size of the display
BU
Return display to normal size
NB
Load a dual display buffer
LD
Load and display a dual image
LD n
Display the contents of a dual display
DU
Overlay the contents of two display buffers
DO
Display a single image
NU
Swap the dual displays
SW
Display 8 minified images
08
Display 16 minified images
016
Interpolate display twice
IT2
P

0.3.2

Frame Algebra Commands

The Frame Algebra commands include operations to add, subtract, or
mUltiply by a constant: complement a matrix to obtain a "negative"
image: combine frames arithmetically.
AO n
CA n
CA -n
CM nn.nn
EX
NX
FA (exp)
FOB n/m
FDL n/m
NI
SA (exp)
SOB n/m
SOL n/m

0.3.3

Consecutive add
Constant add
Constant subtract
Constant multiply
Expand data, byte-to-word
No data expansion
Frame arithmetic
Frame divide, high
Frame divide, low
Negate image
Save area arithmetic
Save area divide, high
Save area divide, low

Thresholding Commands

Threshold adjustment is used to enhance contrast in particular areas
of the matrix or to eliminate unwanted background noise. The commands
are:
LT m,n
UT m,n
IS w,y
W
X
Y
Z
N

LTN,UTN,ISN
UM

Set lower threshold and step size
Set upper threshold and step size
Set isocount band
Raise LT one step
Lower LT one step
Lower UT one step
Raise UT one step
Raise isocount band (step=UT-LT)
Lower isocount band (step=UT-LT)
Set threshold, no enhancement
Set upper threshold display switch
Clear upper threshold display switch

The W, X, Y, Z, N, and 0 threshold-adjusting
for both enhancement and no enhancement.

0-3

commands

are

effective

SUMMARY OF COMMANDS
D.3.4

Dynamic Playback Commands

The commands described in this section apply only to the color
display.
These commands allow you to play back patient studies in a
movie-like manner. The speed and direction of the playback can be
controlled by a joystick, preset to a specified rate, or controlled
manually by using the terminal keyboard. These commands are:
Initialize a playback buffer
Delete a playback buffer
store an image in a playback
buffer
Display a playback buffer
Color display
Black-and-white display
Blow-up display
Normal size display
Timed mode
Manual mode
Joystick mode
Switch direction
Exit playback
Playback merge

PSI name,unit,n,r,max,min
PBD name,unit
~BS
I

PB name,unit
C
B
U
N

T
M
J

CTRL/X

PBM

D.3.5

Regular Region of Interest Commands

T.he Region of Interest (ROI) commands define areas of varying shape
'and allow you to examine the data within them. In Dynamic studies,
curves can be derived from the data in these regions, in each frame of,
the study (see Chapter 6).
RI

Enter regular ROI procedure

The following regular ROI commands are immediate mode commands
no carriage return is required).
U
D
L
R

J
M

S a
K

G!D
CB
CTRL/X

D.3.6

(i.e.,

Move cursor up one cell
Move cursor down one cell
Move cursor left one cell

Move cursor right one cell
Move cursor 10 cells in last direction
Mark cursor location
Define ROI with same shape and size as last one
Kill last marked point
Restore original frame
Display next frame
Display previous frame
Exit regions-of~interest mode

Irregular Region of Interest Commands

Areas of any shape or size, within the boun~ries
defined as irregular ROls.
IR

Enter irregular ROI procedure

D-4

matrix,

are

SUMMARY OF COMMANDS
Irregular ROIs may be defined
mode-setting commands. These are:
M

<ED

CTRL/X
C

F
B

I
K

Q
V

D.3.7

means

immediate-effect

Mark ROI
Restore original frame
Display next frame
Display previous frame
Exit ROI
Circumference mode
Fill mode
Boundary display
Interior display
Switch mode from marking to unmarking ROI (VSVOI
only)
Switch mode from unmarking to marking ROI (VSVOI
only)
Blow up a quadrant {VSVOI only}
Use threshold levels to mark ROI

Dynamic Curve Commands

The following dynamic curve commands work from within the ROI mode.
They work for both regular and irregular ROIs. They are carriage
return terminated.
T n

E abc
PN abc
PO abc
PA abc
PR abc
PU abc
PP abc
PNM abc
PAM abc
POM abc
PW f,n
PF
PB
. CTRL/X

D.3.8

Step through study
Erase ROIs
plot dynamic curves, normal
Plot dynamic curves, overlaid
Plot averaged curves, overlaid
Print tabular data
Punch tabular data
Print and punch simultaneously
Plot normal frame linear curve
Plot average frame linear curve
Plot overlay frame linear curve
Plot window
Plot window forward
plot window backward

Exit Plot

Save Area Commands

Save areas are disk storage areas used to save data. They facilitate
arithmetic operations between frames, including frames from different
studies, and.can be used to store curves derived from regions of
interest in dynamic studies. The save areas are also used to transmit
data between GAMMA-II and any BASIC programs you may be using.
RR n
RS n
SD n
SM n
DS n
SA (exp)

Read ROIs from save area n (regions only)
Read data from save area n (matrix and regions)
Save dynamic curve data in save area n
Save matrix data in save area n
Delete save area
Save area arithmetic (access save area excluding
ROIs)

D-5

SUMMARY OF COMMANDS
0.3.9

Macro Commands

The data analysis program has a resident macro buffer for the current
macro that you are using.
Macro facilities of the data analysis
program allow you to create, edit, execute, save, and retrieve macro
files. The macro commands are all carriage return terminated.
MC filename
ME
ML filename
MR filename,n
MS filename
MD filename
MX
EL n
II text

Create a macro
Edit the contents of a macro buffer
Load a macro buffer
Execute or run a macro
Save the current contents of a macro buffer
Delete a macro file from the system device
Stop execution
Execute one line of a macro buffer
Print text as a comment
Immediate mode input

The macro editor commands are:
Append
Display edited macro
Replace line n
Edit, store macro, exit
Exit immediately
Print edits on console

o
R n
C§:)

CTRL/X
P

D~3.l0
,c.

Slice Commands

For each slice, a curve of the cell count distribution is plotted.
The curve data may be recovered in tabular form on printed copy,
punched tape, or screen display. In a dynamic study, once the slices
have been selected each frame may be examined in sequence. The slice
commands are all carriage return terminated.
SH n
sv n
S n.nn
E

Horizontal slice of width n
vertical slice of width n
Scale factor
Erase definition

Six of the Slice commands, U, D, L, R, M, and J
are
all
immediate-effect commands (see Region of Interest Commands, section
D.3.sf.
Tabular data is provided for the last defined slice.
are all carriage return ·terminated.
PR
PU
PS

0.3.11

These

commands

Print slice data
Punch slice data
Place data on screen

Flood Correction Commands

Irregularities in the view-field response of a scintillation camera
may affect the accuracy of the data transmitted to the AID Converter.
These irregularities can be compensated for by using the following
flood-correction commands:
FC n,m
FCD n
FCS n

Create a flood correction matrix
Flood-correct the displayed frame
Flood-correct a study
0-6

SUMMARY OF COMMANDS
0.3.12

Dual Isotopes Commands

A dual-isotope study is identified by the letter A or B, wnich appears
after the displayed frame number. For most analysis procedures, only
one isotope at a time is examined: the study is treated as if it were
a single-isotope study.
The isotope is selected by the follo~ing
commands:
Display isotope A
Display isotope B
Exchange isotopes
Display dual, miniature

IA
IB
IX
DD

0.3.13

List Mode Command

Data that are collected in a list study are structured, or framed, in
one of five matrix configurations. The command to display list study
frames is carriage ~eturn terminated.
Recall framing routine

0.3.14

Comment Editor Commands

The Comment Editor commands allow you to edit or add to existing text,
f'-or insert commentary not previously included.

Call comment editor

The comment editor commands are:
A

R n

C§)

CTRL/X
P

0.3.15

Append comments
Display edited text
Replace line n
Edit and store text, exit
Exit immediately
Print edits on console

Language Execution Commands

There are some commands that run high-level language programs directly
from the GAMMA-II Data Analysis program without having to exit from
GAMMA-II and type RT-ll commands. These commands are all carriage
return terminated.
BA
FO
RU

device:filename.ext
device:filename.ext
device:filename.ext

D-7

Run a BASIC program
Run a FOCAL program
Run a FORTRAN program (or
.SAV file)

any

APPENDIX E
GAMMA-II COMMANDS IN ALPHABETICAL ORDER

Below are the GAMMA-II commands in
aphabetical
order.
Each
explanation of a command is followed by a description in parentheses.
This description tells from which function in GAMMA-II this command
can be called. For example,
AD

Analyze data (command table)

means that this form of the AD command can be called only
GAMMA-II command table. The other form of the AD command,
AD n

AD
AD n
AF
ALT
AP
AS

the

Add n frames to core-resident frame (frame algebra)

can only be used in frame algebra
analysis.
A

from

that

can

called

during

data

Append (comment editor)
Switch mode from marking to unmarking (irregular ROI)
Analyze Data (command table)
Add n frames to the core resident frame (frame
alegbra)
Set up and acquire a flood study (command table)
See <ESC>
Acquire a predefined study (command table)
Set up and acquire a study (command table)

Switch from color to black and white (playback)

Boundary display (ROI)

BA dev:filename Run BASIC (data analysis)
Return to beginning of study (data analysis)
BE
Skip backwards n frames (data analysis)
BK n
Blow up an image (data analysis)
BU
Switch from color to black and white (data anaysis)
BW
C
C

C n,rgb
CA
CA n
CA -n
CL
CL n,rgb
CM nn.nn
CO
CT n
CTRL/B
CTRL/C
CTRL/F
CTRL/N

Switch from black and white to color (playback)
Circumference mode (ROI)
Change a color level (color table editor)
Continue analysis (command table)
Constant add (frame algebra)
Constant subtract (frame algebra)
Switch from black and white to color (data analysis)
Change a color level (data analysis)
Constant multiply (frame a~gebra)
Call comment editor (data analysis)
Retrieve color table n from disk (data analysis)
Rever-ses CTRL/F (monitor)
Returns GAMMA-II to monitor (from any mode)
Catches the attention of the foreground terminal
(monitor)
No room for COMMAND; clear screen (data analysis)

E-l '

GAMMA-II COMMANDS IN ALPHABETICAL ORDER
CTRL/O
CTRL/R
CTRL/S
CTRL/Q
CTRL/U
CTRL/X
CTRL/X
CTRL/X
CTRT,/X
CTRL/X
CTRL/X
CTRL/X
CTRL/Z

Kills output from printing (monitor)
Restart a static frame (data acquisition)
Suspend output to the terminal (monitor)
Reinstate output to the terminal (monitor)
Deletes current input line (any mode)
Return GAMMA-II to previous level (any mode)
Exit comment editor
Exit color table editor
Exit playback mode
Exit ROI mode
Exit slice
Exit dynamic curves
Return GAMMA-II to background command table

Display edited text (comment editor)
Move cursor down one cell (regular ROI)
Move cursor down one row (slice)
Delete a color level (color table editor)
Display 8 minified images (data analysis)
Display 16 minified images (data analysis)
Dual isotope display (data analysis)
Erase a character (any mode) (same as RUBOUT)
Display full size matrix (data analysis)
Display color bar (data analysis)
Display minified images (data analysis)
Display normal image (data analysis)
Dual overlay (data analysis)
Delete predefined study (command table)
Display patient summary (data analysis)
Delete study (command table)
Delete save area (data analysis)
Dual display (data analysis)
Display index (data analysis)

D n
D8
D16
DD

DELETE
DI
DL
DM n
DN
DO
DP

D? DS
DS
DU
DX
E

E abc • .;.
EC
EL
"ESC

Erase (slice)
Erase ROI (ROI)
'Echo keyboard characters on the terminal printer (data
analysis)
Execute line (data analysis, macros)
-Edit a page (data acquisition) (same as ALTmode)

ET n

Edit color table n (color table editor)

Expand byte mode to word mode (frame algebra)

Fill mode (irregular ROI)
FA (exp)
Frame arithmetic (frame algebra)
- --''FC n,m
-Flood correction (Data analysis)
FCD n
Flood correct the displayed frame (data analysis)
Flood correct a study (data analysis)
FCS n
Frame divide high (frame algebra)
FDH n/m
Frame divide low (fr~me algebra)
FDL n/m
FO dev:filename Run FOCAL
Recall framing sequence (list mode data analysis)
FR
F

G n
I

I n,rgb
IA
IB
-IC f ,s,n
ICF f,s,n
10

IR
IS w,y

Get color table (color table editor)
Interior display (irregular ROI)
Insert new color element (color table editor)
Select isotope A (data analysis)
Select isotope B (data analysis)
- I~ocontour map (data analysis)
Isocontour fill (data analysis)
Isometric display (data analysis)
Enter irregular ROI mode (data analysis)
set isocount thresholds (data analysis)
E-2

GAMMA-II COMMANDS iN'ALPHABETICAL ORDER
ISN w,y
IT
IT2
IX

Set isocount thresholds/no enhancement (data analysis)
Interpolate display once (data analysis)
Interpolate display twice (data analysis)
Isotope exchange (data analysis)

J
J
J

Enter joystick mode (playback)
Move cursor 10 cells in last direction (regular ROI)
MOV~ cursor 10 cells in l~st direction (slice)

K
K

Kill the first mark of a pair of marks (regular ROI)
Switch from marking to unmarking (irregular ROI)

L
L

Move cursor left one cell (regular ROI)
Move cursor left one row (slice)
Load core-resident image into dual display ,(data
analysis)
Load save area n in dual display (data analysis)
Set lower thresold/contrast enhancement (data analysis)
Set lower threshold/no enhancement (data analysis)

LD
LD n
CT m,n
LTN m,n
M

MM
M
M

MC filename
MD filename
ME filename
·ML filename
MP
MR filename,n
MS filename
MX
N
N

NB
NC
NO
NI
NL
NT
NU

o
P
P

PA abc •••
PAM abc •••
PB
PB name,unit
PBD name,unit
PBI
PBM
PBS
PF

PM
FN abc •• .-

PNM abc •••
PO abc •••
POM abc •••

Display matrix with current color table (color
editor)
Manual mode (playback)
Mark a slice (slice)
Mark the present cursor location (regular ROI)
Mark ROI (irregular ROI)
Macro create (macros)
Macro delete (macros)
Macro edit (macros)
Macro load (macros)
Modify predefined study (command table)
Run macro starting at line n (macros)
Macro save (macros)
Macro exit (macro)

table

Raise isocount band (data analysis)
No blowup of image (playback)
No blowup of image (data analysis)
No printing of commands on terminal (data analysis)
No display (data analysis)
Negate image (data analysis)
Remove color bar (data analysis)
No interpolation (data analysis)
No dual display (data analysis)
No expansion of byte mode to word mode (data analysis)
Lower isocount band (data analysis)
Print-file on console (comment editor)
Print color table (color table editor)
plot overlaid average rate curves (ROI)
Plot average frame~linear curve (ROI)
plot backward window (ROI)
Play back the playback buffer (playback)
Delete playback (playback)
Create playback buffer (playback)
Playback merge (playback)
Store the core-resident -data in playback
(playback)
plot forward window (ROI)
Patient monitor (data acquisition)
plot normal dynamic curve (ROI)
plot normal frame-linear curve (ROI)
plot overlaid dynamic curves (ROI)
plot overlaid frame-linear curve (ROI)
E-3

buffer

GAMMA-II COMMANDS IN ALPHABETICAL ORDER
PP abc •••
PR
PR abc •••
PS
PU
PU Bc •••
PW f,n

Print and punch count data (ROI)
Print slice data (slice)
Print count data (ROI)
Place data on screen (slice)
Punch slice data (slice)
Punch count data (ROI)
plot window,(ROI)

Blow up a quadrant (irregular ROI)

Display ramp (color table editor)
Move cursor right one cell (regular ROI)
Move cursor right one row (slice)
Replace line n (comment editor)
R n
Accept line as input (at end of any typed line)
G!D
Display current frame in core (data analysis)
G!D
Edit and return (comment editor)
G!)
Exit color table editor (color table editor)
Redisplay current frame with ROls (ROI)
Enter regular ROI mode (data analysis)RI
RO:
Rotate matrix (data analysis)
Read ROIs (data analysis)
RRi
RS
Read save area (save area)
RU dev:filename Run FORTRAN or any RT-II.SAV file (data analysis)
R
R
R

S a
S n
n. nn
S9
SA (exp)
SO n
SOH n/m
SOL n/m
SH
SK n
SM m
SP
S~·

G:)

CD
55·
SW
ST n
SV
T

T n
TE <text>
TH n
TS

U
U
U

UO
UT n,m
UTN n,m

Switch direction (playback)
Same shape as ROI a (regular ROI)
Save color table n on disk (color table editor)
Scale factor (slice)
Nine-point smooth of matrix (data anaysis)
Save area arithmetic (save area)
Save dynamic curves in save area n (data analysis)
Save area divide high (save area)
Save area divide low (save area)
Slice horizontal (slice)
Skip forward n frames (data analysis)
Save matrix in save area m (data analysis)
Set up predefined study (command table)
Display next frame (data analysis)
Display next frame with regions of interest (ROI)
System summary (command table)
Swap the dual displays (data analysis)
Save color table n on disk (data analysis)
Slice vertical (data analysis)
Timed mode (playback)
Step through the study (ROI)
Text inserted with matrix (data analysis)
Translate matrix horizontally + right,
left
analysis)
Transfer study (command table)
Translate matrix vertically + up,
down.
analysis)

(data
(data

Blow up image (playback)
Move cursor up one cell (ROI)
Move cursor up one row (slice)
Set upper threshold display switch (data analysis)
Clear upper threshold display switch (data analysis)
Set
upper
threshold/contrast
enhancement
(data
analysis)
Set upper threshold/no enhancement (data analysis)

E-4

GAMMA-II COMMANDS IN ALPHABETICAL ORDER

w
x
y

Z
Z
Iitext
- (hyphen)

Use threshold level to mark ROI (irregular ROI)
Raise the lower threshold by step size (data analysis)
Lower the lower threshold by step size (data analysis)
Lower the upper threshold by step size (data analysis)
Raise the upper threshold by step size (data analysis)
Zero the color table (color table editor)
Put comment in a macro (comment editor)
Display previous frame with ROIs and count data (ROI)

E-5

APPENDIX F
EXITING AND REENTERING GAMMA-II

Occasionally it is necessary to exit GAMMA-II. For example, program
development
cannot
be
done
from GAMMA-II, and in-core gate
synchronized data analysis is best done with only the single job
monitor (and thus the foregroun~ programs must be removed).
To exit the foreground program (FGAMMA) type:
CTRL/F
CTRL/C
CTRL/C
NOw only the background GAMMA-II program is running.
is still in the memory taking up space •

However,

FGAMMA

.....TO exit the background program type:
CTRL/C
The monitor will respond with a dot.
To free the memory from FGAMMA type:
UNLOAD FGAMMA~
at the dot.
To restart only the background GAMMA-II, type:
RUN BGAMMA C!!!)
at the monitor dot.
To restart the foreground ,and background GAMMA-II, type:
FRUN FGAMMA~
at the monitor dot. There is a slight pause, and then the foreground
command table is present on the foreground terminal. The following
message is printed on the console:
FGAMMA LOADED AND RUNNING
Now, FGAMMA no longer references the DECwriter.
The
responds with a B) and a dot on the DECwriter. Type:

system

then

RUN BGAMMAGK)
on the terminal to
responds with the

call in the background program.
The system
background command table on the color display (or

. F-l

EXITING AND REENTERING GAMMA-II
VTOI). The commands that have a preceding asterisk are
when the foreground is running.
NOTE

If you are a single-job user, type
CTRL/C to exit GAMMA-II and R BGAMMA to
reenter.

F-2

not

operable

APPENDIX G
GLOSSARY

Definition

Term
Algori~hm

A prescribed set of
well-defined
rules
or
processes for
the solution of a problem in a
finite number of steps.

Analog

Numbers
represented
by
directly
measurable
quantities
(as
voltages,
resistances,
or
rotations) •

Array

A list or table of elements, usually variables
data.

Asymptote

A line that is the limiting position of a
to a curve as its point of contact
indefinitely along an infinite branch
curve.

Bit

A binary digit that can only have two valueS, 0
and 1. This corresponds to an electrical switch,
where 0 represents the OFF position
and
I
represents the ON position.

Block of Data

A set of consecutive machine words, characters, or
digits
handled as .a unit, particularly with
reference to Input/Output (256 words per block) .

Byte

A computer memory cell that represents a group
binary digits usually operated upon as a unit.
the PDP-II, one byte consists of eight bits
~~ta.
There are two bytes per word.

Cell

An 'element of the matrix representation of the
gamma camera field of view. The analog to digital
converters of GAMMA-II transform
the
analog
signals of the gamma camera into a digital matrix
representation of this data.
Each cell of the
matrix
represents
the
sum
of
the counts
originating in a specific area of the gamma-camera
crystal.

Collimator

A device for confining the elements
within an assigned solid angle.

Command

An instruction to a computer system, usually given
through a terminal keyboard.

Cursor

Visible pointer to a
display_
Glossary-l

grid

point. on

tangent
recedes
of the

of
In
of

beam

terminal

GLOSSARY
Dynamic

A condition that changes with respect to time.

Frame

A GAMMA-II image representing the organ over a
finite amount of time. Like a frame of a movie,
or one photograph.

Gamma Ray

High energy electromagnetic radiation.

Image

The GAMMA-II representation of
gamma camera.

Input

Information put into a peripheral device which is
transferred to the internal storage of a computer.

Mass Storage

Pertaining to a device, such as a disk or DECtape,
that
stores
large
amounts of data readily
accessible to the central processing unit.

t·1atr ix

In GAMMA-II a matrix is a 2-dimensional array of
cells, n rows by n columns, where n is 32, 64,
128, or 256. The matrix represents the surface
-area-of the gamma camera.

Output

Information transferred from the internal storage
of a computer to output devices or external
storage.

Overflow

A condition that occurs when a
mathematical
operation yields a result whose magnitude is
larger than the space allocated for storing the
result.

Parameter

A variable or an arbitrary constant appearing in a
mathematical
expression, each value of which
restricts or determines the specific form of the
expression.

prevailing Mode

A data-analysis mode that remains in effect until
GAMMA-II is commanded to change the mode. For
example, ROI, rotation.

,ScintiTlation

A flash of light produced
ionization even~.

Static

A condition that does not change with
time.

Threshold

A setting of a level above which or below
data is not displayed, analyzed, etc.

Truncation

The reduction of precision by dropping one or more
of the least significant digits; e.g., 3.141597
truncated to four decimal digits 3.141.

Underflow

A condition that occurs when a
mathematical
operation yields a -result whose magnitude is
smaller than the space allocated for storing the
result. For unsigned arithmetic, a result that is
negative.

Weight

A numerical representation of importance.

Word

A computer memory cell. In the PDP-II,
consists of l6-bits of data.
Glossary-2

the

data

from

phosphor

respect

one

which

word

INDEX

! command, 5-67

II command, 5-65
: command, 5-67
? command, 5-68

. A command, 5-58, 5-62, 7-9
Acquire Patient Study, 4-3
AD command, 5-1 to 5-3, 5-34
AF command, 4-24
Algorithm, G-l
ALTMODE, 3-8
Analog, G-l
Analyze Data, 5-1, 5-2
AP command, 4-27
Array, G-l
AS command, 4-3
Asymptote, G-l
Autoanalysis, 5-83

B command, 7-15
BA command, 5-70
Backgroun.d, 2-1
Background Command Table,
3-3
BE command, 5-13
Beginning of Study, 5-13
Bit, G-l
BK command, 5-12
Black and White, 6-1
Block, G-l
Blow-up, 6-15
Booting GAMMA-II, A-I, B-1
Boundary Display, 7-15
BU command, 6-15
BW command, 6-1
Byte, G-l

C command, 6-7, 7-10
CA command, 5-1, 5-4, 5-30
Call Comment Editor, 5-57
Camera parameters, 4-6, 4-7,
4-9, 4-10
Camera settings, 4-7 to 4-9
Cell, G-l
Change Color Level, 6-7
Circumference Mode, 7-10
CL command, 6-2, 6-5
Close Frame on Overflow,
4-13
CM command, 5-31
CO command, 5-57

Collection parameters, 4-10
dynamic, 4-16 to 4-18
flood, 4-25, 4-26
list, 4-21, 4-22
static, 4-11 to 4-13
Collection rates,
dynamic, 4-20
Collimator, G-l
Color, 6-2
Color Level, 6-3
Color Table, 6-3, 6-4
Color Table Editor, 6-5
Command, G-l
1, 5-67
II, 5-65

:, 5-67
?, 5-68

A, 5-58, 5-62, 7-9
AD, 5-1 to 5-3, 5-34
AF, 4-24
AP, 4-27
AS, 4-3
B, 7-15
BA, 5-70
BE, 5-13
BK, 5-12
BU, 6-15
BW, 6-1
C, 6-7, 7-10
CA, 5-1, 5-4, 5-30
CL, 6-2, 6-5
CM, 5-31
CO, 5-57
CT, 6-4

CTRL/R, 4-16
0, 5-58, 5-62, 6-8, 7-3,
8-3
08, 6-29
016, 6-29
DO, 5-15
01, 5-8
OL, 6-2
OM, 5-8, 5-9
DO, 6-17
OP, 4-30, 5-10
OS, 5-44, 10-1
OU, 6-16
OX, 5=10
E, 7-6, 8-3
EC, 5-59
EL, 5-66
ET, 6-6
EX, 5-33
F, 7-11
FA, 5-35, 5-36
FC, 9-2 to 9-4
FeD, 9-5
Index-l

INDEX (CaNT.)

command (Cont.)
FCS, 9-6
FOH, 5-38
FOL, 5-39
FO, 5-71
FR, 5-76
G, 6-9
Hyphen, 7-17
I, 6-8, 7-15
lA, 5-14
IB, 5-14
IC, 5-46,5-47
ICF, 5-47, 5-48
10, 5-51
IR, 7-7'
IS, 5-22
!ISN, 5-28
,IT, 6-11
'ITZ, 6-11
IX, 5-14
J, 8-3
K, 7-5, 7-8
L, 7-3, 8-3
LO, 6-16
LT, 5-17
LTN, 5-25
M, 6~10, 7-4, 8-3
MC, 5-61
MO, 5-65
ME, 5-61
ML, 5-63
MP,! 4-29
MR, 5-63, 5-64
MS, 5-64
MX, 5-65
N, 5-23
NB, 6-15
NC, 5-59
NO, 5-10
NI, 5-32
NL, 6-3
NT, 6-11
NU, 6-17
NX, 5-33
0, 5-24
P, 4-27, 5-59, 5-62, 6-9
PA, 7-20, 7-32
PAM, 7-26
PB, 6-25, 7-31
PBO, 6-26
PB I, 6 - 22, 6 - 2 3
PBM, 6-27
PBS, 6-23 to 6-25
PF, 7-29
PM, 4-37
PN, 7-17, 7-32
PNM, ]-20
PO , 7 -18, 7 - 3 2
POM, 7-25
PP, 7-34

Command (Con t. )
PR, 7-32, 8-8
PS, 8-9
PU, 7-34, 8-9
PW, 7-26 to 7-28
Q, 7-9
R, 5-58, 5-62, 6-10, 7-4,
8-3
RETURN, 5-12, 5-13, 5-58,
5.;...62, 7-16
RO, 5-53
RR, 5-44
RS, 5-43
RU, 5-70
S, 6-9, 7-5, 8-7
S9, 5-45
SA, 5-36, 5-37
SO, 5-42
SOH, 5-39
SOL, 5-40
SH, 8-1, 8-3
SK, 5-11
SM, 5-42
SP, 4-26, 4-27
Space Bar, 5-11, 7-16
SS, 4-1
ST, 6-4
SV, 8-2, 8-3
SW, 6-18
T, 7-6
TE, 5-60
TH, 5-55
TS, 11-1
TV, 5-54
U, 7-3, 8-3
UM, 5-21
UO, 5-22
UT, 5-18
UTN, 5-26, 5-27
V, 7-11
W, 5-18
X, 5-19
Y, 5-19
Z, 5-20, 6-7
Command summary, 0-1, E-1
Comment editor, 5-57
Comment line, 5-65
Complemented image,. 5-32
Conditional, 5-67, 5-68
Configurations,
matrix~ 4-2, 4-31, 4-32
Consecutive Add, 5-34
Constant Add, 5-30
Constant Arithmetic, 5-30
Constant Multiply, 5-31
Constant Subtract, 5-30
Continue Analysis, 5-4
Contrast enhancement, 5-15,
5-16
Create Playback Buffer, 6-22
Index-2

INDEX (CONT • )

CT command, 6-4
CTRL/A, 3-8
CTRL/B, 3-7
CTRL/C, 3-7
CTRL/D, 3-.7
CTRL/E, 3-8, 3-9
CTRL/F, 3-7
CTRL/Q, 3-8
CTRL/R, 4-16
CTRL/S, 3-8
CTRL/U; 3-7
CTRL/X, 3-10
CTRL/Z, 3-10
Cursor, G-l
Curve,
dynamic, 7-17
slice, 8-4
Cutoff, 9-3

D command, 5-58, 5-62, 6-8,
7-3, 8-3
D8command, 6-29
D16 command, 6-29
Data collection,
dynamic study, 4-19
gate-synchronized, 4-36
list, 4-23, 4-24
static study, 4-15, 4-16
DD command, 5-15
.DELETE, 3-6
Delete Color Level, 6-8
Delete Playback Buffer,
6-26
. De"letePredefined Study,
4-30

. Dele,te . .5aveArea., 5-44
Delet'ion,
file, 10-1, 10-2
DI command, 5-8
'Disk,
squeeze, 10-3, 10-4
Display Eight Images, 6-29
Display frame, 5-4, 5-5
Display Framing Sequence,
5-76
Display Index, 5-10
Display Levels, 6-2
Display Matrix, 6-10
Display Normal, 5-52
Display Patient Study, 5-10
Display Ramp, 6-10
Display Sixteen Images,
6-29
''DL command ,6-2
DM command, 5-8, 5-9
DO command, 6-17
Double Ipterpolation, 6-11
Down, 7-3

DP command, 4-30, 5-10
DS command, 5-44, 10-1
DU command, 6-16
Dual display, 6-15, 6-16
Dual isotope display, 5-15
Dual isotope study, 4-16,
4-19, 4-20
Dual isotopes, 5-13, 5-14
Dual overlay, 6-17
OX command, 5-10
Dynamic, G-2
Dynamic collection
parameters, 4-16 to 4-18
Dynamic collection rates,
4-20
Dynamic curve, 7-17
Dynamic patient study
•
summary, 5-3
Dynamic playback, 6-18 to 6-21
Dynamic study,
definition, 1-4
Dynamic study data
collection, 4-19
Dynamic study summary, 4-18,
4-19

E command, 7-6, 8-3
.EC command, 5-59
Echo Keyboard Characters,
5-59
Edit Color Table, 6-6
EL command, 5-66
Enla~ge Area of Image, 7-9
Entering GAMMA-II, F-l
Erase Cells, 7-8

. Erase Mark, 7-5
Erase ROI, 7-6
Erase Slice, 8-3
Error messages, 9-4, 9-7
Error processin~, 5-6, 5-7,
5-83
ESCAPE, 3-8
ET command, 6-6
EX command, 5-33
Execute line, 5-66
Exiting GAMMA-II, F-l
Expand, 5-33

F command, 7-11
FA command, 5-35, 5-36
FC command, 9-2 to 9-4
FCn command, 9~5
FCS command, 9-6
FDH command, 5-38
FDL command, 5-39
File deletion, In-l# lD-2
Index-3

INDEX (CONT • )

Fill mode, 7-11
Flood-collection parameters,
4-25, 4-26
Flood correction, 9-2, 9-3, 9-8
Flood study, 4-24, 9-1
definition, 1-4
Flood-correction matrix,9-1,9-4
Flood-correction program, 9-3
Flood-study matrix, 9-2
FO command, 5-71
Foreground, 2-1
Foreground Command Table, 3-6
Foreground/background, 2-1
FR command, 5-76
Frame, G-2
Frame Algebra, 5-29
Frame Arithmetic, 5-34 to 5-36
Frame Divide High, 5-38
Frame Divide Low, 5-39
Frame Division, 5-38
Frame-Linear Scale, 7-20
Framing, 5-77 to 5-82
Full Size Display, 5-8

G command, 6-9
Gamma ray, G-2
Gate mark, 5-77
Gate-synchronized data
collection, 4-36
Gate-synchronized
precollection, 4-35
Gate-synchronized study,
collection parameters, 4-33,
4-34
definition, 1-5
in-core, 4-32
Gate-synchronized study
summary, 4-35
Gated list-mode study,
5-77 to 5-82
definition, 1-5
Get Color Table, 6-9
Group, 1-4

Horizontal slice, 8-1
Hyperbolic images, 5-41
Hyphen command, 7-17

I command, 6-8, 7-15
IA command, 5-14
IS command, 5-14
IC command, 5-46, 5-47
ICF command, 5-47, 5-48

ID command, 5-51
Image, G-2
Input, G-2
Insert Color Level, 6-8
Intensity Level, 6-3
threshold, 5-15, 5-16
Interior Display, 7-15
Interpolation, 6-10, 6-11
double, 6-11
IR command, 7-7
Irregular Region of
Interest, 7-7
IS command, 5-22
ISN command, 5-28
Isocontour Fill, 5-47, 5-48
Isocontour Map, 5-46, 5-47
Isocount Thresholds, 5-22
Isometric imag~; 5-51
Isometrics display, 5-51
Isotope Exchange, 5-14
IT command, 6-11
ITZ command, 6-11
IX command, 5-14

J command, 7-4, 8-3
Jump, 7-4

K command, 7-5, 7-8
Kill, 7-5

L command, 7-3, 8-3
LD command, 6-16
Left, 7-3
Level,
color, 6-3
intensity, 6-3
threshold, 5-15, 5-16
List collection parameters,
4-21, 4-22
List data collection, 4-23,
.
4-24
List study, 4-21
definition, 1-5
framing, 5-71 to 5-74
gated, 5-77 to 5-82
summar~, 4-23, 5-72
Load Dual Display, 6-16
Loading an RK06, C-l
Loading GAMMA-II, A-I, 8-1
Lower Band, 5-24
Lower Lower Threshold, 5-19
Lower Upper Threshold, 5-19
LT command, 5-17
LTN command, 5-25

Index-4

INDEX (CONT • )

M command, 6-10, 7-4, 8-3
Macro buffer, 5-60
Macro Create, 5-61,
Macro Delete, 5-65
Macro Edit, 5-61
Macro Editor, 5-61
Macro Exit, 5-65
Macro Load, 5-63
Macro Run, 5-63, 5-64
Macro Save, 5-64
Macros, 5-60, 5-68
Mark, 7-4, 7-7, 8-3
Mass storage, G-2
Matrix, G-2
flood-correction, 9-1,
9-4
flood-study, 9-2
Matrix configuration~4-2,
4-31, 4-32
Matrix size, 4-3
Matrix type, 4-3
MC command, 5-61
MD command, 5-65
ME command, 5-61
Minified Display, 5-8, 5-9
ML command, 5-63
Mode,
circumference, 7-10
fill, 7-11
no-enhancement, 5-24
zoom, 4-10
Modify predefi~ed Study,
4-29
MP command, 4-29
MR command, 5-63, 5-64
-'-MScommand, -5-64
Multiple command lines, 5-7
Multiplicative nonlinear
image, 5-41
MX command, 5-65

N command, 5-23
NB command, 6-15
NC command, 5-59
NO command, 5-10
Negative Image, 5-32
Next Frame, 5-11
NI command, 5-32
NL command, 6-3
No Blow-Up, 6-15
No Display, 5-10
No Display Levels, 6-3
No Dual Display, 6-17
'"'No 'Echo, 5-59
No Expansion, 5-33
No Interpolation, 6-11
NO-Enhancement Isocount
~hresho1ds, 5-28, 5-29

No-Enhancement Lower
Threshold, 5-25, 5-26
No-Enhancement Mode, 5-24
No-Enhancement Upper
Threshold, 5-26, 5-27
Nonlinear images, 5-40
NT command, 6-11
NU command, 6-17
NX command, 5-33

o command, 5-24
Output, G-2
Overflow, G-2
P command, 4-27, 5-59, 5-62,
6-9
PA command, 7-20, 7-32
PAM command, 7-26
Pa,rameter, G-2
Patient data, 4-4, 4-5
Patient Monitor, 4-35, 4-37
Patient Study Index, 5-2, 5-3
patient study summary,
dynamic, 5-3
static, 5-3
PB command, 6-25, 7-31
PBD command, 6-26
PBI command, 6-22, 6-23
PBM command, 6-27
PBS command, 6-23 to 6-25
PF command, 7-29
'-Place data on screen, 8-':'9
Playback, 6-25
",dynamic, 6-18 to 6-.21
Playback buffer, 6-19, 6-21
Playback Initialize, 6-22
Playback Merge, 6-27
~~layback Store, 6-23
plot Average Frame-Linear
Curves, 7-26
plot Backward Window, 7-31
plot Forward window, 7-29
Plot Normal Dynamic Curves,
7-17
plot Normal Frame-Linear
Curves, 7-20
plot Overlaid Average Rate
Cur-ves, 7-20
plot Overlaid Dynamic
Curves, 7-18
Plot Overlaid Frame-Linear
'Curves, 7-25
Plot Window, 7-26 to 7-28
Plotted averages, 7-31
PM command, 4-37
PN command, 7-17, 7-32
Index-5

INDEX (CONT • )

PNM command, 7-20
PO command, 7-18, 7-32
POM command, 7-25
PP command, 7-34
PR command, 7-32, 8-8
Precollection,
gate-synchronized, 4-35
Precollection frame, 4~15,
4-19
Predefined study, 4-26
definition, 1-5
Predefined study index,
4-28
Predefined study summary,
4-28
Prevailing mode, G-2
- Print and punch Count Data ,
7-34
Print Color Table, 6-9
Print Count Data, 7-32
Print Slice Data, 8-8
PS command, 8-9
PU command, 7-34, 8-9
Punch Count Data, 7-34
,Punch Slice Data, 8-9
PW command, 7-26 to 7-28

Q command, 7-9

R command, 5-58,' 5-62, 6-10,
7-4, 8-3
Raise Band, 5-23
Raise Lower Threshold, 5-18
Raise Upper Threshold, 5-20
Ramp, 6-10
Read Regions of Interest,
5-44
Read Save Area, 5-43
Region of Interest, 7-5
definition, 7-1
irregular, 7-7
regular, 7-2
Regular Region of Interest,
7-2
Repeat Line, 5-67
Restart Static Frame, 4-16
Restore Current Frame, 5-12
Retrieve Color Table, 6-4
RETURN, 3-6
RETURN command, 5-12, 5-13,
5-58, 5-62, 7-16

Ri9hL 7-4
RK06,
loading an, C-1
RO command, 5-53

Rotate Data, 5-53
Rotate Image, 5-52
RR command, 5-44
RS command, 5-43
RU command, 5-70
RUBOUT, 3-6
Run BASIC, 5-69, 5-70
Run FOCAL, 5-69, 5-71
Run FORTRAN, 5-69, 5-70

S command, 6-9, 7-5, 8-7
S9 command, 5-45
SA command, 5-36, 5-37
Same Shape, 7-5
Save Area Arithmetic, 5-36,
5-37
Save Area commands, 5-42
Save Area Divide High, 5-39
Save Area Divide Low, 5-40
Save Area use, 7-34
Save Color Table, 6-4, 6-9
Save Dynamic Curves, 5-42
Save Matrix, 5-42
Scale Factor, 8-7
Scaling, 6-21
Scintillation, G-2
SD command, 5-42
SDH command, 5-39
SDL command, 5-40
Select Isotope A, 5-14
Select Isotope B, 5-14
Set Isocount Thresholds,
5-22
Set Lower Threshold, 5-17
Set Upper Threshold, 5-18
Set Upper Threshold Display
Switch, 5-21
Set Up Patient Study, 4-3
Set Up Predefined Study,
4-26
SH command, 8-1, 8-3
SK command, 5-11
Skip Backward, 5-12
Skip Forward, 5-11
Slice,
horizontal, 8-1
vertical, 8~2
Slice Curve Scales, 8-7
Slice Cu~ves, 8-4
Slice Horizontal, 8-3
Slice Tabular Data, 8-8
Slice Vertical, 8-3
SM command, 5-42
Smooth ~QI!LI!!~I1~?-=-45
SP command, 4-26, 4-27
Space Bar command, 5-11, 7-16
Squeeze disk, 10-3, 10-4

Index-6

INDEX (CONT • )

SScommand, 4-1
ST command, 6-4
Static, G-2
Static: collection
p~rameters, 4-11, 4-12
Static Patient Study
S;ummary, 5-3
Stat~:c study,
definition, 1-4
multiple-frame, 1-4
Static study data
collection, 4-15, 4-16
Static Study Summary, 4-13,
4-14
Step Through the Study, 7-6
Study,
definition dynamic, 1-4
definition flood, 1-4
definition
gate-synchronized, 1-5
definition gated-list, 1-5
definition list, 1-5
definition predefined, 1-5
definition static, 1-4
dual isotope, 4-16, 4-19,
4-20
flood, 4-24, 9-1
gated list-mode, 5-77 to 5-82
list, 4-21
multiple-frame static, 1-4
predefined, 4-26
transfer, 11-1
Study index,
predefined, 4-28
Study summary,
dynamic, 4-18, 4-19
gate-synchronized, 4-35
list, 4-23
predefined, 4-28
static, 4-13, 4-14
SV command, 8-2, 8-3
SW command, 6-18
Swap, 6-18
System Summary, 4-1, 4-2·

TE command, 5-60
Text, 5-60
TH command, 5-55
Threshold, G-2
Threshold Adjustment, 7-16
Threshold Intensity Levels,
5-15, 5-16
Time marks, 5-77
Transfer Study, 11-1
Translate Horizontal, 5-55
Translate Image, 5-52
Translate Vertical, 5-54
Truncation, G-2
TS command, 11-1
TV. command, 5-54

T command, 7-6
Tabular data, 7-32, 7-33
Tabular data, slice, 8-8

Z command, 5-20, 6-7
Zero Color Table, 6-7
Zoom mode, 4-10

U command, 7-3, 8-3
UM command, 5-21
Underflow, G-2
UO command, 5-22
Up, 7-3
UT command, 5-18
UTN command, 5-26, 5-27

V command, 7-11
Vertical slice, 8-2, 8-3

W command, 5-18
Weight, G-2
Word, G-2

X command, 5-19

Y command, 5-19

Index-7

GAMMA-II
Operator's Guide
AA-2185B-TC

READER'S COMMENTS
NOTE:

This form is for document comments only. DIGITAL will
use comments submitted on this form at the company's
discretion. Problems with software should be reported
on a Software Performance Report (SPR) form. If you
require a written reply and are eligible to receive
one under SPR service, .submit your comments on an SPR
form.

Did you find errors in this manual?

If so, specify by page.

t
I
I

I
I

I
I
I

•

Did you find this manual understandable, usable, and well-organized?
Please make suggestions for improvement.

ICD

••5
I.~

r£

10)
c:
1..2

.;-"

...

1°

IB
10
..,
I

1a::

•

I
I
I
I
I
I

Is there sufficient documentation on associated system programs
required for use of the software described in this manual? If not,
what material is missing and where should it be placed?

Please indicate the type of user/reader that you most nearly represent.
[] Assembly language programmer
[] Higher-level language programmer
[J Occasional programmer (experienced)
[] User with little programming experience
[] Student programmer
[] Non-programmer interested in computer concepts and capabilities

l
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I

Name

Date _________________________

Organization ______________________________________________________________

Street ____________________________________________________

I
I
I
I
I
I
I

City _________________________ State ____________ Zip Code ______
or
Country

~------------

_____